US20060129933A1 - System and method for multimedia authoring and playback - Google Patents

Abstract

A multimedia authoring and playback system and method in which the playback of multimedia content is presented in one or more windows or displays called “playback displays,” and in which additional windows or displays called “control displays” are included in some embodiments to provide various management and control functions. Included are features for creating, editing and distributing multimedia content, which may be viewed by recipients who play the content (and in some cases may be allowed to modify it); also included are features for programming playback behavior of multimedia content, interconnecting multimedia content, and exploring and navigating through multimedia content.

Description

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
• This application is a continuation-in-part application of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/325,898 filed on Dec. 18, 2002, which is a continuation-in-part application of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/027,430, filed on Dec. 19, 2001. This application claims priority under 35 U.S.C. 120 from U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/325,898 and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/027,430 and claims priority under 35 U.S.C. 365(c) from PCT Patent Application No. PCT/US01/50458, filed Dec. 19, 2001 and PCT Application No. PCT/US02/40623 filed Dec. 18, 2002. Both U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/027,430 and PCT Application No. PCT/US01/50458 claim priority from U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/256,862, filed Dec. 19, 2000. The subject matter of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/325,898, U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/027,430, PCT Application No. PCT/US01/50458, PCT Application No. PCT/US02/40623 and U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/256,862 are incorporated herein by reference.
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
• The present invention relates generally to the creation and presentation of multimedia content, including presentations, electronic greetings, slideshows, websites, movies and other forms of computer-based visual and audio-visual content, and more specifically to a multimedia authoring and playback system with improved features for the creation and presentation of multimedia content.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
• Since the early 1990's, as the processing power of computers has increased, so has their ability to produce and present high-quality visual and audio-visual content in the form of games, applications, animations, presentations and the like. With the Internet explosion of the late 1990's, the ability of computers to share this content over a network and present it online has become increasingly important. Yet the tools for authoring, viewing, publishing and sharing of this content have evolved from disparate sources and specialized needs, and bring with them individual legacies and collective incompatibilities. Furthermore, the evolution of these tools has failed to keep pace with the growing mass market of computer users. In particular, many of the authoring tools were initially designed for professional use, and attempts to “dumb them down” for non-professional users have lead to mixed results.
• In general, multimedia tools typically provide certain basic authoring and control features. These include capabilities for creating and/or importing media objects that contain media data (which can include text data, image data, video data, animated graphics data, sound data and other data representative of visual and/or audio information), editing media data, editing display settings that determine how media data is displayed, programming playback behavior that controls how media data is presented, organizing and structuring objects, and outputting finished pieces of multimedia content that can then be stored on Internet-enabled servers and linked together via the World Wide Web. All of these features can vary from system to system.
• In general, the features of an authoring system are implemented according to the expected skill level of the user of the system. For example, an author may want to specify the circumstances under which a given media object starts and stops playing, its on-screen size and location, time-based or event-driven changes to its size and location, and various other playback behaviors appropriate to the object. The means by which this is done needs to be tailored to the expected skill level of the author. Therefore, the features of an authoring system tend to vary greatly depending on how sophisticated the author is assumed to be. Typically, some of the most significant variations among system features tend to occur in features which allow playback behavior to be specified by authors.
• In systems where the author is assumed to be sophisticated, a great deal of power and control is generally provided for specifying playback behavior, but at a price in terms of difficulty and complexity. For example, a professional Web developer may need to create a cutting-edge, science-fiction-style user interface for a major entertainment website, in which extremely detailed control over the playback behavior of media objects is needed to provide the expected degree of activity and responsiveness. The prevailing method for achieving this level of control involves the use of scripting, exemplified by Javascript used in conjunction with HTML in Web applications and by proprietary scripting languages built into many high end authoring systems (such as Macromedia Flash® MX).
• Scripting methods operate at their most basic level by associating a list of instructions, called a script, with a triggering event. The possible triggering events for scripts vary, and can include real-time input from the user interface, timers and clocks, trigger points within media object timelines, other scripts, etc. When the triggering event for a script occurs, a script playback engine, called an interpreter, reads the instructions in the script and performs the actions and procedures specified therein. In a multimedia system, these actions and procedures typically include not only the features customarily found in any programming environment, such as subroutines, conditional branches, general purpose variables, math operations, etc., but they also include facilities for controlling and manipulating the playback of media objects.
• Regardless of the specific instructions supported by a particular scripting method, current methods of scripting are often unsatisfactory due to the procedural nature of scripting. Especially when dealing with highly interactive multimedia presentations with numerous possible states and paths, the step-by-step nature of the script tends to obscure the true structure of the content, and requires substantial mental visualization, i.e. sophistication, on the part of the author to be used effectively. As a result, current methods of scripting have significant drawbacks in multimedia authoring systems where ease of use for unsophisticated authors is needed.
• One drawback is that the procedures used to create the scripts are abstract and fragmented, and do not correspond either directly or intuitively to the shape and structure of the resulting multimedia presentation. This problem becomes worse as the size and complexity of the multimedia presentation increases. To create a set of scripts that represents a highly interactive or expansive presentation, a large number of non-intuitive, interrelated procedures must be performed, often presenting a complex or frustrating burden to authors, particularly those who are inexperienced.
• Another drawback is that current methods of scripting frequently result in rigid or too simplistic algorithms for determining the activity in a presentation. This tendency often leads to mechanical-looking results and misses the objective of creating appealing and entertaining multimedia content. For authors attempting to create multimedia content that is attractive or interesting to a viewing audience, this presents a burden in delivering appropriate results.
• Therefore, current methods which use scripting to enable the author to specify the playback behavior of media objects are generally unable to provide the clarity, intuitiveness, and ease of use required to enable unsophisticated authors to produce high quality multimedia content.
• In some authoring systems, a primary goal is ease of use for unsophisticated authors. For example, in a system which allows consumers to present a slide-show of family photographs on a personal website, only minimal control over the playback behavior of media objects is needed (i.e., selection of the order of the photographs), but the process of specifying that control must be simple enough to be easily understood by the average consumer. One method for enabling the author to specify the playback behavior of media objects where the manner of specifying is simple and easy to understand involves the use of templates.
• Template methods in this field operate at their most basic level by associating individual media objects or sets of media objects with specified roles or events within a template. A template is a piece of multimedia content in which the playback behavior of the media objects has been programmed in advance, but in which some or all of the media objects have been left unspecified. Once the author has assigned one or more media objects to their desired roles or events within the template, the system incorporates the specified media objects into the template and outputs the combination as a finished piece of multimedia content.
• Regardless of the specific methods used to associate media objects with roles or events within a template, current methods that use templates are frequently unsatisfactory due to the pre-programmed nature of the template, and because the author generally has no input into the structure of the template or the functionality it provides. Particularly with regard to multimedia presentations where individuality or uniqueness is desirable, an author's creative intentions are frequently unable to be realized using templates. As a result, current methods using templates have significant drawbacks where flexible or detailed control over the playback of media objects is desired.
• One drawback with current methods using templates is that the procedures undertaken to develop templates cannot take into account each individual author's needs and tastes, but must rather make broad assumptions about authors in general. This limits the ability of templates to produce results which satisfy a variety of author's intentions and preferences.
• Another drawback is that current methods using templates typically result in media object behavior that is generic or overly simplistic. This tendency often leads to multimedia content which is “canned” looking or otherwise unsophisticated. For authors that wish to create unique or sophisticated content, this presents a burden in delivering appropriate results.
• Therefore, current systems and methods using templates to enable the author to specify the playback behavior of media objects are generally unable to provide the flexibility and author-specific control needed for satisfactory authoring of custom multimedia content.
• In some authoring systems, the passage of time is used as an organizing principle for controlling the playback behavior of media objects. This would include systems designed to allow a consumer to shoot several minutes of home video and edit it into a one minute “movie” (an example being Apple Computer's® iMovie®); this would also include systems designed to allow a professional graphic artist to create frame-based animations and animated graphics (an example being Macromedia Flash® MX). In general, such systems provide the ability to take a number of separate media elements, such as text items, images, video segments, sound effects, musical clips, etc., and organize them in time. One way to provide this ability this is through the use of timelines.
• Timeline methods in this field operate at their most basic level by providing means for the author to arrange media objects along a line which is divided into frames, each frame representing a discrete, constant unit of time passing. The “frame rate” of a timeline specifies the length of this constant unit; for example, a frame rate of ten frames per second means that each unit is a tenth of a second long. The timeline may further be divided into independent data paths or “layers” which allow the author to develop the behavior of several media objects in parallel. For example, one layer could be used for a background object, and separate layers might be used for each of several foreground objects. Additional features may be provided for organizing timelines into interconnected “scenes”, creating looping timelines, nesting timelines within timelines, and exporting the results as completed “movies.” Typically, finished movies are played back using a player application or Web browser plug-in. The application or plug-in interprets the movie data on a frame-by-frame basis and displays it to the end user.
• Regardless of the specific methods used for defining playback behavior in time, current methods that use timelines are frequently unsatisfactory due to the inherently linear nature of representing object behavior along a timeline. In situations where the content being produced needs to be interactive for the end user, the behavior may involve many branching and converging paths, as well as conditions which may last for indefinite periods of time. Structures such as these are not easy to represent within the linear format of timelines. As a result, current methods using timelines have significant drawbacks when interactive or non-linear behavior for media objects is desired.
• One drawback with current methods using timelines is that in order to achieve interactive playback, the timeline must be broken into segments, each of which represents part of the presentation. These segments, while still presented to the author as sequential and linear, may in fact be controlled by various jump, loop and branch commands, so that in fact they do not correspond either directly or intuitively to the shape and structure of the resulting multimedia presentation. This problem becomes worse as the level of interactivity of the presentation increases, often presenting a complex or frustrating burden to authors, particularly those who are inexperienced.
• Another drawback is that timelines, even those which have been broken into individually controllable segments, typically produce multimedia content that has a repetitive or “looping” feel. This is because with timelines it is difficult to define several independently occurring processes, each with their own sense of time, that overlap and interact in unpredictable and varied ways. This limitation presents a substantial burden in creating multimedia content with enough variety and interest to merit extended or repeated viewings.
• Some tools providers have attempted to address the problems of timeline methods by combining them with other methods, such as scripting and templates. In systems that combine timelines and scripting methods (such as Macromedia Flash® MX), the scripting has the same drawbacks as discussed above. In systems that combine timelines and template methods, the templates are typically canned sequences produced by professionals that can be laid out, interconnected and adjusted somewhat by the author. For example, the author may be able to specify some color schemes, fonts and custom text that appears in the animations. Examples of this approach are found at the website Moonfruit.com. But timeline templates present similar problems to the templates already discussed. They are inflexible, limit the creative input of the user and often result in a canned look.
• Therefore, current systems and methods using timelines to enable the author to specify the playback behavior of media objects are generally unable to provide the flexibility and variety needed for satisfactory authoring of non-linear multimedia content.
• The techniques described in the preceding discussion for enabling authors to specify playback behavior represent the most common techniques currently in use in the field. There is a broad variety of existing systems available to professional authors and consumers which employ these techniques, and these systems also include various capabilities for handling other aspects of content creation as mentioned above (such as creating and importing media objects, editing media data, editing display settings that determine how media data is displayed, organizing and structuring objects, outputting finished pieces of multimedia content, etc.). A representative overview of these systems is now provided.
• The category of tools designed for use by professional authors includes the following systems. Macromedia Flash® MX and Adobe LiveMotion™ are professional authoring and animation tools based on timelines and used for creating animations and interactive objects for Web pages and other presentations. Macromedia Dreamweaver® is a professional Web authoring tool used for creating and updating websites with a variety of text, picture and animation objects. Adobe Photoshop® is a professional art and digital photo editing tool which allows users to create and edit digital images. Tribeworks iShell™ and Quark Systems mTropolis® are professional multimedia authoring tools used to make presentations for CD-ROMs, kiosks and other location-based applications.
• The category of tools designed for use by consumers includes the following systems. Roxio (formerly MGI) Photosuite® is a digital photo editing tool used to acquire and touch up digital photos, add effects and text and save them as standard picture files. Logitech QuickCam® is a consumer tool (most recent Windows version is ImageStudio™) for capturing and editing digital photos and videos. Roxio (formerly MGI) Videowave™ is a consumer video editing tool used to acquire digital videos, edit them and add effects, and save the results as video files. Yahoo PageBuilder™ is a web-based consumer Web authoring tool which allows users to create Web pages online and add various animated effects. (Macromedia) Shockwave PhotoJam® allows users to create animated slide presentations using digital pictures and a number of built-in effects. Microsoft PowerPoint® is a slide presentation tool that allows the user to create sequential slide shows of text, pictures, movies and colored backgrounds. Moonfruit Sitemaker™ is a web-based consumer authoring tool (available online at www.moonfruit.com) used for creating and updating websites with a variety of text, picture and animation objects. SWiSHzone.com SWiSH™ is a consumer authoring tool (available online at www.swishzone.com) used for creating Flash animations.
• In addition, the following systems, while not strictly focused on authoring, include features which relate to aspects of the present invention. Groove Networks Groove® is a peer-to-peer collaboration tool with basic visual authoring features allowing users to create and edit different types of documents collaboratively online. Jazz™ is a zooming user interface (ZUI) system under development at the University of Maryland, based on an earlier system, Pad++, developed at NYU and University of Mexico, which presents data objects as existing in a virtual space with infinite resolution that provides new ways to organize and view data. An application in the Jazz system is the CounterPoint™ plug-in forMicrosoft PowerPoint 2000® which allows slides in a slide show presentation to be arranged on a two dimensional surface.
• Regardless of which systems and methods are used during the authoring stage, the final stage of multimedia content creation typically involves outputting a finished piece of multimedia content and distributing it. This frequently involves exporting the content to a computer file which can then be stored on an Internet-enabled server and linked with other files via the World Wide Web. For example, someone using a web authoring tool to create a personal home page will typically output the page as a browser-readable HTML file and store it on a Web server, at which point the author's friends and family can view the page in their browsers and can put links to it in their own home pages.
• This linking method provided by the World Wide Web allows separate pieces of multimedia content located on different computers and authored by different people to be connected together by including within one piece of multimedia content a reference to the Web address of another. A broad variety of authoring systems used to create multimedia content depend on this linking method of the World Wide Web to interconnect pieces of multimedia content stored on different computers.
• The linking method provided by the World Wide Web operates at its most basic level by defining a browser-readable format for Web content called HTML (which may be extended by Javascript and downloadable browser “plug-ins” that read and play custom formats). Authors can associate a triggering event in one piece of Web content, such as the user clicking on a particular line of text displayed in the browser, with the Web address of a second piece of Web content. When the triggering event occurs, the browser discards the current piece of Web content and loads and displays the second piece of Web content, effecting a page change. The address specified in the link identifies the desired Web content in terms of the Web server on which it is stored, using either the Internet Protocol (IP) address of the server or a registered domain name (such as www.amazon.com) that is converted into the IP address by a Domain Name Server (DNS).
• Linked pages created and posted to Web servers are viewed in a browser, which is a playback program that allows people to traverse, or “navigate,” through the distributed content page by page. It should be noted that this user “navigation” through distributed content is different from user “exploration” of files on the hard drive, such as that provided by Microsoft® Windows®, which involves traversing through a hierarchical file system (HFS) typically presented using a desktop metaphor. With exploration, the current location is defined within the context of the hierarchy, and means are provided to explore up or down in the hierarchy by opening nested containers called folders and presenting their contents. With navigation on the other hand, location is not defined within the context of a hierarchy. Rather, the content of a file or object being examined is displayed directly, and information is maintained about the file or object that was previously examined. A “back” function is provided to return to the previous file or object, and a “forward” function may be provided to return to the most recent content that a “back” function has been executed from.
• The method used by Web browsers to effect page changes is conceptually simplistic, involving first discarding the current page and then loading and displaying the next. This approach often results in problems with the quality of the “Web surfing” experience provided to users of the browser. Particularly when it comes to effective presentation of link destinations, and the smoothness of transitions between Web pages, the linking method of the World Wide Web and its implementation by Web browsers can have significant drawbacks.
• The main problem with the linking method of the World Wide Web is that the procedures a Web browser uses to access data for a new page do not begin until the triggering event for the link has occurred. This means that after clicking on a link, the user must wait for the data of the new page to load before seeing the new page, which often takes a substantial amount of time. Furthermore, when using a browser, the user cannot preview the actual destination of the link prior to committing to the page transition, but can only evaluate the destination based on information provided in the current page, which is frequently inadequate. As a result, users frequently become frustrated after triggering links which are slow to load, irrelevant to the purposes at hand, or both. This presents a substantial burden in providing an efficient and pleasing “Web surfing” experience for the user.
• Therefore, current authoring and playback systems which depend on the linking method of the World Wide Web to provide linking of content across different computers inherit the drawbacks of that method, which include the inability to effectively represent link destinations to users and the inability to implement page changes smoothly.
• As discussed above, methods currently in use for authoring multimedia content and for linking and viewing distributed multimedia content present a variety of drawbacks to the user. In authoring, what is needed is a level of control like that provided by scripting, without the complexity, loss of perspective and mechanical results inherent in scripting methods. What is further needed is a simplicity and ease of use like that provided by templates, without the restrictions imposed by template methods. What is also needed is the ability to control time-based processes without the inflexibility imposed by timelines. In linking and viewing distributed content, what is needed is a manner of connecting and presenting distributed content that provides for effective display of navigation destinations to the user and allows for a smooth and pleasing navigation experience for the user.
• Finally, when taken as a whole, current systems for authoring, distributing and viewing multimedia content present a collective burden. Each only addresses a specific part of a much larger picture, resulting in incompatibilities and inefficiencies as content is passed from one tool to the next along the authoring, distribution and viewing chain. Therefore, what is further needed is a unified approach to authoring, distribution and viewing that eliminates these inefficiencies and incompatibilities.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
• In view of the above-described disadvantages with present systems, it is an advantage of embodiments of the present invention to provide a multimedia authoring and playback system that has more intuitive editing and control interfaces, and offers improved authoring of multimedia content.
• It is an advantage of embodiments of the present invention to provide for high-quality authoring of multimedia content without the need for the user to have significant training in authoring methodology.
• It is an advantage of embodiments of the present invention to provide system users with faster, more flexible capabilities for developing and managing multimedia content.
• It is an advantage of embodiments of the present invention to provide users with advanced control features that maintain clarity, intuitiveness and ease of use.
• It is an advantage of embodiments of the present invention to provide a multimedia authoring and playback system that lets users create dynamic and interactive content with less effort.
• It is an advantage of embodiments of the present invention to provide more effective content creation and management capabilities through the use of improved object type characterizations and improved hierarchical arrangements.
• It is an advantage of embodiments of the present invention to provide more effective content sharing and collaboration via improved methods for distributing multimedia content over a network.
• It is an advantage of embodiments of the present invention to provide smoother and more intuitive navigation for users via improved methods for interconnecting and playing back multimedia content stored on different computers.
• It is an advantage of embodiments of the present invention to allow users to easily add high quality multimedia content to online communications (such as emails, instant messages, websites, chat rooms, presentations, online communities, virtual private webs, etc.), and to make e-communications more interactive and visually rich.
• A system and method for multimedia authoring and playback is disclosed. Depending on system configuration, embodiments of the invention can include features for creating, editing and distributing multimedia content in the form of “presentation data,” which may be viewed by recipients who play the content (and in some cases may be allowed to modify it). The playback of content is presented in one or more windows or displays called “playback displays.” Playback displays present presentation data which is playing, and in some embodiments may also provide various editing functions which can be used to create and edit presentation data. Additional windows or displays, called “control displays,” may be included in some embodiments to provide various management and control functions, and these too can include features for creating and editing presentation data.
• These basic capabilities of embodiments of the present invention discussed in the previous paragraph are also found in many widely available multimedia tools and systems. However, compared to these other tools and systems, embodiments of the present invention can include various advantageous capabilities in a number of areas, including: (1) creating and importing objects, (2) editing display settings for objects, (3) time-based object playback behavior, (4) starting and stopping of container objects, (5) the “sentence” paradigm for programming object behavior, (6) dynamic parameter modification, (7) functions and uses of control displays, (8) publishing and editing over a network, (9) hierarchical structuring of presentation data, (10) user “exploration” of presentation data, (11) indirect data access using “pointer objects,” (12) integrating HFS data with presentation data, (13) user “navigation” through presentation data, and (14) nested “sub-displays” embedded within playback displays.
• While the advantageous capabilities in each of these areas are fundamentally independent from one another, each providing value and standing on its own as a feature of the invention, in many cases the various capabilities build on one another in ways which are highly complementary. Wherever possible, features have been designed to leverage and take advantage of each other in this way, so that as features are added in the above areas, the system increases in power substantially, but without undermining ease of use. The exact set of features included in any given embodiment of the invention may vary depending on system configuration; the underlying system provides a basic framework in which one or more features may be added depending on system requirements, resulting in a variety of possible configurations for the invention.
• The features and advantages of the present invention will be apparent from the accompanying drawings and detailed description that follows.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
• The present invention is illustrated by way of example and not limitation in the figures of the accompanying drawings, in which like references indicate similar elements, and in which:
• FIGS.1A-B illustrate the basic elements of the system, according to embodiments of the present invention;
• FIGS. 2A through 3D illustrate creating and importing of objects, according to embodiments of the present invention;
• FIGS. 4A through 6B illustrate editing of object display settings, according to embodiments of the present invention;
• FIGS.7A-H illustrate programming of time-based object playback behavior, according to embodiments of the present invention;
• FIGS.8A-B illustrate starting and stopping of container objects, according to embodiments of the present invention;
• FIGS. 9A through 27D illustrate programming of object behavior following a sentence paradigm, according to embodiments of the present invention;
• FIGS.28A-D illustrate dynamic modification of object parameters, according to embodiments of the present invention;
• FIGS. 29A through 30B illustrate functions and uses of control displays, according to embodiments of the present invention;
• FIGS.31A-B illustrate publishing and editing of presentation data over a network, according to embodiments of the present invention;
• FIGS.32A-B illustrate hierarchical structuring of presentation data by nesting containers within containers, according to embodiments of the present invention;
• FIGS.33A-B illustrate user “exploration” of hierarchical presentation data using a control display, according to embodiments of the present invention;
• FIGS.34A-F illustrate indirect data access using “pointer objects,” each of which references a base object for some of its data, according to embodiments of the present invention;
• FIGS. 35A through 37C illustrate extending presentation data to include folders and files from a hierarchical file system (HFS), and vice versa, according to embodiments of the present invention;
• FIGS. 38A through 39B illustrate user “navigation” through hierarchical presentation data, including over a network, according to embodiments of the present invention;
• FIGS. 40 through 45C illustrate functions and uses of nested sub-displays, including user navigation, according to embodiments of the present invention;
• FIG. 46 illustrates an exemplary data linking scenario, in which hierarchical databases of presentation data are linked together to form a virtual hierarchy, according to embodiments of the present invention;
• FIG. 47 illustrates an exemplary data linking scenario, in which hierarchical databases and an HFS are linked together to form a virtual hierarchy, according to embodiments of the present invention;
• FIG. 48 illustrates a block diagram of an individual, exemplary hierarchical database of presentation data, according to embodiments of the present invention;
• FIG. 49 illustrates a block diagram of a computer system, either network or standalone, that implements embodiments of the present invention;
• FIG. 50 illustrates a block diagram of a system for authoring and playing back multimedia content, implemented as an installed software application, according to an embodiment of the present invention;
• FIG. 51 illustrates a block diagram of a system for authoring and playing back multimedia content, implemented as a software plug-in associated with a host application, according to an embodiment of the present invention;
• FIG. 52 illustrates a software flow diagram of the system initialization procedure, according to an embodiment of the present invention;
• FIG. 53 illustrates software flow diagrams showing procedures of the playback display manager of the system ofFIG. 50, according to an embodiment of the present invention;
• FIGS. 54-55 illustrate software flow diagrams showing procedures of the control display manager of the system ofFIG. 50, according to an embodiment of the present invention;
• FIG. 56 illustrates a block diagram of the presentation engine component of the systems ofFIGS. 50 and 51, according to an embodiment of the present invention;
• FIGS. 57-58 illustrate block diagrams of the playback manager component of the presentation engine ofFIG. 56, according to an embodiment of the present invention;
• FIGS. 59-70 illustrate software flow diagrams showing procedures of the playback manager component of the presentation engine ofFIG. 56, according to an embodiment of the present invention;
• FIGS. 71-76 illustrate software flow diagrams showing procedures of the edit manager component of the presentation engine ofFIG. 56, according to an embodiment of the present invention;
• FIGS.77A-B illustrates conversion charts showing command handling procedures of the edit manager component of the presentation engine ofFIG. 56, according to an embodiment of the present invention;
• FIG. 78 illustrates a block diagram of the graphics engine component of the presentation engine ofFIG. 56, according to an embodiment of the present invention;
• FIG. 79 illustrates a software flow diagram showing procedures of the graphics engine component of the presentation engine ofFIG. 56, according to an embodiment of the present invention;
• FIG. 80 illustrates a block diagram of the data manager component of the systems ofFIGS. 50 and 51, according to an embodiment of the present invention;
• FIG. 81 illustrates block diagrams of the cache format and file format of the data manager component of the systems ofFIGS. 50 and 51, according to an embodiment of the present invention;
• FIGS. 82-84 illustrate software flow diagrams showing procedures of the data manager component of the systems ofFIGS. 50 and 51, according to an embodiment of the present invention;
• FIG. 85 illustrates the object model of the systems ofFIGS. 50 and 51, according to an embodiment of the present invention;
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS
• A multimedia authoring and playback system for use in a computer-based environment is disclosed. In the following description, for purposes of explanation, numerous specific details are set forth in order to provide an understanding of the present invention; also, in certain instances, structures and devices are shown in block diagram form to facilitate explanation. However, it will be evident to those of ordinary skill in the art that the present invention may be practiced without the specific details and forms. The description of the preferred embodiments is not intended to limit the scope of the claims appended hereto.
• The following description has four sections: (1) Functional Overview, (2) Example Scenarios, (3) Hardware Overview, and (4) System Architecture.
• Functional Overview
• The present invention is best understood in terms of the user experience it provides. Therefore, the invention is now described with an emphasis on the user experience, along with a moderate amount of explanation of the underlying system operations and data management procedures occurring at each point.
• In this functional overview, various examples are shown in which an author creates and manipulates multimedia content by means of a graphical user interface (GUI). This GUI includes a “playback display” for viewing and editing content which is playing, and optionally, a “control display” for performing various management and control functions. These displays can take many forms on many different platforms, and the specific display representations are not to be understood as limiting or restricting the appearance or implementation of the playback display or control display.
• To help clarify the workings of the invention, three common representations are used in many of the diagrams that accompany this functional overview: (1) to the left an abstract representation of the presentation data (which is merely for illustration and does not appear to the user), (2) to the right a simplified picture of the playback display, and (3) in the center a simplified picture of the control display (which is included in the diagrams frequently starting atFIG. 29A, and before that is shown in a few instances under the playback display). These three representations may be used separately or in tandem to illustrate different aspects of the workings of the invention.
• To help organize the discussion, the various features of the invention have been grouped into a number of categories which were enumerated in the above summary. Briefly, again, these categories are: (1) creating and importing objects, (2) editing display settings, (3) time-based playback behavior, (4) starting and stopping containers, (5) programming behavior using a sentence paradigm, (6) dynamic parameter modification, (7) control displays, (8) publishing and editing over a network, (9) hierarchical structuring of data, (10) exploration of data, (11) pointer objects, (12) integration of HFS data, (13) user navigation, and (14) sub-displays. The organization of the invention's features into these categories is merely intended as an aid to understanding, and is not intended to imply any inherent associations or disassociations among features simply because they are in the same or in different categories.
• Finally, it should be noted that great care has been taken to ensure that the various features of the invention have been designed to work well together, and in many cases the use of two or more features in conjunction with one another produces advantages beyond those of the individual features. Throughout the following discussion, various examples and explanations are provided to indicate how different features of the invention may be used in conjunction with one another to achieve further advantage.
• The discussion begins with a description of the basic elements of the system, which establishes base levels of functionality for the invention, after which each category of features is discussed in turn.
• BASIC ELEMENTS OF THE SYSTEM—FIGS.1A-B illustrate the basic elements of the system, shown operating in exemplary object presentation and editing scenarios. These scenarios present certain base levels of functionality found in this and many other multimedia authoring and playback systems. The scenario ofFIG. 1A presents the base level of functionality for multimedia playback, which is included in all configurations of the invention. The scenario ofFIG. 1B presents the base level of functionality for multimedia authoring, which is included in configurations of the invention that support user editing of presentation data. These respective base levels for playback and authoring provide a foundation upon which the various features of the invention which follow may be added.
• FIG. 1A depicts a basic object presentation scenario, according to one embodiment of the present invention. Shown on the left side of the figure is some exemplary presentation data which consists of a container object containing two media objects. The two media objects are of two different types, such that each media object contains a different type of media data; support for multiple types of media objects is typical in multimedia systems such as the present invention, but not required, since various features of the invention may be practiced effectively using just one media type. Moreover, depending on system configuration, various other types of objects may be supported in addition to, or instead of, those shown inFIG. 1A, as discussed throughout this specification. Shown on the right side ofFIG. 1A is an exemplary playback display, which plays back the presentation data by presenting the media data of the media objects in the playback display. Each of these basic elements of the system is now described.
• The left side ofFIG. 1A shows a representation of acontainer object100 containing twomedia objects102 and106. In the present invention, a container object is any data construct which can be used to collect two or more media objects (examples from the field abound, and include such constructs as HTML files, folders in a hierarchical file system, proprietary data formats, etc.). Note that physical containment of media objects by the container object is not required; all that is required is the ability to create a logical collection of two or more media objects.
• In the example ofFIG. 1A, the two media objects contained by thecontainer object100 are atext object102 and apicture object106. Shown within thetext object102 ismedia data103, in this case text data (which can include data representing alphanumeric text such as ASCII characters, data representing other national character sets such as Kanji characters, data representing various text properties such as bold and italic, etc.). In thetext object102, themedia data103 is depicted as distinct from the rest of the object data104 (the latter of which can include such data as object properties, display settings for the media data, various other presentation options, etc.). Similarly, within thepicture object106 is shownmedia data107, in this case image data (which can include various types of data for representing visual images, such as bitmaps, vector graphics, etc.), also depicted as distinct from the rest of theobject data108. This depiction of media data as distinct from the rest of the object data is merely a visual convention used throughout the diagrams to help clarify certain concepts and features, and is not intended to describe or limit the structures used for the actual storage of object data.
• The right side ofFIG. 1A shows a representation of aplayback display116 which is displaying the text “Hello World”112 corresponding to thetext object102, as well as thepicture114 corresponding to thepicture object106. Theplayback display116 also includes adisplay title110 consisting of the words “PLAY: DEMO,” which indicates that the playback display is playing presentation data and that the source for what is playing is the container object100 (which is named “DEMO”). Thisdisplay title110 and similar display titles in other figures are included within the diagrams to help clarify how objects depicted on the left relate to displays depicted on the right; however such display titles are not required for the invention, and in actual implementations may vary greatly or be omitted altogether.
• FIG. 1B depicts a basic editing scenario, according to one embodiment of the present invention. The figure shows a situation in which the user is preparing to edit a new presentation. The left side ofFIG. 1B shows a representation of anempty container object120 named “NEW.” To the right is aplayback display134, which includes adisplay title128 with the words “EDIT: NEW” indicating that the playback display is presenting thecontainer object120 to the user for editing.
• In the presently preferred embodiment of the invention, editing takes place within an edit mode, such as might be triggered by a user-initiated click of thepointer132 on the edit mode command icon130 (thispointer132, as well as similar pointers shown in other figures, is controlled by the user via a pointing device, such as a computer mouse, joystick, pen and tablet, PDA stylus, touch screen, etc.). It should be noted, however, that the use of an edit mode which is distinct from presentation playback, as shown in FIGS.1A-B and in other figures, is only one of various possible approaches for providing authoring and playback functionality to the user, and other approaches may be effective depending on system configuration (such as integrating authoring and playback in a common mode, using separate applications for authoring and playback, etc.). For example, the invention can be configured such that an authoring application (with minimal playback functionality) is used to author content, and then a separate playback application with more complete playback functionality (such as a Web browser or proprietary “player” application) is used to test and evaluate the playback of authored content.
• FIG. 1B further includescommand icons122,124 and126 as examples of authoring functions that might be selected by the user. It should be noted that the look and placement of command icons throughout the diagrams is exemplary only, and can vary greatly in real embodiments of the system. Moreover, it should further be noted that the use of command icons for selecting authoring functions is merely one approach for doing so, and other approaches may also be effective depending on system implementation (such as single-level menus, multiple-level menus, buttons, lists, sliders, palettes, checkboxes, other types of user interface elements, keypad keys, etc).
• CREATING AND IMPORTING OBJECTS—FIGS. 2A through 3D depict various functions for adding objects to a presentation: (1)FIG. 2A shows creating a new text object, (2)FIG. 2B shows creating a new picture object, (3)FIG. 2C shows importing a picture via dialog box, (4)FIG. 2D shows duplicating a picture using a control display, (5)FIG. 3A shows creating a new picture from a connected camera, (6)FIG. 3B shows recording a new video from a connected camera, (7)FIG. 3C shows creating a new sub-display and associated container object, and (8)FIG. 3D shows importing a sub-display by dragging a container object from a control display. Each of these functions is an independent feature of the invention that may or may not be included in any given system configuration. Moreover, the above functions involving importing and duplicating (FIGS. 2C, 2D and3D) are general purpose functions which, depending on system configuration, can be used with any of the object types supported by the system.
• The functionality illustrated inFIGS. 2A through 3D generally provides the advantage of allowing users to add objects to presentations with greater speed and efficiency, enabling the creation of more interesting presentations with less effort. Also, when the functions ofFIGS. 2D and 3D are used with control displays that allow user exploration of a hierarchical file system (such as that shown in FIGS.35A-B), further advantages are produced in terms of enabling faster, more comprehensive access to external data. In addition, when functions shown inFIGS. 2A through 3D are used within the context of “compound sentence” programming as discussed in connection with the sentence paradigm, their integration into the process of creating programmed object behavior produces further advantages in terms of faster, more streamlined authoring. Moreover, when functions ofFIGS. 2A through 3D are used in conjunction with other features of the invention, such as editing display settings, time-based playback behavior, networking, collaborative editing, pointer objects, etc., further advantages are derived in terms of enabling authors to create multimedia content with greater variety among object characteristics with less effort, and to more easily add objects to distributed content.
• FIG. 2A shows the creation of a new text object, according to one embodiment of the present invention. The figure shows aplayback display216 presenting acontainer object200 to the user for editing. First, the user clicks on the newtext command icon204. Next, the user clicks on a desiredspot212 in theplayback display216, causing anew text box206 to be displayed there. Thenew text box206 contains acursor210 indicating that the user can, if desired, enter new text; asnew text208 “Hello” is entered, thecursor210 follows the last character entered. When the user is done entering text, thepointer214 is clicked at any spot in the playback display that isoutside text box206, completing the operation. As a result of this process, as seen in the representation on the left side ofFIG. 2A, anew text object202 is created within thecontainer object200, the new text object containing text data for the new text “Hello”208 in itsmedia data203.
• FIG. 2B shows the creation of a new picture object, according to one embodiment of the present invention. The figure shows aplayback display236 presenting acontainer object220 to the user for editing. First, the user clicks on the newpicture command icon224. Next, the user clicks on a desiredspot226 in theplayback display236, causing a new picture228 (in this case a solid rectangle) to appear there. The user may then, while still pressing the mouse button or other pointing device, adjust the size of the picture to a desiredsize234 by dragging across the playback display (230,232). As a result of this process, as seen in the representation on the left side ofFIG. 2B, anew picture object222 is created withincontainer object220, the new picture object containing image data for thenew picture228 in itsmedia data223. Note that other versions of this function for creating a new picture object may be provided for other kinds of images, such as circles, lines of various types, “spray can” effects, other geometric shapes and patterns, etc., any or all of which may employ a “click and drag” operation such as that seen in the picture creation function ofFIG. 2B.
• FIG. 2C shows a new picture object being imported into the system from an external picture file using a dialog box, according to one embodiment of the present invention. The figure shows aplayback display258 presenting acontainer object240 to the user for editing. First, the user clicks on theimport command icon244, which causes a fileselection dialog box246 to appear. In the fileselection dialog box246, several external picture files248 are shown, which may be standard graphics files such as JPEG, TIFF, BMP or similar files stored in an accessible storage location. Thepicture file250 named “Mona Lisa” is selected and the user clicks the “OK”button252. The user then clicks at a desiredlocation256 in theplayback display258, and thepicture254 from the selected picture file appears there. As a result of this process, as seen in the representation on the left side ofFIG. 2C, anew picture object242 is created within thecontainer object240, the new picture object containing image data for the importedpicture254 in itsmedia data243.
• FIG. 2D shows a new picture object being imported into the system from an external picture file using a duplicate command with a control display, according to one embodiment of the present invention. The figure shows aplayback display270 presenting acontainer object260 to the user for editing. Below theplayback display270 is acontrol display274. This control display, like thefile selection dialog246 ofFIG. 2C, presents several external picture files to the user; however unlike the file selection dialog, the control display can have a persistent presence within the user interface. To import a picture, the user first clicks on a desiredpicture icon272 in thecontrol display274. Next, the user clicks on theduplicate command icon264. Finally, the user clicks on a desiredlocation268 in theplayback display270, and thepicture266 appears there. As a result of this process, as seen in the representation on the left side ofFIG. 2D, anew picture object262 is created within thecontainer object260, the new picture object containing image data for the importedpicture266 in itsmedia data263. In addition to duplicating an object from a control display to a playback display, as seen in the present example, the duplicate function may also be used to duplicate an object from one control display to another, or to duplicate an object within a single control display or playback display.
• FIG. 3A shows a new picture object being created through the use of a connected camera, such as a “web cam,” according to one embodiment of the present invention. The figure shows aplayback display316 presenting acontainer object300 to the user for editing. First, the user clicks on thecamera command icon304, which causes adialog window310 to appear containing a real-time view306 of the output of a camera (the camera might be directly attached to the user's computer or accessed over a network). When the real-time view306 presents a desired image, the user clicks theOK button308 to accept the image. The user then clicks at a desiredlocation312 in theplayback display316, and the image appears there as apicture314. As a result of this process, as seen in the representation on the left side ofFIG. 3A, anew picture object302 is created within thecontainer object300, the new picture object containing image data for thepicture314 in itsmedia data303.
• FIG. 3B shows a new video object being created through the use of a connected camera, such as a “web cam,” according to one embodiment of the present invention. The figure shows aplayback display338 presenting acontainer object320 to the user for editing. First, the user clicks on thevideo command icon324, which causes adialog window332 to appear containing a real-time view326 of the output of a camera (the camera might be directly attached to the user's computer or accessed over a network). The user then clicks theREC button328 to commence video recording. Optionally, the user may stop recording by clicking again on theREC button328, and may view what has been recorded by clicking on thePLAY button329. When the desired recording has been achieved, the user clicks theOK button330 to accept the recording. The user then clicks at a desiredlocation334 in theplayback display338, and the recordedvideo336 appears there. As a result of this process, as seen in the representation on the left side ofFIG. 3B, anew video object322 is created within thecontainer object320, the new video object containing video data for thevideo336 in itsmedia data323.
• In the case of the functions ofFIGS. 3A and 3B just described (new picture from camera and new video from camera), the user interfaces provided in thedialog windows310 and332 for capturing (respectively) image data and video data are typical; many variations for such user interfaces are common, and may be effective in the present invention. A significant portion of the advantage of the above functions lies in the fact that after accepting the image or recording (by clicking on the OK button in the above examples), the user need only make one final click (specifying a location in the playback display) to incorporate the new data into the presentation.
• Moreover, in either or both of the dialog windows (310,332) inFIGS. 3A and 3B, a “soft oval” effect may be provided as an optional enhancement. With this enhancement, the user is given an option to apply a soft oval effect to the real-time view (306,326) of the output of the camera. This soft oval effect is similar to that shown inFIG. 6B-2, except that it affects the live output of the camera in real time. In the examples ofFIGS. 3A and 3B, the user can enable this soft oval effect via the checkboxes (309,331) in the respective dialog windows; however, as mentioned above for dialog windows in general, other user interface variations for enabling this soft oval effect may also be effective. With the soft oval effect enabled, once the picture or recorded video is accepted by the user, the media data of the newly created object (302,322) exhibits the soft oval effect when displayed in the playback display (which is especially effective when used with “head shot” pictures or “talking head” videos). In the preferred implementation, this is accomplished by setting relevant display settings (shape and softness as discussed in connection with FIGS.6A-B) at the time the new picture or video object is created, which allows the user to further adjust or disable the soft oval effect afterwards; however it is also possible to implement this feature in ways which do not allow further adjustment of the effect after accepting the picture or video.
• FIGS. 3C and 3D show new and import functions (respectively) which involve sub-displays. The sub-display functionality of the present invention is discussed in detail in connection withFIGS. 40 through 45C, but briefly, it involves an association between nested sub-displays in the playback display and container objects, whereby media data of objects contained in a container object is displayed within the sub-display associated with the container object. The examples ofFIGS. 3C and 3D also involve the use of another feature of the invention, hierarchically nested container objects, detailed in connection with FIGS.32A-B.
• FIG. 3C shows the creation of a new sub-display and associated container object, according to one embodiment of the present invention. The figure shows aplayback display350 presenting acontainer object340 to the user for editing. First, the user clicks on the newsub-display command icon344. Next, the user clicks on a desiredspot346 in theplayback display350, causing anew sub-display348 to appear there. As a result of this process, as seen in the representation on the left side ofFIG. 3C, anew container object342 is created within thecontainer object340. Thisnew container object342 is associated (as shown by its double outline) with thenew sub-display348 shown in the playback display. Other objects such as text, pictures, etc. may now be added to the new container object using methods such as those shown inFIGS. 2A through 3B, and their media data will be displayed within thenew sub-display348.
• FIG. 3D shows importing a sub-display by dragging a container object from a control display, according to one embodiment of the present invention. The figure shows aplayback display376 presenting acontainer object360 to the user for editing. Below theplayback display376 is acontrol display380 which presents several container objects to the user; these container objects may be external data files located in an accessible storage location, or references to such files (such as via URL), or some other form of collected, contained presentation data. To import a sub-display, the user first clicks on a desiredcontainer object icon378 in the control display380 (note that the desired container object need not itself be associated with a sub-display). Next, while still pressing the mouse button or other pointing device, the user “drags” the pointer to a desiredlocation372 in theplayback display376 and releases, causing a sub-display374 to appear there (this can also be accomplished using either the import function ofFIG. 2C or the duplicate function ofFIG. 2D). As a result of this process, as seen in the representation on the left side ofFIG. 3D, anew container object362 containing data from the selectedcontainer object378 is created within thecontainer object360. Thisnew container object362 is associated (as shown by its double outline) with the sub-display374, and the media data for its contained objects (thetext object364 and the picture object366) is seen within the sub-display374 as thetext368 and thepicture370, respectively.
• EDITING DISPLAY SETTINGS—FIGS. 4A through 6B illustrate editing functions for changing various “display settings” that determine how an object's media data is presented in the playback display. The display settings shown being changed in these figures are: (1) position inFIG. 4A, (2) size and position inFIG. 4B, (3) color inFIG. 4C, (4) transparency inFIG. 5A, (5) rotation inFIG. 5B, (6) stretch inFIG. 5C, (7) cropping inFIG. 5D, (8) shape and softness inFIG. 6A, and (9) shape and softness inFIG. 6B. Each of the editing functions shown in these figures, as well as each of the display settings involved, is an independent feature of the invention that may or may not be included in any given system configuration.
• The functionality illustrated inFIGS. 4A through 6B generally provides the advantage of faster and more convenient modification of object display settings, which allows users to create more personalized and expressive presentations more quickly. Moreover, the editing features ofFIGS. 4A through 6B, when used in conjunction with each other and with other features of the invention, such as time-based playback behavior, functions of the sentence paradigm, networking, collaborative editing, sub-displays, etc., provide the further advantage of increased speed and efficiency in the creation of highly sophisticated and/or distributed multimedia content.
• It should be noted that inFIGS. 4A through 6B, editing functions are shown affecting the appearance of exemplary text and picture objects; depending on system configuration, each of these editing functions (or similar editing functions) may be used to change the appearance of any of the following: text, pictures, videos and sub-displays (sub-displays are detailed in connection withFIGS. 40 through 45C). It should also be noted that for the functions ofFIGS. 4A through 6B which involve the use of keypad keys, other keypad keys and/or user interface elements (such as sliders, buttons, etc.) may be provided to perform the same functions. It should also be noted that in the examples ofFIGS. 4A through 6B, and throughout the present specification, the presence and involvement of selection boxes is merely for clarity in the diagrams, and is not essential to the functionality being shown.
• FIG. 4A shows editing of the display position of an object's media data in the playback display, according to one embodiment of the present invention. The figure shows atext object402 whose media data is seen in theplayback display412 astext406. The user selects the text by clicking on it with thepointer408, causing aselection box404 to appear around the text indicating that it can be dragged. The user can then drag the selected text to a desiredlocation410 in theplayback display412.
• FIG. 4B shows simultaneous editing of the position and size of an object's media data in the playback display, according to one embodiment of the present invention. The figure shows atext object416 whose media data is seen in theplayback display430 astext420. The user selects the text by clicking on it with thepointer422, causing aselection box418 to appear around the text indicating that it can be dragged. The user can then drag the selected text to a desiredlocation428 in theplayback display430. During the time thatselection box418 is displayed around the text, the user may also re-size the text (whether dragging it or not) by pressing the up-arrow key432 on a keypad, making the text larger, as seen in the increased size of thetext426 and itsselection box424. Similarly, the down-arrow key434 may be used to make the text smaller.
• FIG. 4C shows editing of the color of an object's media data in the playback display, according to one embodiment of the present invention. InFIG. 4C-1, the media data of a text object is seen in theplayback display456 astext452. The user first clicks on the colorchange command icon450, then clicks454 on the text to select it (in an alternate implementation, the text may be selected first and then the command icon; also, in yet another alternate implementation, both the command and the text may be selected at once by clicking on the text using an alternate form of click, such as by pressing the right-side mouse button, or by clicking with a modifier key such as “alt” or “ctrl” held down, etc.).
• FIG. 4C-2 shows that when the above selection has occurred, a color adjust mode is entered, as indicated byspecial cursor symbol460. The user may then move the mouse orother pointing device480 in any of four directions to adjust the color.Left movement484 orright movement478 is used to adjust the hue toward thered end474 of the color spectrum (left) or theviolet end486 of the spectrum (right). Upmovement476 or down movement482 is used to make the brightness of the color more bright468 (up) or more dark494 (down). In short, the four directions form a “color grid”492 which controls the hue and brightness of the object being affected. All of the color changes happen in real time to the displayedmedia data452 in theplayback display456.
• Beyond the basic functionality of color adjust mode just discussed, a variety of variations or enhancements such as the following are possible. For one, the color grid may be extended in thehorizontal dimension490 and470, so that the hue values “wrap around” (from red474 toviolet472, and fromviolet486 to red488) when the user moves the mouse or pointing device beyond the point corresponding to the extreme value of hue in either direction. Also, when in color adjust mode, the up and downarrow keys464 may be used to increase and decrease the color saturation. In addition, alternate mappings between hue and brightness and the vertical and horizontal axes of the color grid may be effective, such as swapping or inverting the axes. Also, an alternate implementation may be provided in which color adjust mode involves clicking and holding down the mouse button or pointing device. Note that thespecial cursor symbol460 need not be used, and if used, may either move or not during color adjust mode. Finally, color adjust mode may be exited by again clicking the mouse or pointing device (or by releasing the mouse button or pointing device in the alternate implementation involving clicking and holding).
• FIG. 5A shows editing of the transparency of an object's media data in the playback display, according to one embodiment of the present invention. InFIG. 5A-1, the media data of two picture objects is seen in theplayback display506 as anupper picture500 and alower picture502. The user first selects theupper picture500 by clicking on it with thepointer504, then presses theleft arrow key510 on the keypad to increase the transparency of the selected picture. The result is shown inFIG. 5A-2 in theplayback display506, where theupper picture500 is now partially transparent, as can be seen from theoverlap508 between the twopictures500 and502. Similarly the user may use theright arrow key512 to decrease the transparency, making thepicture500 more opaque.
• FIG. 5B shows editing of the rotation of an object's media data in the playback display, according to one embodiment of the present invention. InFIG. 5B-1, the media data of a picture object is seen in theplayback display524 as apicture520. First, the user selects thepicture520 by clicking on it with thepointer522. Then, while holding the mouse button or other pointing device down, the user presses theright arrow key530 on the keypad to rotate thepicture520 clockwise. The result is shown in FIG.5B-2 in theplayback display524, where thepicture520 is now shown rotated. Similarly, theleft arrow key528 can be used to rotate the picture counter-clockwise. The position of thepicture520 may also be dragged using thepointer522 at the same time it is being rotated by the kepad keys. In systems which support use of the left and right arrow keys for both rotation and transparency (the latter being seen inFIG. 5A), the pressing and holding of the mouse button or pointing device is used as the condition for assigning the keys to rotation. In addition, it should be noted that in the example ofFIG. 5B the rotation anchor (the center point around which the rotation occurs) is amovable rotation anchor526 which has been placed near the corner of thepicture520. This movable rotation anchor functionality is itself a separate feature of the invention which is independent from the keypad control functionality discussed above.
• FIG. 5C shows stretching of an object's media data in the playback display, according to one embodiment of the present invention. InFIG. 5C-1, the media data of a picture object is seen in theplayback display546 as apicture540, surrounded by aselection box542 indicating that it has previously been selected by the user. This selection box has adrag handle544 on each of its sides (which can alternately be placed at the corners of the selection box, in which case they may, depending on configuration, be locked to a fixed aspect ratio to provide size control). The user may click on adrag handle544 and drag it away from the center of the picture, stretching the picture in the direction of the movement. The result is shown inFIG. 5C-2 in theplayback display546, where thepicture540 andselection box542 appear elongated as a result of the movement of thedrag handle544. The user may also compress the picture by dragging a drag handle toward the center of the picture.
• FIG. 5D shows cropping of an object's media data in the playback display, according to one embodiment of the present invention. InFIG. 5D-1, the media data of a picture object is seen in theplayback display566 as apicture560, surrounded by aselection box562 indicating that it has previously been selected by the user. This selection box has a corner drag handle564 in each of its corners (which can alternately be placed at the sides of the selection box). The user may click on a corner drag handle564 and drag it to change the cropping of the picture, i.e., the portion of it being “revealed” in the playback display. The result is shown inFIG. 5D-2 in theplayback display566, as theouter edges568 of thepicture560 now appear cropped as a result of the movement of thedrag handle564. Greater or lesser portions of the picture may be revealed by dragging in this manner.
• FIG. 6A shows editing of the shape and softness of an object's media data in the playback display using sliders, according to one embodiment of the present invention. InFIG. 6A-1, the media data of a picture object is seen in theplayback display604 as apicture600. When the user clicks602 on thepicture600, various sliders may appear depending on system configuration, as shown inFIGS. 6A-2 through6A-4.
• FIG. 6A-2 shows a system configured so that clicking on thepicture600 in theplayback display604 causes ashape slider614 to appear. As the shape slider control is moved to the right with thepointer618, the edges of the picture become increasingly rounded until they collapse into a diamond. The shape slider control leftposition612 corresponds to the original rectangular shape of thepicture600. Themiddle position616 corresponds to the oval shape indicated by themiddle boundary608, and theright position620 corresponds to thediamond shape610. Depending upon implementation, the extreme setting for the shape change, corresponding to theright position620, may also be a shape other than a diamond, such as limiting it to just an oval, or going beyond a diamond to a “four point compass rose” shape, etc. In addition, shapes other than those shown in the example ofFIG. 6B may be provided, such as other geometric shapes, arbitrary shapes, etc.
• FIG. 6A-3 shows a system configured so that clicking on thepicture600 in theplayback display604 causes asoftness slider624 to appear. Moving thesoftness slider control626 up makes the edges of the picture appear increasingly soft or “fuzzy;” i.e. the picture becomes increasingly transparent622 away from the center and toward the edges (of course this depiction of fuzziness in the diagram is suggestive only, and the exact effect may vary according to implementation). The greater the slider setting, the greater the softness; i.e. the more extreme the “fuzziness” becomes. Theminimum position628 ofslider624 corresponds to the original “hard outline” of the picture; i.e. no softness.
• FIG. 6A-4 shows a system configured so that clicking on thepicture600 in theplayback display604 causes both ashape slider644 and asoftness slider636 to appear. In this configuration, the shape and softness effects may be combined, independently controllable via the shape and softness sliders according to the rules previously described. In the example shown, theshape slider control646 is moved to the mid position, and thesoftness slider control638 is also moved to the mid position, resulting in a “soft oval”effect634.
• FIG. 6B shows editing of the shape and softness of an object's media data in the playback display using dragging, according to one embodiment of the present invention. InFIG. 6B-1 the media data of a picture object is seen in theplayback display656 as apicture652. The user first clicks the shape/softness command icon650, then selects the picture by clicking on it with the pointer654 (in an alternate implementation, the picture may be selected first and then the command icon; also, in yet another alternate implementation, both the command and the picture may be selected at once by clicking on the picture using an alternate form of click, such as by pressing the right-side mouse button, or by clicking with a modifier key such as “alt” or “ctrl” held down, etc).
• FIG. 6B-2 shows that when the above selection has occurred, a shape/softness adjust mode is entered, as indicated by thespecial cursor symbol664. The user may then move the mouse orother pointing device688 in any of four directions to adjust the shape and softness of the picture.Left movement685 orright movement686 is used to adjust the shape toward a modified shape682 (left) or original shape690 (right), similar to the way shape is affected by theshape slider614 inFIG. 6A (except that the direction is reversed). Upmovement684 or downmovement689 is used to adjust the softness toward the hardest edges680 (up) or softest edges698 (down), similar to the way softness is affected by thesoftness slider624 inFIG. 6A (except that again the direction is reversed). In short, the four directions form a “shape/softness grid”696 which controls the shape and softness of the object being affected. All of the changes happen in real time to the displayedmedia data652 in theplayback display656, which in this example is exibiting a “soft oval”effect660.
• Beyond the basic functionality of the shape/softness adjust mode just discussed, a variety of variations or enhancements such as the following are possible. For one, alternate mappings between the shape and softness settings and the vertical and horizontal axes of the shape/softness grid696 may be effective, such as swapping or inverting the axes. Also, shape/softness adjust mode may be provided as separate modes for shape adjust and softness adjust, where in each mode movement along a single axis controls the relevant parameter. In addition, shapes other than those shown in the example ofFIG. 6B may be provided, such as other geometric shapes, arbitrary shapes, etc. Also, an alternate implementation may be provided in which shape/softness adjust mode (or just shape adjust mode, depending on implementation) involves clicking and holding down the mouse button or pointing device; this alternate implementation may also involve a “drag palette” that presents available shapes to the user, and which can be used to change the shape of an object by first selecting the object and then clicking and dragging across the drag palette to change the object's shape. Note that thespecial cursor symbol664 need not be used, and if used, may either move or not during shape/softness adjust mode. Finally, shape/softness adjust mode may be exited by again clicking the mouse or pointing device (or by releasing the mouse button or pointing device in the alternate implementation involving clicking and holding).
• TIME-BASED PLAYBACK BEHAVIOR—FIGS.7A-H illustrate programming of time-based object playback behavior, whereby the appearance of an object's media data in the playback display is programmed to change automatically over time during playback. The behaviors shown in the examples of FIGS.7A-H are: (1) “undulating” inFIG. 7A, (2) “bouncing” inFIG. 7B, (3) “color cycling” inFIG. 7C, (4) “entering” inFIG. 7D, (5) “exiting” inFIG. 7E, (6) “timing out” inFIG. 7F, (7) “effect box” inFIG. 7G, and (8) “randomized video end-looping” inFIG. 7H. Each of the programming functions shown in these figures, as well as each of the behaviors involved, is an independent feature of the invention that may or may not be included in any given system configuration.
• The functionality illustrated in FIGS.7A-H generally provides the advantage of allowing authors to create more dynamic and entertaining multimedia content with less effort. Moreover, the features of FIGS.7A-H, when used in conjunction with each other and with other features of the invention such as editing display settings, functions of the sentence paradigm, networking, collaborative editing, sub-displays, etc., provide the further advantage of increased speed and efficiency in the creation of highly sophisticated multimedia content.
• It should be noted that in FIGS.7A-G, time-based playback behaviors are shown being applied to exemplary picture objects; depending on system configuration, each of these behaviors may be applied to any of the following: text, pictures, videos and sub-displays (sub-displays are detailed in connection withFIGS. 40 through 45C). Also, in each of the examples of FIGS.7A-H, object selection occurs first followed by selection of the programming function; this may also be implemented in the reverse order, such that the programming function is selected first followed by selection of the object. In addition, the playback behaviors shown in FIGS.7A-H may involve certain additional parameters, such as speed of change, degree of change, various other options, etc. In the examples shown, these additional parameters operate according to default settings built into the system. In an optional enhancement, the default settings for these additional parameters may be randomized somewhat to provide variety among behaviors. In another optional enhancement, the settings for these additional parameters may be made user adjustable through various user interface elements such as sliders, menus, buttons, palettes, checkboxes, etc.
• FIG. 7A shows the programming of “undulating,” according to one embodiment of the present invention. In this example, the media data of a picture object is seen in theplayback display704 as apicture702. The user clicks703 on the picture, then clicks theundulate command icon700, completing the programming of the behavior. Thereafter when the picture object is playing, the picture's behavior in time is depicted by the series ofrepresentations706. This playback behavior consists of a pulsating effect, in which the size of the picture increases and decreases over time.
• FIG. 7B shows the programming of “bouncing,” according to one embodiment of the present invention. In this example, the media data of a picture object is seen in theplayback display714 as apicture712. The user clicks713 on the picture, then clicks thebounce command icon710, completing the programming of the behavior. Thereafter when the picture object is playing, the picture's behavior in time is depicted by the series ofrepresentations716. This playback behavior consists of a bouncing effect, in which the vertical position of the picture rises and falls over time (horizontal movement may also be incorporated for enhanced effect).
• FIG. 7C shows the programming of “color cycling,” according to one embodiment of the present invention. In this example, the media data of a picture object is seen in theplayback display724 as apicture722. The user clicks723 on the picture, then clicks the colorcycle command icon720, completing the programming of the behavior. Thereafter when the picture object is playing, the picture's behavior in time is depicted by the series ofrepresentations726. This playback behavior consists of a color cycling effect, in which the color of the picture changes to different colors over time. Moreover, depending on system configuration, the programming function ofFIG. 7C and its associated behavior can be applied to the background of the playback display as well (programmed by clicking on the background instead of the picture prior to clicking the command icon); in an optional enhancement, this color cycling of the playback display background can consist of multiple bands of color emanating from the center of the background.
• FIG. 7D shows the programming of an “entrance,” in this case a “zoom-in” transition, according to one embodiment of the present invention. In this example, the media data of a picture object is seen in theplayback display734 as apicture732. The user clicks733 on the picture, then clicks on theentrance command icon730, completing the programming of the behavior. Thereafter when the picture object starts playing, the picture's behavior in time is depicted by the series ofrepresentations736. This playback behavior consists of an increase in size over time until the picture reaches full size, at which time the entrance is complete (note that various other entrance effects, such as fade-in, spin-in, slide-in, etc., may also be provided). In an optional enhancement, the entrance effect defaults to “on” for newly created and imported objects and has “fade-in” selected as the default entrance type (similar to the fade-out exit effect ofFIG. 7E but in reverse).
• FIG. 7E shows the programming of an “exit,” in this case a “fade-out” transition, according to one embodiment of the present invention. In this example, the media data of a picture object is seen in theplayback display744 as apicture742. The user clicks743 on the picture, then clicks on theexit command icon740, completing the programming of the behavior. Thereafter when the picture object stops playing, the picture's behavior in time is depicted by the series ofrepresentations746. This playback behavior consists of an increase in transparency over time until the picture becomes fully transparent, at which time the exit is complete (note that various other exit effects, such as zoom-out, spin-out, slide-out, etc., may also be provided). In an optional enhancement, the exit effect defaults to “on” for newly created and imported objects and has “fade out” selected as the default exit type.
• FIG. 7F shows the programming of an “object timeout,” according to one embodiment of the present invention. In this example, the media data of a picture object is seen in theplayback display754 as apicture752. The user clicks753 on the picture, then clicks on thetimeout command icon750, completing the programming of the behavior. Thereafter when the picture object starts playing, the picture's behavior in time is depicted by the series ofrepresentations756. This playback behavior consists of an automatic timeout, where after a period of time the picture stops playing.
• FIG. 7G shows the programming of an “effect box,” in this case providing a “funhouse mirror” effect, according to one embodiment of the present invention. In this example, the media data of a picture object is seen in theplayback display766 as a picture762 (the picture in this example is a circle with several straight, horizontal, dotted lines running across it; it is shown in its unaffected state in the playback display766). The user clicks763 on the picture, then clicks on theentrance command icon760, which causes aneffect box764 to appear over the picture; the user may then adjust the placement and shape of the effect box (for example, by manipulating drag handles as was done with theselect box562 inFIG. 5D). Thereafter when the picture object starts playing, the picture's behavior in time is depicted by the series ofrepresentations768. This playback behavior consists of a time-variant modification to the portion of the image corresponding to theeffect box764; in this example, a “funhouse mirror” effect causes abulge770 to move across the area in question over time (note that various other effect box effects, such as swirl effects, stretch effects, pixelization effects, color effects, etc., may also be provided). In a preferred enhancement, two or more effect boxes may be applied to a single picture simultaneously, and where there is overlap, the various processing effects for the overlapping boxes are cumulatively applied to the image in the area of overlap.
• FIG. 7H shows the programming of “randomized video end-looping,” according to one embodiment of the present invention. In this example, the media data of a video object is seen in theplayback display784 as avideo782. The user clicks783 on the video, then clicks on the end-loop command icon780, completing the programming of the behavior. Thereafter when the video object starts playing, the video's behavior in time is depicted by the series of representations786-798. This playback behavior, shown in the present example using a video of a clock, is best understood in terms of the substantial value it can provide when used with a video of a “talking head.”
• By way of background, two common functions frequently provided with video playback in multimedia systems are “looping,” in which a video continuously repeats by looping from the end back to the beginning, and “freeze frame,” in which after playing through to the end the video holds on the last frame (both of which may be provided in the present invention via command icons such as those used in FIGS.7A-H). Each of these common techniques is effective for various purposes; however, what both of these techniques fail to do effectively is simulate the effect of a person making a statement, or asking a question, and then waiting for a response. Using the former technique (looping), the statement or question would be repeated ad infinitum, and using the latter technique (freeze frame), the talking head simply goes still, which is better but still not satisfactory.
• The “randomized video end-looping” feature of the present invention provides a far more effective solution for this type of situation. To use this feature, the user records a talking head statement or question on video, and after the talking is done, continues to record an extra few seconds of “presence” (eyes blinking, slight facial changes, etc.). When the video is started with end-looping enabled, it plays through to the end, and then loops just the final second or few seconds of the recording (the part with the presence). Each time it loops back, it loops back to a slightly different position (randomly selected in the preferred embodiment) in order to avoid a repetitive or mechanical feel. The result is a far more natural simulation of a person than is available with freeze frame, since the talking head does not just go still, but continues to provide a sense of human presence.
• Returning to the series of representations inFIG. 7H, the video of the clock begins with the hand in thevertical position786. As time progresses, the hand moves clockwise around the face of the clock until it reaches the vertical position once again in the final frame of thevideo788. At this point the video loops back790 to where it was a few seconds earlier, and then continues on again to theend792. Once again it loops back794, but this time to a slightly different position. After proceeding to theend796 yet again, it loops back798 to still another slightly different position, repeating this process ad infinitum until it is stopped. Depending on implementation, certain variations or enhancements to this end-looping function are possible, including: using a visual crossfade to mask the “splice” at the loop points, using one or more algorithms instead of or in addition to random variation to select the loop points, varying the end point of the loop to frames other than the last frame, using backwards playback in the looped section, etc.
• STARTING AND STOPPING OF CONTAINER OBJECTS—FIGS.8A-B illustrate “start propagation” and “stop propagation” whereby the starting and stopping of a container object is propagated to its contained objects.FIG. 8A shows the most basic form of start and stop propagation: the objects in a container start playing when the container is started, and they stop when the container is stopped.FIG. 8B shows two variations of this basic propagation: random start propagation and inverse stop propagation. With the former, when a container is started, a single object is selected randomly to play. With the latter, when the last object playing in a container stops playing, the container also stops playing (i.e., the “stop” propagates from a contained object to the enclosing container, the inverse of the normal direction). Each of these three functions, the basic propagation ofFIG. 8A and the two variations shown inFIG. 8B, is an independent feature of the invention that may or may not be included in any given system configuration.
• The functionality illustrated in FIGS.8A-B generally provides the advantage of a clear and effective control structure for the playback of multimedia content. Also, the random start propagation feature ofFIG. 8B provides the advantage of allowing authors to more easily create multimedia content that has greater variety and interest for viewers. In addition, the inverse stop propagation feature ofFIG. 8B, when used in conjunction with navigation and/or sub-display navigation that supports automatic back navigation, provides the advantage of enabling more effective and intuitive use of back navigation as a presentation structuring device. Moreover, when the propagation functionality of FIGS.8A-B is used in conjunction with other features of the invention, such as hierarchical nesting of containers, functions of the sentence paradigm, pointer objects, networking, collaborative editing, sub-displays, etc., further advantages are derived in terms of more efficient and effective control over distributed multimedia content.
• In addition, a “start propagation exemption” feature, which is an optional enhancement to the basic start propagation ofFIG. 8A and/or the random start propagation ofFIG. 8B, may be provided as follows. In cases where programmed object behavior specifies that an object is to be started as a result of events or operations occurring in connection with another object (put more simply, when an object is programmed to be started by another object), the programming causes the first object to become exempt from start propagation. This exemption can also be extended to include any objects that are “grouped” with the exempted object (“grouping” in this context means that all the objects in a group start and stop playing together;FIG. 17 provides an example of a grouping function). The reason for this exemption is that if an object might be started at some point during presentation playback due to ongoing events occurring in that presentation, it should not be started automatically at the time the container which contains the presentation starts playing; that would defeat the purpose of the programming. This “start propagation exemption” feature allows authors to program object behavior faster and with less effort, and is illustrated inFIG. 19. Note that a variety of programming methods may be used to create the object behavior that causes the exemption, and no particular programming method is required or assumed.
• FIG. 8A illustrates basic starting and stopping of a container object with start and stop propagation to contained objects, according to one embodiment of the present invention.FIG. 8A-1 shows acontainer object800 that contains atext object802, apicture object804 and atext object806. Initially none of these objects is playing. Theplayback display810 is empty, and the containerstart toggle button808 is turned off. InFIG. 8A-2, the user clicks on the containerstart toggle button808 to turn it on, causing thecontainer object800 to start playing. The starting of the container propagates to its containedobjects802,804 and806, causing them to start as well, and now all four objects are playing, as indicated by theobject play indicators812. At the same time, the media data of the containedobjects802,804 and806 is now seen in theplayback display810 as thetext814, thepicture816 and thetext818, respectively. InFIG. 8A-3, the user again clicks the containerstart toggle button808, this time turning it off. This causes thecontainer object800 to stop playing, and the stopping of the container propagates to its containedobjects802,804 and806, turning them off as well. Theplayback display810 is now empty once again. Note that the use of a container start toggle button to start and stop container objects is merely one way to do so, and various other ways of doing so may also be effective for the purposes of start and stop propagation.
• FIG. 8B illustrates two variations of start and stop propagation, random start propagation and inverse stop propagation, according to one embodiment of the present invention.FIG. 8B-1 shows acontainer object850 containing atext object852, apicture object854 and atext object856, none of which is playing. Theplayback display864 is empty and the containerstart toggle button860 is turned off. The user clicks on the random start enablebutton862, enabling random start propagation for the container object850 (this enabling is included merely to show that the feature is enabled, and is not essential to the operation of the feature itself). InFIG. 8B-2, the user clicks on the containerstart toggle button860 to turn it on, causing thecontainer object850 to start playing. Because random start propagation is enabled, the starting of the container propagates to a randomly chosen contained object, in this case theright text object856, whose media data is now seen in theplayback display864 as thetext868. The other containedobjects852 and854 remain turned off. InFIG. 8B-3, inverse stop propagation is shown. Thetext object856 which was previously playing inFIG. 8B-2 has now stopped playing (for example due to the timeout feature ofFIG. 7F), and since there were no other objects playing in thecontainer object850 at the time, thecontainer object850 has stopped as well. Theplayback display864 is again empty, and the containerstart toggle button860 has turned off.
• THE “SENTENCE” PARADIGM OF PROGRAMMING—FIGS. 9A through 27D illustrate programming of object behavior following a sentence paradigm. Each of the programming functions depicted in these figures, as well as each of the additional programming functions noted in the associated discussion, is a separate feature of the invention that may or may not be included in any given system configuration.
• The programming functions of the sentence paradigm generally provide the advantage of faster, more intuitive programming of object behavior. In addition to being individually advantageous, the functions are also designed to complement one another, and as more of them are added, they become an increasingly powerful, yet still intuitive, programming language for specifying object behavior in multimedia presentations. For many purposes, a few of these functions can rival the capabilities of scripting for generating object behavior, but with far less effort and complexity. Moreover, the programming functions of the sentence paradigm, when used in conjunction with other features of the invention, such as editing display settings, time-based playback behavior, sub-displays, etc., enables the integration of fast content authoring with fast programming of object behavior, providing the further advantage of increased speed and efficiency in the creation of highly sophisticated multimedia content. In addition, the programming functions of the sentence paradigm, when used in conjunction with the networking and collaborative editing features of the invention, provide the advantage of intuitive and efficient control over the playback of media objects distributed over a network.
• According to the sentence paradigm, object behavior is programmed by selecting two objects and an action, the action being either directional or non-directional. If the action is directional, the selected objects must be distinguished as to which is acting and which is being acted upon; if the action is non-directional, no such distinction need be made. For example, directional actions are actions such as “object A, when clicked, starts object B,” while non-directional actions are actions such as “objects A and B play together.” In addition, certain extensions to this general format may apply; for example, in some cases the two selected objects may be one and the same object, and in some cases the action may be multiple actions joined together to form a “compound sentence.”
• In the examples ofFIGS. 9A through 27D, a consistent selection order is shown. First, an acting object is selected, then an action, then an object to be acted upon (the distinction between the objects being moot, of course, in the case of non-directional actions). In essence, the first object can be seen as the “subject” of the sentence, the action as the “verb,” and the object to be acted upon as the “object” of the sentence. It should be noted, however, that in different embodiments of the invention, not unlike in different languages, the order of these sentence elements can vary. For example, the sentence programming paradigm can be implemented so that first the action is selected, then the acting object, and finally the object to be acted upon; or the object selection order could be reversed; or the two objects could be selected first followed by the action, etc. In fact, any method for effectively selecting the two objects and the action (or the multiple actions in the case of a “compound sentence”) can be used to implement the sentence paradigm of programming.
• FIGS. 9A through 27D illustrate the programming of various functions according to the sentence paradigm, as well as the operation of each function during presentation playback. The functions shown in these figures are:
• FIG. 9A-B: “object A, when clicked, starts object B”
• FIG. 9C-D: “object A, when clicked, starts object B” (alternate method)
• FIG. 10A-B: “object A, upon timer expiration, starts object B”
• FIG. 10C-D: “object A, upon timer expiration, starts object B” (alternate method)
• FIG. 11A-B: “object A, when clicked, stops object B”
• FIG. 12A-B: “object A, when clicked, stops itself”
• FIG. 13A-B: “object A, upon stopping, starts object B”
• FIG. 14A-B: “object A, when clicked, randomly starts object B”
• FIG. 15A-B: “object A, upon starting, starts object B”
• FIG. 15C-D: “object A, upon starting, stops object B”
• FIG. 16A-B: “object A, during mouse-over, makes object B play”
• FIG. 17A-B: “objects A and B play together”
• FIG. 18A-B: “objects A and B play separately”
• FIG. 18C-D “objects A and B, upon collision, start object C”
• FIG. 19A-B: “container object A, upon starting, starts contained object B”
• FIG. 19C-D “object A, upon sequence command, starts object B”
• FIG. 19E-F “object A tweens to object B”
• FIG. 20A-B: “object A, when clicked, stops itself and starts object B”
• FIG. 21A-B: 2 function compound sentence:FIG. 12 andFIG. 9
• FIG. 22A-B: 2 function compound sentence:FIG. 9 and new object
• FIG. 23A-B: 3 function compound sentence:FIG. 12,FIG. 13 and duplicate
• FIG. 24A-B command repeat function
• FIG. 25A-B: “video object A, upon reaching cue point, starts object B”
• FIG. 26A-B: “container object A, upon navigation into sub-display, starts contained object B”
• FIG. 26C-D: “container object A, upon navigation back from sub-display, stops contained object B”
• FIG. 26E-F “object A, when clicked, initiates container transition”
• FIG. 26G-H “object A, when clicked, changes attribute of object B”
• FIG. 27A-B “vector object A controls the position of object B”
• FIG. 27C-D “vector object A controls the scale of vector object B”
• Before proceeding with a detailed description of the above functions, the following points should be noted.
• First, the object types shown throughoutFIGS. 9A through 27D are representative only; other object types supported by the system (including container objects) may be used in place of the objects shown. The only exceptions to this occur in FIGS.25A-B,26A-D and27A-D, in which the type for “object A” is specified as an inherent part of the function, and in FIGS.26E-F and27C-D, in which the type for “object B” is specified as an inherent part of the function.
• Second, while each of the functions of the sentence paradigm may have its own separate command icon, this could become confusing if a large number of functions are provided. However in many cases a single command icon can be shared effectively by more than one function (for example, the functions ofFIGS. 11 and 12). Consolidation of command icons in this manner is the preferred implementation. Due to size constraints in the diagrams, no attempt is made inFIGS. 9A through 27D to show different command icons for every function; rather, a few representative command icons are used throughout.
• Third, when each of the functions of the sentence paradigm is programmed, it results in the creation of one or more “relations” between the objects in question. These relations are depicted inFIGS. 9A through 27D as curved lines with or without arrowheads, an arrowhead indicating which object is being acted upon in the case of a directional action. This depiction of relations is not intended to imply any particular mechanism or implementation by which the action of the function is accomplished, but is merely a visual representation in the diagrams indicating that the function has been programmed. Moreover, while most of the relations shown are between objects in the same container, relations may also occur between containers and their contained objects,FIG. 19 being one example. Furthermore, in system configurations which support hierarchical container nesting, as shown in FIGS.32A-B, provisions may be included to allow relations to cross hierarchical boundaries generally; one approach for doing so is shown inFIG. 48.
• Fourth, for each function of the sentence paradigm where the triggering event for the action of the function is “when clicked” (FIGS. 9, 11,12,14,20 and26E-H), there is a corresponding sibling function where the triggering event for the action of the function is “upon timer expiration” (the timer being a per object countdown timer that begins counting down when the object is started). An example of such sibling functions is seen in the functions ofFIGS. 9 and 10, where everything is the same between the two functions except the event that triggers the action of the function (click vs. timer). For each of the other “when clicked” functions (FIGS. 11, 12,14,20 and26E-H), the sibling function “upon timer expiration” has been omitted for space considerations, but is hereby included as part of the invention (each such function being a separate feature of the invention, and having the same considerations as its “when clicked” sibling). These “upon timer expiration” functions give authors great flexibility for arranging object playback in time, providing significant advantages over the timeline-based authoring paradigm of many existing systems.
• Fifth, for each function of the sentence paradigm which includes both a triggering event and a triggered action (FIGS. 9-15,18C-D,19A-D,20,25 and26), an alternate method for programming the function may be supported whereby the triggering event and the triggered action are selected independently (selection in either order may be supported depending on implementation). Examples of this alternate programming method are seen in the functions of FIGS.9C-D and10C-D, which illustrate alternate programming for the functions of FIGS.9A-B and10A-B, respectively. For the remaining functions of the sentence paradigm which are eligible for alternate programming (FIGS. 11-15,18C-D,19A-D,20,25 and26), the versions of the functions using alternate programming have been omitted from the figures for space considerations, but are hereby included as part of the invention (each such function being a separate feature of the invention).
• Sixth, also for space considerations, the examples of “compound sentence programming” shown inFIGS. 21, 22 and23 have been limited to a representative subset of the useful function combinations. Other combinations may be supported as follows, each as an independent feature of the invention. With compound sentence programming, multiple functions are consolidated into a single “sentence” in order to streamline the authoring process for frequently used functions. Within the “subject-verb-object” framework of the sentence paradigm, compound sentences involve a “verb” which is actually two or three actions joined together by the user during the programming process. Three categories of actions may be joined together during compound sentence programming: (1) “stop actions” which include the functions ofFIGS. 11 and 12 and their “timer expiration” siblings; (2) “start and associate actions” which include the start functions ofFIGS. 9, 10 and13 and the associate functions ofFIGS. 17 and 18A-B; and (3) “object creation actions” which include the functions ofFIGS. 2A through 3D and the “new pointer object” function ofFIG. 34A.
• When the user programs a “compound sentence,” actions from the above categories are joined together according to one of three methods. The first method is to join a “stop action” with a “start action” whereby the “subject of the start action” does double duty as the “object of the stop action,” as seen in FIGS.21A-B; joining of other “stop actions” and “start actions” may also be supported, and the various combinations are hereby included as independent features of the invention. The second method is to join a “start or associate action” with an “object creation action” whereby the “object of the start or associate action” is created as a result of the sentence programming process, as seen in FIGS.22A-B; joining of other “start or associate actions” and “object creation actions” may also be supported, and the various combinations are hereby included as independent features of the invention. The third method, a combination of the first two, is to join a “stop action,” a “start action” and an “object creation action” whereby the “subject of the start action” does double duty as the “object of the stop action” and the “object of the start action” is created as a result of the sentence programming process, as seen in FIGS.23A-B; joining of other “stop actions,” “start-actions” and “object creation actions” may also be supported, and the various combinations are hereby included as independent features of the invention.
• Moreover, each of the function combinations that can be programmed as a “compound sentence” may also be provided as a “consolidated” function. An example is seen in the function of FIGS.20A-B, which is a single function corresponding to the “compound sentence” of FIGS.21A-B. For each of the possible “compound sentence” function combinations discussed above, the corresponding “consolidated” function is hereby included as an independent feature of the invention.
• Seventh, a number of the functions of the sentence paradigm may be used to create programmed object behavior that can cause the “start propagation exemption” discussed in connection with FIGS.8A-B; in particular, this applies to any function whose action involves some form of “starts object B” (such as the functions ofFIGS. 9, 10,13,14,15A-B,18C-D,19,20,21,22,23,25, and26A-B). Briefly, this “start propagation exemption” feature provides that when an object is programmed to be started by another object, it becomes exempt from the start propagation ofFIG. 8A in order to avoid defeating the purpose of the programming. This exemption can also be extended to include any objects that the exempted object has been “grouped” with (such as via the function ofFIG. 17: “objects A and B play together”).FIG. 19A-B illustrates the “start propagation exemption” feature of the present invention, as well as a function (“container object A, upon starting, starts contained object B”) which can be used to override the exemption for particular objects.
• Eighth, the functions of FIGS.27A-D depend upon support for “vector objects,” which are described at length in connection withFIG. 28A. In addition to the two functions shown in FIGS.27A-D, a number of other functions are listed below which may be used to program other specific mappings between vector objects and their targets. These functions may be divided into two groups as follows. The first group consists of functions for mapping vector object outputs to various display settings seen in FIGS.4A through6B; these mappings may be made individually and in combination, as indicated in the list. The second group consists of functions for mapping vector object outputs to various vector object parameters (again, individually and in combination); in these functions, the “vector object B” can be one and the same vector object as the “vector object A.” The programming steps for the functions in each group are exemplified by the functions of FIGS.27A-B and27C-D, which are the first functions of the first and second groups, respectively; the programming for the other functions in each group is the same as in those examples.
• Group One:
• “vector object A controls the position of object B” 2 channels
• “vector object A controls the x-position of object B” 1 channel
• “vector object A controls the y-position of object B” 1 channel
• “vector object A controls the size of object B” 1 channel
• “vector object A controls the position and size of object B” 3 channels
• “vector object A controls the rotation of object B” 1 channel
• “vector object A controls the position and rotation of object B” 3 channels
• “vector object A controls the position, size and rotation of object B” 4 channels
• “vector object A controls the color of object B” 3 channels
• “vector object A controls the hue and brightness of object B” 2 channels
• “vector object A controls the x-stretch of object B” 1 channel
• “vector object A controls the y-stretch of object B” 1 channel
• “vector object A controls the x-stretch and y-stretch of object B” 2 channels
• “vector object A controls the top/bottom/left/right cropping of object B” 1-4 channels
• “vector object A controls the shape of object B” 1 channel
• “vector object A controls the softness of object B” 1 channel
• “vector object A controls the shape and softness of object B” 2 channels
• Group Two:
• “vector object A controls the scale of vector object B” 1 channel
• “vector object A controls the speed of vector object B” 1 channel
• “vector object A controls the scale and speed of vector object B” 2 channels
• “vector object A controls the playback position of vector object B” 1 channel
• “vector object A controls the scale and playback pos. of vector object B” 2 channels
• The above programming functions are hereby included as part of the invention, each as a separate feature that may or may not be included depending on system configuration.
• Finally, it should be noted that the sentence paradigm of the present invention does not require a control display, but in system configurations where control display functionality is supported, certain control display features associated with the sentence programming paradigm can be advantageous. For one, control displays can be used to provide visual representation of the relations formed by the programming process, as well as real-time indication of associated actions and events, as seen in FIGS.30A-B. In addition, provisions may be made to allow object icons in control displays to be used for selecting one or both of the objects being programmed, and some examples of this are seen in FIGS.27A-D (these provisions can include using the “container control objects” ofFIG. 29B for selecting container objects). A more detailed description of control display functionality is provided in connection withFIGS. 29A through 30B.
• The functions ofFIGS. 9A through 27D, which exemplify the sentence paradigm for programming object behavior, are now discussed in detail.
• FIGS.9A-B illustrate programming and operation for the function “object A, when clicked, starts object B,” according to one embodiment of the present invention.FIG. 9A shows acontainer object900 containing atext object902 and apicture object906; the media data of the containedobjects902 and906 is seen in theplayback display914 as thetext910 and thepicture912, respectively. To program the function, the user first clicks on thetext910 corresponding to thetext object902, then clicks on thefunction command icon908, then clicks on thepicture912 corresponding to thepicture object906. As a result of this programming process, arelation904 forms between the twoobjects902 and906.FIG. 9B illustrates how the function programmed inFIG. 9A operates during presentation playback. Initially, inFIG. 9B-1, thetext object902 is playing and its media data is seen in theplayback display914 as thetext910. When the user clicks916 on thetext910, then inFIG. 9B-2 the picture object906 starts playing, as indicated by theplay indicator918, and its media data is now seen in theplayback display914 as thepicture912.
• FIGS.9C-D illustrate alternate programming for the function “object A, when clicked, starts object B,” according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG.9C shows acontainer object950 containing atext object952 and apicture object956; the media data of the containedobjects952 and956 is seen in theplayback display964 as thetext960 and thepicture962, respectively. To program the function, the user first clicks on thetext960 corresponding to thetext object952, then clicks on theleft command icon957 corresponding to the triggering event (in this case “when clicked”), then clicks on theright command icon958 corresponding to the triggered action (in this case “starts”), then clicks on thepicture962 corresponding to thepicture object956. As a result of this programming process, arelation954 forms between the twoobjects952 and956.FIG. 9D illustrates how the function programmed inFIG. 9C operates during presentation playback (this operation is the same as that ofFIG. 9B). Initially, inFIG. 9D-1, thetext object952 is playing and its media data is seen in theplayback display964 as thetext960. When the user clicks966 on thetext960, then inFIG. 9D-2 the picture object956 starts playing, as indicated by theplay indicator968, and its media data is now seen in theplayback display964 as thepicture962.
• FIGS.10A-B illustrate programming and operation for the function “object A, upon timer expiration, starts object B,” according to one embodiment of the present invention. Recall that for this and other “upon timer expiration” functions there is a per object countdown timer that begins counting down when an object starts playing. The duration may be set to a default value, or in a preferred embodiment may be made user adjustable. This timer functionality, unlike the “object timeout” function ofFIG. 7F, may be made to trigger a variety of outcomes depending on how it is programmed, and an example of such programming is shown in FIGS.10A-B.
• FIG. 10A shows acontainer object1000 containing atext object1002 and apicture object1006; the media data of the containedobjects1002 and1006 is seen in theplayback display1014 as thetext1010 and thepicture1012, respectively. To program the function, the user first clicks on thetext1010 corresponding to thetext object1002, then clicks on thefunction command icon1008, then clicks on thepicture1012 corresponding to thepicture object1006. As a result of this programming process, arelation1004 forms between the twoobjects1002 and1006.FIG. 10B illustrates how the function programmed inFIG. 10A operates during presentation playback. Initially, inFIG. 10B-1, thetext object1002 is playing and its media data is seen in theplayback display1014 as thetext1010. When the countdown timer for thetext object1002 expires, then inFIG. 10B-2 thepicture object1006 starts playing, as indicated by theplay indicator1016, and its media data is now seen in theplayback display1014 as thepicture1012. Additionally, an optional enhancement to the present function may be provided for cases where a single object is selected as both object A and B; in such cases, the timer begins counting down when the object stops playing, and upon timer expiration the object starts playing again.
• FIGS.10C-D illustrate alternate programming for the function “object A, upon timer expiration, starts object B,” according to one embodiment of the present invention.FIG. 10C shows acontainer object1050 containing atext object1052 and apicture object1056; the media data of the containedobjects1052 and1056 is seen in theplayback display1064 as thetext1060 and thepicture1062, respectively. To program the function, the user first clicks on thetext1060 corresponding to thetext object1052, then clicks on theleft command icon1057 corresponding to the triggering event (in this case “upon timer expiration”), then clicks on theright command icon1058 corresponding to the triggered action (in this case “starts”), then clicks on thepicture1062 corresponding to thepicture object1056. As a result of this programming process, arelation1054 forms between the twoobjects1052 and1056.FIG. 10D illustrates how the function programmed inFIG. 10C operates during presentation playback (this operation is the same as that ofFIG. 10B). Initially, inFIG. 10D-1 thetext object1052 is playing and its media data is seen in theplayback display1064 as thetext1060. When the countdown timer for thetext object1052 expires, then inFIG. 10D-2 thepicture object1056 starts playing, as indicated by theplay indicator1066, and its media data is now seen in theplayback display1064 as thepicture1062.
• FIGS.11A-B illustrate programming and operation for the function “object A, when clicked, stops object B,” according to one embodiment of the present invention.FIG. 11A shows acontainer object1100 containing atext object1102 and apicture object1106; the media data of the containedobjects1102 and1106 is seen in theplayback display1114 as thetext1110 and thepicture1112, respectively. To program the function, the user first clicks on thetext1110 corresponding to thetext object1102, then clicks on thefunction command icon1108, then clicks on thepicture1112 corresponding to thepicture object1106. As a result of this programming process, arelation1104 forms between the twoobjects1102 and1106.FIG. 11B illustrates how the function programmed inFIG. 11A operates during presentation playback. Initially, inFIG. 11B-1, thetext object1102 and thepicture object1106 are both playing and their media data is seen in theplayback display1114 as thetext1110 and thepicture1112, respectively. When the user clicks1116 on thetext1110, then inFIG. 11B-2 thepicture object1106 stops playing and its media data is no longer seen in theplayback display1114.
• FIGS.12A-B illustrate programming and operation for the function “object A, when clicked, stops itself,” according to one embodiment of the present invention.FIG. 12A shows acontainer object1200 containing atext object1202 and a picture object1206 (the latter being unnecessary for the present example); the media data of the containedobjects1202 and1206 is seen in theplayback display1214 as thetext1210 and thepicture1212, respectively. To program the function, the user first clicks on thetext1210 corresponding to thetext object1202, then clicks on thefunction command icon1208, then clicks again1211 on thetext1210. As a result of this programming process, arelation1204 forms between thetext object1202 and itself.FIG. 12B illustrates how the function programmed inFIG. 12A operates during presentation playback. Initially, inFIG. 12B-1, thetext object1202 is playing and its media data is seen in theplayback display1214 as thetext1210. When the user clicks1216 on thetext1210, then inFIG. 12B-2 thetext object1202 stops playing and its media data is no longer seen in theplayback display1214.
• FIGS.13A-B illustrate programming and operation for the function “object A, upon stopping, starts object B,” according to one embodiment of the present invention.FIG. 13A shows acontainer object1300 containing atext object1302 and apicture object1306; the media data of the containedobjects1302 and1306 is seen in theplayback display1314 as thetext1310 and thepicture1312, respectively. To program the function, the user first clicks on thetext1310 corresponding to thetext object1302, then clicks on thefunction command icon1308, then clicks on thepicture1312 corresponding to thepicture object1306. As a result of this programming process, arelation1304 forms between the twoobjects1302 and1306.FIG. 13B illustrates how the function programmed inFIG. 13A operates during presentation playback. Initially, inFIG. 13B-1, thetext object1302 is playing and its media data is seen in theplayback display1314 as thetext1310. When thetext object1302 stops playing (for example due to the timeout feature ofFIG. 7F), then inFIG. 13B-2 thepicture object1306 starts playing, and its media data is now seen in theplayback display1314 as thepicture1312.
• FIGS.14A-B illustrate programming and operation for the function “object A, when clicked, randomly starts object B,” according to one embodiment of the present invention. Since this function randomly starts one “object B” from among several which have been programmed, more than one instance of the function is required to demonstrate its operation; in this example, the function is programmed twice by the user.FIG. 14A shows acontainer object1400 containing atext object1402, atext object1404 and apicture object1406; the media data of the containedobjects1402,1404 and1406 is seen in theplayback display1420 as thetext1414, thetext1416 and thepicture1418, respectively. To program the first instance of the function, the user first clicks on thetext1414 corresponding to thetext object1402, then clicks on thefunction command icon1412, then clicks on thetext1416 corresponding to thetext object1404; as a result of this programming process, arelation1408 forms between the twoobjects1402 and1404. To program the second instance, the user first clicks on thetext1414, then clicks on thefunction command icon1412, then clicks on thepicture1418 corresponding to thepicture object1406; as a result of this programming process, asecond relation1410 forms between the second twoobjects1402 and1406.
• FIG. 14B illustrates how the function programmed inFIG. 14A operates during presentation playback. Initially, inFIG. 14B-1, thetext object1402 is playing and its media data is seen in theplayback display1420 as thetext1414. When the user clicks1422 on thetext1414, one of the two “target objects” related to thetext object1402 via the programming ofFIG. 14A (1408,1410) is randomly selected to be started, and inFIG. 14B-2, the chosenobject1404 starts playing and its media data is now seen in theplayback display1420 as thetext1416. Of course to address more than two target objects, more instances of the function may be programmed (in which case, as in the present example, only one target object will be selected); in an optional enhancement, the present function may distinguish between objects according to object type, and select one object per object type from among the target objects.
• FIGS.15A-B illustrate programming and operation for the function “object A, upon starting, starts object B,” according to one embodiment of the present invention.FIG. 15A shows acontainer object1500 containing atext object1502, atext object1504 and apicture object1506; the media data of the containedobjects1502,1504 and1506 is seen in theplayback display1520 as thetext1514, thetext1516 and thepicture1518, respectively. To help illustrate the present function, a previously programmed relation is already in place: theobjects1502 and1504 have been programmed with the function of FIGS.9A-B (“object A, when clicked, starts object B”) shown by therelation1508. This previous programming is not part of the present function, but is merely provided to exemplify the starting of objects that can occur during presentation playback. To program the present function, the user first clicks on thetext1516 corresponding to thetext object1504, then clicks on thefunction command icon1512, then clicks on thepicture1518 corresponding to thepicture object1506. As a result of this programming process, arelation1510 forms between the twoobjects1504 and1506.
• FIG. 15B illustrates how the function programmed inFIG. 15A operates during presentation playback. Initially, inFIG. 15B-1, thetext object1502 is playing and its media data is seen in theplayback display1520 as thetext1514. When the user clicks1522 on thetext1514, then inFIG. 15B-2 theother text object1504 starts playing due to the previously programmedrelation1508, and its media data is now seen in theplayback display1520 as thetext1516. At the same time, due to the operation of the present function, the starting of thetext object1504 causes thepicture object1506 to start playing as well, and its media data is also now seen in theplayback display1520 as thepicture1518.
• FIGS.15C-D illustrate programming and operation for the function “object A, upon starting, stops object B,” according to one embodiment of the present invention.FIG. 15C shows acontainer object1550 containing atext object1552, atext object1554 and apicture object1556; the media data of the containedobjects1552,1554 and1556 is seen in theplayback display1570 as thetext1564, thetext1566 and thepicture1568, respectively. To help illustrate the present function, a previously programmed relation is already in place: theobjects1552 and1554 have been programmed with the function of FIGS.9A-B (“object A, when clicked, starts object B”) shown by therelation1558. This previous programming is not part of the present function, but is merely provided to exemplify the starting of objects that can occur during presentation playback. To program the present function, the user first clicks on thetext1566 corresponding to thetext object1554, then clicks on thefunction command icon1562, then clicks on thepicture1568 corresponding to thepicture object1556. As a result of this programming process, arelation1560 forms between the twoobjects1554 and1556.
• FIG. 15D illustrates how the function programmed inFIG. 15C operates during presentation playback. Initially, inFIG. 15D-1, thetext object1552 and thepicture object1556 are playing, and their media data is seen in theplayback display1570 as thetext1564 and thepicture1568, respectively. When the user clicks1572 on thetext1564, then inFIG. 15D-2 theother text object1554 starts playing due to the previously programmedrelation1558, and its media data is now seen in theplayback display1570 as thetext1566. At the same time, due to the operation of the present function, the starting of thetext object1554 causes thepicture object1556 to stop playing, and its media data is no longer seen in theplayback display1570.
• FIGS.16A-B illustrate programming and operation for the function “object A, during mouse-over, makes object B play,” according to one embodiment of the present invention.FIG. 16A shows acontainer object1600 containing atext object1602 and apicture object1606; the media data of the containedobjects1602 and1606 is seen in theplayback display1614 as thetext1610 and thepicture1612, respectively. To program the function, the user first clicks on thetext1610 corresponding to thetext object1602, then clicks on thefunction command icon1608, then clicks on thepicture1612 corresponding to thepicture object1606. As a result of this programming process, arelation1604 forms between the twoobjects1602 and1606.
• FIG. 16B illustrates how the function programmed inFIG. 16A operates during presentation playback. Initially, inFIG. 16B-1, thetext object1602 is playing and its media data is seen in theplayback display1614 as thetext1610; thepointer1616 is in the lower part of the playback display, away from thetext1610. InFIG. 16B-2, when the user moves thepointer1616 over thetext1610, thepicture object1606 starts playing, and its media data is now seen in theplayback display1614 as thepicture1612; unless otherwise stopped, thepicture object1606 continues playing as long as thepointer1616 remains over thetext1610. InFIG. 16B-3, when the user moves thepointer1616 so that it is no longer over thetext1610, thepicture object1606 stops playing and its media data is no longer seen in theplayback display1614.
• FIGS.17A-B illustrate programming and operation for the function “objects A and B play together,” according to one embodiment of the present invention. This function is used to group objects together so that they always start and stop at the same time. It is non-directional, meaning that the starting or stopping of any object in a group causes all the objects in that group to start or stop. It is also transitive, meaning that if “objects A and B play together” and “objects B and C play together,” then effectively “objects A and C play together.”
• FIG. 17A illustrates programming for the function “objects A and B play together.” The figure shows acontainer object1700 containing aleft text object1702, aleft picture object1704, aright picture object1706 and aright text object1708; the media data of the containedobjects1702,1704,1706 and1708 is seen in theplayback display1726 as theleft text1718, theleft picture1722, theright picture1724 and theright text1720, respectively. To help illustrate the present function, some previously programmed relations are already in place: theobjects1702 and1704 have been programmed with the function of FIGS.9A-B (“object A, when clicked, starts object B”), as shown by therelation1710; the other twoobjects1706 and1708 have been programmed with the function ofFIG. 11 (“object A, when clicked, stops object B”), as shown by therelation1714. This previous programming is not part of the present function, but is merely provided to exemplify the starting and stopping of objects that can occur during presentation playback. To program the present function, the user first clicks on theleft picture1722 corresponding to theleft picture object1704, then clicks on thefunction command icon1716, then clicks on theright picture1724 corresponding to theright picture object1706. As a result of this programming process, arelation1712 forms between the twoobjects1704 and1706; the absence of an arrowhead on therelation1712 indicates that the relation is non-directional.
• FIG. 17B illustrates how the function programmed inFIG. 17A operates during presentation playback. Initially, inFIG. 17B-1, theleft text object1702 and theright text object1708 are playing, and their media data is seen in theplayback display1726 as theleft text1718 and theright text1720, respectively. When the user clicks1728 on theleft text1718, then inFIG. 17B-2 theleft picture object1704 starts playing due to the previously programmedrelation1710, and its media data is now seen in theplayback display1726 as theleft picture1722. At the same time, due to the operation of the present function, the starting of theleft picture object1704 causes theright picture object1706 to start playing as well, and its media data is now also seen in theplayback display1726 as theright picture1724. At some point thereafter, when the user clicks1730 on theright text1720, then inFIG. 17B-3 theright picture object1706 stops playing due to the previously programmedrelation1714, and its media data is no longer seen in theplayback display1726. At the same time, due to the operation of the present function, the stopping of theright picture object1706 causes theleft picture object1704 to stop as well, and its content is also no longer seen in theplayback display1726.
• FIGS.18A-B illustrate programming and operation for the function “objects A and B play separately,” according to one embodiment of the present invention. This function is used to group objects together so that they become “mutually exclusive,” i.e., so that no two objects in a group ever play at the same time. It is non-directional, meaning that the starting of any object in a group causes all the other objects in that group to stop. It is also transitive, meaning that if “objects A and B play separately” and “objects B and C play separately,” then effectively “objects A and C play separately.”
• FIG. 18A illustrates programming for the function “objects A and B play separately.” The figure shows acontainer object1800 containing aleft text object1802, aleft picture object1804, aright picture object1806 and aright text object1808; the media data of the containedobjects1802,1804,1806 and1808 is seen in theplayback display1826 as theleft text1818, theleft picture1822, theright picture1824 and theright text1820, respectively. To help illustrate the present function, some previously programmed relations are already in place: theobjects1802 and1804 have been programmed with the function of FIGS.9A-B (“object A, when clicked, starts object B”), as shown by therelation1810; the other twoobjects1806 and1808 have also been programmed with the function of FIGS.9A-B, as shown by therelation1814. This previous programming is not part of the present function, but is merely provided to exemplify the starting of objects that can occur during presentation playback. To program the present function, the user first clicks on theleft picture1822 corresponding to theleft picture object1804, then clicks on thefunction command icon1816, then clicks on theright picture1824 corresponding to theright picture object1806. As a result of this programming process, arelation1812 forms between the twoobjects1804 and1806; the absence of an arrowhead on therelation1812 indicates that the relation is non-directional.
• FIG. 18B illustrates how the function programmed inFIG. 18A operates during presentation playback. Initially, inFIG. 18B-1, theleft text object1802, theright picture object1806 and theright text object1808 are playing, and their media data is seen in theplayback display1826 as theleft text1818, theright picture1824 and theright text1820, respectively. When the user clicks1828 on theleft text1818, then inFIG. 18B-2 theleft picture object1804 starts playing due to the previously programmedrelation1810, and its media data is now seen in theplayback display1826 as theleft picture1822. At the same time, due to the operation of the present function, the starting of theleft picture object1804 causes theright picture object1806 to stop playing, and its media data is now no longer seen in theplayback display1826. At some point thereafter, when the user clicks1830 on theright text1820, then inFIG. 18B-3 theright picture object1806 starts playing due to the previously programmedrelation1814, and its media data is now seen in theplayback display1826 as theright picture1824. At the same time, due to the operation of the present function, the starting of theright picture object1806 causes theleft picture object1804 to stop playing, and its media data is no longer seen in theplayback display1826.
• FIGS.18C-D illustrate programming and operation for the function “objects A and B, upon collision, start object C,” according to one embodiment of the present invention. This function is used to provide “hit detection,” a feature often seen in video games and other interactive content, in which the onscreen “collision” of two or more objects produces a resulting action. In the example of FIGS.18C-D, the resulting action is the starting of a third object (object C). In an alternate version of the function (omitted from the figures for space considerations), the resulting action is the stopping rather than the starting of the third object; this alternate version is hereby included as a separate feature of the invention.
• FIG. 18C illustrates programming for the function “objects A and B, upon collision, start object C.” The figure shows acontainer object1832 containing afirst picture object1834, asecond picture object1836 and atext object1838; the media data of the containedobjects1834,1836 and1838 is seen in theplayback display1852 as thelower picture1850, theupper picture1848 and thetext1846, respectively. To help illustrate the present function, thefirst picture object1834 has some previously programmed time-basedobject playback behavior1854 already in place. The time-basedplayback behavior1854 represents the “bouncing” effect seen inFIG. 7B, in which the vertical position of an object rises and falls over time. This previous programming is not part of the present function, but is merely provided to exemplify a change in the state of the media data occuring during presentation playback; other forms of media data state change may also be used in conjunction with the present function, such as the tweening functionality ofFIGS. 28B and 28D, the starting and stopping of objects, etc.
• To program the present function, the user first selects both thelower picture1850 corresponding to thefirst picture object1834 and theupper picture1848 corresponding to thesecond picture object1836 by shift-clicking on them in succession, then clicks on thefunction command icon1844, then clicks on thetext1846 corresponding to thetext object1838. As a result of this programming process, arelation1840 forms between thefirst picture object1834 and thesecond picture object1836; this relation signifies that the onscreen “collision” of the corresponding media data (1850 and1848) is the trigger condition for the function, and the absence of an arrowhead on therelation1840 indicates that the relation is non-directional. Also as a result of the above programming process, adirectional relation1842 forms between thenon-directional relation1840 and thetext object1838; this directional relation signifies that the resulting action of the trigger condition signified by thenon-directional relation1840 is the starting of thetext object1838. Depending on system configuration, certain variations of the above programming may be supported. In one variation, the selecting of the two pictures (1850 and1848) may be accomplished by other forms of selection rather than shift-clicking on them, such as dragging an outline box around them. In another variation, a separate function command icon is provided which is clicked between (non-shift) clicks on the two pictures (1850 and1848) to create thenon-directional relation1840. These variations are hereby included as part of the invention, each as a separate feature that may or may not be included depending on system configuration.
• FIG. 18D illustrates how the function programmed inFIG. 18C operates during presentation playback. Initially, inFIG. 18D-1, thefirst picture object1834 and thesecond picture object1836 are playing, and their media data is seen in theplayback display1852 as thelower picture1850 and theupper picture1848, respectively.FIG. 18D-2 shows the situation a moment later, in which the previously programmed time-basedplayback behavior1854 is changing the vertical position of thelower picture1850, which is now rising up but has not yet come into contact with theupper picture1848. Finally, inFIG. 18D-3, the vertical position of thelower picture1850 has risen high enough so that it touches theupper picture1848, and due to the operation of the present function, thetext object1838 starts playing and itsmedia data1846 is now seen in theplayback display1852.
• FIGS.19A-B illustrate programming and operation for the function “container object A, upon starting, starts contained object B,” according to one embodiment of the present invention. This example also illustrates the “start propagation exemption” feature discussed in connection with FIGS.8A-B. Briefly, this feature provides that when an object is programmed to be started by another object, it becomes exempt from the start propagation ofFIG. 8A in order to avoid defeating the purpose of the programming. The present example demonstrates both this exemption functionality, and how the exemption can be overridden for particular objects by the present function.
• FIG. 19A illustrates programming for the function “container object A, upon starting, starts contained object B.” The figure shows acontainer object1900 containing aleft text object1904, aleft picture object1906, aright picture object1908 and aright text object1910; the media data of the containedobjects1904,1906,1908 and1910 is seen in theplayback display1932 as theleft text1924, theleft picture1928, theright picture1930 and theright text1926, respectively. To help illustrate the present function, some previously programmed relations are already in place: the four containedobjects1904,1906,1908 and1910 have been programmed in a “circle” using the function of FIGS.10A-B (“object A, upon timer expiration, starts object B”) as shown by: therelation1912 between the twoleft objects1904 and1906; therelation1914 between the twomiddle objects1906 and1908; therelation1916 between the tworight objects1908 and1910; and therelation1918 between the rightmost andleftmost objects1910 and1904. This previous programming is not part of the present function, but is merely provided to exemplify a certain problem situation: a number of objects are programmed to start one another, yet the “start propagation exemption” discussed above prevents any of the objects from initially being started to get the process going. One solution for this type of situation is to use the present function to start one of the objects. To program the present function, the user first clicks on theplayback display background1922 corresponding to thecontainer object1900, then clicks on thefunction command icon1920, then clicks on theright picture1930 corresponding to theright picture object1908. As a result of this programming process, arelation1902 forms between thecontainer object1900 and theright picture object1908.
• FIG. 19B illustrates how the function programmed inFIG. 19A operates during presentation playback, and also illustrates the “start propagation exemption” discussed above. Initially, inFIG. 19B-1, thecontainer object1900 and its containedobjects1904,1906,1908 and1910 are not playing; theplayback display1932 is empty, and the container start toggle button1934 (similar tobutton808 inFIG. 8A) is turned off. InFIG. 19B-2, the user clicks on the containerstart toggle button1934 to make thecontainer object1900 start playing. Based on the start propagation feature ofFIG. 8A, one might expect all the contained objects to start playing; however in this example, the “start propagation exemption” discussed above blocks that propagation for any object programmed to be started by another object (which in this case is all four contained objects due to the previously programmedrelations1912,1914,1916 and1918). Because of this start propagation exemption, three of the contained objects (1904,1906,1910) remain turned off. However due to the operation of the present function, theright picture object1908 starts playing, and its media data is now seen in theplayback display1932 as the right picture1930 (and now that this first object is playing, the other objects will start playing in sequence according to the previous programming).
• FIGS.19C-D illustrate programming and operation for the function “object A, upon sequence command, starts object B,” according to one embodiment of the present invention. A sequence command is a user-initiated command signifying that the presentation playback should go to the next state within a series of specified states; a common usage is seen in the sequencing of slides and slide elements in a typical business slideshow. Depending on system configuration, support for sequence commands can be accomplished using a variety of implementations, such as a command icon (as seen inFIG. 19D), one or more keys on a computer keyboard, a handheld remote device, etc. It should be noted that the programming for the present function is performed twice inFIG. 19C; the first time is from a container to a contained object, and the second time is from one contained object to another. This tandem programming is not inherent to the function, but is rather provided to illustrate both varieties of the function; each of the two varieties shown inFIG. 19C is a complete instance of the present function and a separate feature of the invention.
• FIG. 19C shows acontainer object1936 containing atext object1940 and apicture object1944; the media data of the containedobjects1940 and1944 is seen in theplayback display1954 as thetext1948 and thepicture1950, respectively. To program the first instance of the present function, the user first clicks on thebackground1952 of theplayback display1954 which corresponds to the container object1936 (depending on system configuration, other mechanisms for indicating the container object may be supported), then clicks on thefunction command icon1946, then clicks on thetext1948 corresponding to thetext object1940. As a result of this programming process, arelation1938 forms between thecontainer object1936 and thetext object1940. To program the second instance of the present function, the user first clicks on thetext1948 corresponding to the text object1940 (depending on system configuration, this step may be omitted when chaining multiple instances of the present function), then clicks on thefunction command icon1946, then clicks on thepicture1950 corresponding to thepicture object1944. As a result of this programming process, arelation1942 forms between thetext object1940 and thepicture object1944.
• FIG. 19D illustrates how the two instances of the function programmed inFIG. 19C operate during presentation playback. Initially, inFIG. 19D-1, neither thetext object1940 nor thepicture object1944 is playing, as indicated by theempty playback display1954. When the user initiates a sequence command by clicking on thesequence command icon1956, then inFIG. 19D-2 thetext object1940 starts playing due to the operation of the first instance of the present function, and its media data is now seen in theplayback display1954 as thetext1948. When the user again initiates a sequence command by clicking on thesequence command icon1956, then inFIG. 19D-3 thepicture object1944 starts playing due to the operation of the second instance of the present function, and its media data is now seen in theplayback display1954 as thepicture1950.
• FIGS.19E-F illustrate programming and operation for the function “object A tweens to object B,” according to one embodiment of the present invention. The tweening behavior shown in this example is a process by which display settings (and other characteristics depending on system configuration) of a stopping object are gradually transitioned to those of a starting object; the tweening functionality of the present invention is detailed in connection with FIGS.28B-D. In the present example, the focus is on the programming by which the tweening behavior is established (rather than on the implementation by which the tweening behavior is accomplished); the programming shown in the present example can be used to create various forms of tweening behavior (depending on system configuration), such as those discussed in connection with FIGS.28B-D.
• FIG. 19E shows acontainer object1960 containing aleft text object1964 and aright text object1970; the media data of the containedobjects1964 and1970 is seen in theplayback display1978 as theleft text1972 and theright text1976, respectively. To program the present function, the user first clicks on theleft text1972 corresponding to theleft text object1964, then clicks on thefunction command icon1974, then clicks on theright text1976 corresponding to theright text object1970. As a result of this programming process, atween indicator1962 and tworelations1966 and1968 form between the twoobjects1964 and1970 (the tworelations1966 and1968 are similar to those seen inFIG. 28D; briefly, they specify that upon expiration of a timer, theleft object1964 stops and theright object1970 starts).
• FIG. 19F illustrates how the function programmed inFIG. 19E operates during presentation playback. Initially, inFIG. 19F-1, theleft text object1964 is playing and its media data is seen in theplayback display1978 as thetext1972.FIG. 19F-2 shows the situation some period of time later, after the programmed behavior (1962,1966,1968) has initiated a tweening process (which is now partially complete). The twotext objects1964 and1970 are in a state of tweening from one to the other, as indicated by the partially active state of theirplay indicators1982 and1984. Thetext1980 seen in theplayback display1978 is a product of this tweening process, and is at a mid-point in terms of position and size between the text ofFIG. 19F-1 (the starting point) and the final text that will be displayed when the tweening is finished. InFIG. 19F-3, the tweening process has finished; theleft text object1964 has now stopped, and theright text object1970 is playing and its media data is seen in theplayback display1978 as thetext1976.
• FIGS.20A-B illustrate programming and operation for the function “object A, when clicked, stops itself and starts object B,” according to one embodiment of the present invention. This function is an example of a “consolidated” function: its operation is the same as that of the two-function “compound sentence” seen in FIGS.21A-B. Depending on system configuration, other “consolidated” functions may be provided as discussed earlier.
• FIG. 20A illustrates programming for the function “object A, when clicked, stops itself and starts object B.” The figure shows acontainer object2000 containing atext object2002 and apicture object2008; the media data of the containedobjects2002 and2008 is seen in theplayback display2016 as thetext2012 and thepicture2014, respectively. To program the function, the user first clicks on thetext2012 corresponding to thetext object2002, then clicks on thefunction command icon2010, then clicks on thepicture2014 corresponding to thepicture object2008. As a result of this programming process, arelation2004 forms between thetext object2002 and itself, and anotherrelation2006 forms between thetext object2002 and thepicture object2008.
• FIG. 20B illustrates how the function programmed inFIG. 20A operates during presentation playback. Initially, inFIG. 20B-1, thetext object2002 is playing and its media data is seen in theplayback display2016 as thetext2012. When the user clicks2018 on thetext2012, then inFIG. 20B-2 thetext object2002 stops playing (and its media data is no longer seen in the playback display2016), and thepicture object2008 starts playing (and its media data is now seen in theplayback display2016 as the picture2014).
• FIGS.21A-B illustrate programming and operation for a two-function “compound sentence” consisting of a first function “object A, when clicked, stops itself” and a second function “object A, when clicked, starts object B,” according to one embodiment of the present invention. An overall explanation of compound sentence programming was provided earlier; for the compound sentence of the present example, a “stop action” (as seen inFIG. 12) and a “start action” (as seen in FIGS.9A-B) are joined together by the user during the programming process so that the “subject of the start action” does double duty as the “object of the stop action.”
• FIG. 21A illustrates programming for the compound sentence of the present example. The figure shows acontainer object2100 containing atext object2102 and apicture object2108; the media data of the containedobjects2102 and2108 is seen in theplayback display2116 as thetext2112 and thepicture2114, respectively. To program the function, the user first clicks on thetext2112 corresponding to thetext object2102, then clicks on the left function command icon2110 (the “stop action”), then clicks on the right function command icon2111 (the “start action”), then clicks on thepicture2114 corresponding to thepicture object2108. As a result of this programming process, arelation2104 forms between thetext object2102 and itself, and anotherrelation2106 forms between thetext object2102 and thepicture object2108.
• FIG. 21B illustrates how the compound sentence programmed inFIG. 21A operates during presentation playback. Initially, inFIG. 21B-1, thetext object2102 is playing and its media data is seen in theplayback display2116 as thetext2112. When the user clicks2118 on thetext2112, then inFIG. 21B-2 thetext object2102 stops playing (and its media data is no longer seen in the playback display2116), and thepicture object2108 starts playing (and its media data is now seen in theplayback display2116 as the picture2114).
• FIGS.22A-B illustrate programming and operation for a two-function “compound sentence” consisting of a first function “object A, when clicked, starts object B” and a second function which is a “new picture” function, according to one embodiment of the present invention. An overall explanation of compound sentence programming was provided earlier; for the compound sentence of the present example, a “start action” (as seen in FIGS.9A-B) and an “object creation action” (as seen inFIG. 2B: “new picture”) are joined together by the user during the programming process so that the “object of the start action” is created as a result of the programming process.
• FIG. 22A illustrates programming for the compound sentence of the present example. The figure shows acontainer object2200 which initially contains just atext object2202; the media data of thistext object2202 is seen in theplayback display2218 as thetext2212. To program the function, the user first clicks on thetext2212 corresponding to thetext object2202, then clicks on the left function command icon2208 (the “start action”), then clicks on the right function command icon2210 (the “object creation action”), then clicks on a desiredspot2216 in theplayback display2218 causing anew picture2214 to appear there (in this case an empty rectangle). As a result of this programming process, anew picture object2206 corresponding to thenew picture2214 is created in thecontainer object2200, and arelation2204 forms between thetext object2202 and thenew picture object2206.
• FIG. 22B illustrates how the compound sentence programmed inFIG. 22A operates during presentation playback. Initially, inFIG. 22B-1, thetext object2202 is playing and its media data is seen in theplayback display2218 as thetext2212. When the user clicks2220 on thetext2212, then inFIG. 22B-2 thepicture object2206 starts playing and its media data is now seen in theplayback display2218 as thepicture2214.
• FIGS.23A-B illustrate programming and operation for a three-function “compound sentence” consisting of a first function “object A, when clicked, stops itself,” a second function “object A, upon stopping, starts object B” and a third function which is a “duplicate” function, according to one embodiment of the present invention. An overall explanation of compound sentence programming was provided earlier; for the compound sentence of the present example, a “stop action” (as seen inFIG. 12), a “start action” (as seen inFIG. 13) and an “object creation action” (similar to the “duplicate” function ofFIG. 2D except that it takes place within a single playback display) are joined together by the user during the programming process so that the “subject of the start action” does double duty as the “object of the stop action” and the “object of the start action” is created as a result of the programming process.
• FIG. 23A illustrates programming for the compound sentence of the present example. The figure shows acontainer object2300 which initially contains just aleft text object2302; the media data of thistext object2302 is seen in theplayback display2322 as theleft text2316. To program the function, the user first clicks on theleft text2316 corresponding to theleft text object2302, then clicks on the left function command icon2310 (the “stop action”), then clicks on the middle function command icon2312 (the “start action”), then clicks on the right function command icon2314 (the “object creation action”), then clicks on a desired spot2320 in theplayback display2322 causing new text2318 (a copy of the left text2316) to appear there. As a result of this programming process, anew text object2308 corresponding to thenew text2318 is created in thecontainer object2300, afirst relation2304 forms between theleft text object2302 and itself, and anotherrelation2306 forms between theleft text object2302 and thenew text object2308.
• FIG. 23B illustrates how the compound sentence programmed inFIG. 23A operates during presentation playback. Initially, inFIG. 23B-1, theleft text object2302 is playing and its media data is seen in theplayback display2322 as theleft text2316. When the user clicks2324 on theleft text2316, then inFIG. 23B-2 theleft text object2302 stops playing (and its media data is no longer seen in the playback display2322), and thenew text object2308 starts playing (and its media data is now seen in theplayback display2322 as the new text2318).
• FIGS.24A-B illustrate programming and operation of the “command repeat” function, according to one embodiment of the present invention. The command repeat function is an efficient way to repeat whatever programming function was most recently executed; it reduces programming overhead for frequently used functions, providing more streamlined authoring and increased authoring speed. When the command repeat function is triggered by the user, the previously executed function is repeated, except for the final selection of either an object or a display background location (as per the specific previous function involved); once the user makes the final selection, the repeated function is complete. The functions which can be repeated by the command repeat function include any of the functions of the sentence paradigm (including compound sentences and consolidated functions). When a function is repeated via the command repeat function, the “object B” of the previous execution becomes the “object A” of the repeated execution; this is seen in the following example, in which the three-function compound sentence just shown in FIGS.23A-B is repeated via the command repeat function (note that this example involves the most complex programming function seen so far; of course other less complex functions can also be repeated in a similar fashion). In the following example, the command repeat function is triggered by selecting a command icon; depending on implementation, the command repeat function may also be triggered in other ways, such as by pressing a key on the keypad (for example the “ctrl” key), etc.
• FIG. 24A illustrates the programming previously seen inFIG. 23A, and subsequently, the use of the command repeat function to produce another instance of that programming. Recall from the above discussion ofFIG. 23A that the compound sentence shown in that example consists of a first function “object A, when clicked, stops itself,” a second function “object A, upon stopping, starts object B” and a third function “duplicate,” which are joined together by the user during the programming process so that the “subject of the start action” does double duty as the “object of the stop action” and the “object of the start action” is created as a result of the programming process. The present example begins with the same programming process.
• FIG. 24A shows acontainer object2400 which initially contains just aleft text object2402; the media data of thistext object2402 is seen in theplayback display2434 as theleft text2424. To program the function which will subsequently become the “previous” function for the command repeat function, the user first clicks on theleft text2424 corresponding to theleft text object2402, then clicks on the left function command icon2418 (the “stop action”), then clicks on the middle function command icon2420 (the “start action”), then clicks on the right function command icon2422 (the “object creation action”), then clicks on a desiredspot2428 in theplayback display2434 causing new text2426 (a copy of the left text2424) to appear there. As a result of this programming process, anew text object2404 corresponding to thenew text2426 is created in thecontainer object2400, afirst relation2408 forms between theleft text object2402 and itself, and asecond relation2410 forms between theleft text object2402 and thenew text object2404.
• Next, to repeat the above programming using the command repeat function, the user first clicks on thecommand repeat icon2416, then clicks on a desired spot2432 in theplayback display2434 causing a second piece of new text2430 (a copy of the earlier new text2426) to appear there. As a result of this use of the command repeat function, a secondnew text object2406 corresponding to the secondnew text2430 is created in thecontainer object2400, afirst relation2412 forms between the earliernew text object2404 and itself, and asecond relation2414 forms between the earliernew text object2404 and the secondnew text object2406.
• FIG. 24B illustrates how the two instances of the compound sentence which were programmed inFIG. 24A operate during presentation playback. Initially, inFIG. 24B-1, theleft text object2402 is playing and its media data is seen in theplayback display2434 as theleft text2424. When the user clicks2436 on theleft text2424, then inFIG. 24B-2 theleft text object2402 stops playing (and its media data is no longer seen in the playback display2434), and themiddle text object2404 that was the first object created inFIG. 24A starts playing (and its media data is now seen in theplayback display2434 as the middle text2426). At some point thereafter, when the user clicks2438 on themiddle text2426, then inFIG. 24B-3 themiddle text object2404 stops playing (and its media data is no longer seen in the playback display2434), and theright text object2406 that was the second object created inFIG. 24A starts playing (and its media data is now seen in theplayback display2434 as the right text2430).
• FIGS.25A-B illustrate programming and operation for the function “video object A, upon reaching cue point, starts object B,” according to one embodiment of the present invention. This function is similar to the function of FIGS.10A-B (“object A, upon timer expiration, starts object B”), except that the action of the function, instead of being triggered when a countdown timer expires, is triggered when video playback for the video object A reaches the same point it was at when the present function was programmed (the “cue point”).
• Also, depending on system configuration, two alternate versions of the function of FIGS.25A-B may be provided for either or both of sound objects and vector objects: “sound object A, upon reaching cue point, starts object B” and “vector object A, upon reaching cue point, starts object B” (vector objects are detailed in connection withFIG. 28A). Like the video version of the present example, each of these two alternate versions of the function is an independent feature of the invention that may or may not be included in any given system configuration. The only significant difference between the video version shown in the present example and the versions for sound objects and vector objects is that in the versions for sound objects and vector objects, the selection of “object A” is not accomplished by clicking on media data seen in the playback display (since sound objects and vector objects do not have media data that is seen in the playback display); rather, the selection of “object A” is accomplished by selecting a representation of the desired sound object or vector object, such as by clicking on an object icon in a control display, etc.
• Moreover, depending on system configuration, three more functions may be provided which are similar to the function of FIGS.25A-B and its sound object and vector object variations: (1) “video object A, upon reaching cue point, stops object B,” (2) “sound object A, upon reaching cue point, stops object B,” and (3) “vector object A, upon reaching cue point, stops object B.” Each of these functions is an independent feature of the invention that may or may not be included in any given system configuration. The programming for each of these functions is the same as the programming for its corresponding “starts object B” function; the operation of each of these functions differs from its corresponding “starts object B” function in that the action of the function is to stop rather than start “object B” when playback for “object A” reaches the specified cue point.
• FIG. 25A illustrates programming for the function “video object A, upon reaching cue point, starts object B.”FIG. 25A-1 shows acontainer object2500 containing avideo object2502 and apicture object2504; the media data of thevideo object2502 is seen playing in theplayback display2510 as thevideo2506, and the media data of thepicture object2504 is seen as thepicture2508.FIG. 25A-2 shows the same set of objects a moment later, and thevideo2506 playing in theplayback display2510 is now further along in its playback (as seen by the waving hand2507). At this moment, having decided that an appropriate “cue point” has been reached, the user pauses the video by clicking on the edit mode command icon2512 (similar toicon130 inFIG. 1B). Of course this is just one possible way for the user to select a “cue point,” and depending on system configuration, other approaches may be used, such as controlling video playback using tape-recorder-style “transport controls” (play, pause, etc.), setting the playback position by dragging a “position slider,” adjusting the position by pressing “nudge buttons,” etc. With the video now paused at the desired “cue point,” the user programs the present function as follows. InFIG. 25A-3, the user first clicks on thevideo2506 corresponding to thevideo object2502, then clicks on thefunction command icon2516, then clicks on thepicture2508 corresponding to thepicture object2504. As a result of this programming process, arelation2514 forms between the twoobjects2502 and2504.
• FIG. 25B illustrates how the function programmed inFIG. 25A operates during presentation playback. Initially, inFIG. 25B-1, thevideo object2502 is playing and its media data is seen playing in theplayback display2510 as thevideo2506. InFIG. 25B-2, at the moment when thevideo2506 reaches its previously selected “cue point” as shown by the wavinghand2507, thepicture object2504 starts playing and its media data is now seen in theplayback display2510 as thepicture2508.
• FIGS.26A-B illustrate programming and operation for the function “container object A, upon navigation into sub-display, starts contained object B,” according to one embodiment of the present invention. This function depends upon three additional features of the invention: (1) hierarchically nested container objects, detailed in connection with FIGS.32A-B; (2) user navigation through the hierarchical presentation data, detailed in connection with FIGS.38A-B; and (3) sub-display functionality, detailed in connection withFIGS. 40 through 45C. Briefly, the sub-display functionality of the present invention involves an association between container objects and nested sub-displays in the playback display, whereby media data of objects contained in a container object is displayed within the sub-display associated with the container object. This sub-display functionality may be used in conjunction with the navigation functionality of the invention so that users can “navigate” into and back from these sub-displays. Using the present function, a specific object can be programmed so that it starts playing when the user navigates into the sub-display associated with the object's containing container.
• FIG. 26A illustrates programming for the function “container object A, upon navigation into sub-display, starts contained object B.” The figure shows anupper container object2600 containing a nestedcontainer object2602 which in turn contains atext object2606 and apicture object2608. Theplayback display2618 is presenting the contents of the nestedcontainer object2602 to the user for editing, and the media data of its containedobjects2606 and2608 is seen in theplayback display2618 as thetext2614 and thepicture2616, respectively. To program the function, the user first clicks on thebackground2612 of theplayback display2618 corresponding to the nestedcontainer object2602, then clicks on thefunction command icon2610, then clicks on thetext2614 corresponding to thetext object2606. As a result of this programming process, arelation2604 forms between the nestedcontainer object2602 and thetext object2606.
• FIG. 26B illustrates how the function programmed inFIG. 26A operates during presentation playback. Initially, inFIG. 26B-1, theupper container object2600 is playing and within it the nestedcontainer object2602 is playing and is associated (as indicated by its double outline) with a sub-display2622 seen within theplayback display2618. Within the nestedcontainer object2602 in turn, thepicture object2608 is playing and its media data is seen in theplayback display2618 as thepicture2616 displayed within thesub-display2622. At some point the user double-clicks2624 on the sub-display2622, initiating navigation2620 (navigation using sub-displays is discussed in detail in connection withFIGS. 40 through 45C). As a result of the navigation, inFIG. 26B-2 theupper container object2600 stops playing and becomes dormant2626 pending “back navigation” (2628,2630), and the nestedcontainer object2602 begins playing without an associated sub-display (as indicated by its now single outline). At the same time, due to the operation of the present function, thetext object2606 starts playing and its media data is now seen in theplayback display2618 as thetext2614. Thepicture object2608 continues to play, and its media data is seen in theplayback display2618 as thepicture2616, now no longer in a sub-display due to the navigation.
• FIGS.26C-D illustrate programming and operation for the function “container object A, upon navigation back from sub-display, stops contained object B,” according to one embodiment of the present invention. This function depends upon the same three additional features of the invention as the function of FIGS.26A-B, above. Using the present function, a specific object can be programmed so that it stops playing when the user navigates back from the sub-display associated with the object's containing container.
• FIG. 26C illustrates programming for the function “container object A, upon navigation back from sub-display, starts contained object B.” The figure shows anupper container object2650 containing a nestedcontainer object2652 which in turn contains atext object2656 and apicture object2658. Theplayback display2668 is presenting the contents of the nestedcontainer object2652 to the user for editing; the media data of its containedobjects2656 and2658 is seen in theplayback display2668 as thetext2664 and thepicture2666, respectively. To program the function, the user first clicks on the background2662 of theplayback display2668 corresponding to the nestedcontainer object2652, then clicks on thefunction command icon2660, then clicks on thetext2664 corresponding to thetext object2656. As a result of this programming process, arelation2654 forms between the nestedcontainer object2652 and thetext object2656.
• FIG. 26D illustrates how the function programmed inFIG. 26C operates during presentation playback. Initially, inFIG. 26D-1, the situation is similar to the situation ofFIG. 26B-2: theupper container object2650 is dormant pending “back navigation,” the nestedcontainer object2652 is playing without an associated sub-display, and its containedobjects2656 and2658 are playing and their media data is seen in theplayback display2668 as thetext2664 and thepicture2666, respectively. At some point the user clicks the “back”button2672, initiating backnavigation2670. As a result of the back navigation, inFIG. 26D-2 theupper container object2650 starts playing and the nestedcontainer object2652 begins playing with an associated sub-display (as indicated by its double outline). At the same time, due to the operation of the present function, thetext object2656 stops playing and its media data is no longer seen in theplayback display2668. Thepicture object2658 continues to play, and its media data is seen in theplayback display2668 as thepicture2666, now shown within the sub-display2674 associated with the nestedcontainer object2652.
• FIGS.26E-F illustrate programming and operation for the function “object A, when clicked, initiates container transition,” according to one embodiment of the present invention. The container transition provided by this function has four different forms, any or all of which may be supported depending on system configuration. In the first form (shown in the present example), the container transition provides a progression through a sequence of containers, such as might be provided in a slideshow. The second form is similar to the first except that the directionality of the progression is reversed from “next container” to “previous container.” In the third form, the container transition provides sub-display navigation (the programming for this form differs slightly from the others in that the last step is the clicking of a sub-display rather than the clicking of a command icon); sub-display navigation is detailed in connection withFIGS. 43-45. In the fourth form, the container transition provides back navigation; back navigation is detailed in connection withFIGS. 38-39 and43-45.
• FIG. 26E illustrates programming for the function “object A, when clicked, initiates container transition.” The figure shows acontainer object2676 which contains aleft container object2680 and aright container object2682. Theleft container object2680 contains atext object2686, and theright container object2682 contains apicture object2688. The left andright containers2680 and2682 are configured in a sequence, as shown by thesequence indicator2678. Theleft container object2680 and its containedtext object2686 are playing, and the latter's media data is seen in theplayback display2696 as thetext2694. To program the function, the user first clicks on thetext2694 corresponding to thetext object2686, then clicks on thefunction command icon2690, then clicks on thesequence command icon2692. As a result of this programming process, arelation2684 forms between thetext object2686 and itscontainer2680.
• FIG. 26F illustrates how the function programmed inFIG. 26E operates during presentation playback. Initially, inFIG. 26F-1, theleft container2680 and itscontained object2686 are playing, and the latter's media data is seen in theplayback display2696 as thetext2694. When the user clicks2698 on thetext2694, then inFIG. 26F-2 theleft container2680 and its containedtext object2686 stop playing, and theright container2682 and its containedpicture object2688 start playing; the media data of thepicture object2688 is seen in theplayback display2696 as thepicture2699.
• FIGS.26G-H illustrate programming and operation for the function “object A, when clicked, changes attribute of object B,” according to one embodiment of the present invention. In this example, the attribute being changed (enabled in this case) is time-based playback behavior that results in a “bouncing” effect such as that seen inFIG. 7B, in which the vertical position of an object rises and falls over time. The use of this specific attribute is not an inherent part of the present function, but is merely intended to exemplify a change in the state of an object attribute during presentation playback; depending on system configuration, the changing of other object attributes (including disabling them and setting them to particular values) may be supported.
• FIG. 26G shows acontainer object2601 containing atext object2603 and apicture object2607; the media data of the containedobjects2603 and2607 is seen in theplayback display2617 as thetext2611 and thepicture2615, respectively. Thepicture object2607 has previously been programmed with time-basedplayback behavior2609. To program the present function, the user first clicks on thetext2611 corresponding to thetext object2603, then clicks on thefunction command icon2613, then clicks on thepicture2615 corresponding to thepicture object2607. As a result of this programming process, arelation2605 forms between the twoobjects2603 and2607.
• FIG. 26H illustrates how the function programmed inFIG. 26G operates during presentation playback. Initially, inFIG. 26H-1, thetext object2603 and thepicture object2607 are playing and their media data is seen in theplayback display2617 as thetext2611 and thepicture2615. Thepicture object2607 is not currently exhibiting the previously programmed time-based playback behavior, as shown by the dotted line representing thebehavior2609. When the user clicks2619 on thetext2611, then inFIG. 26H-2 the time-based playback behavior has become enabled, as indicated by the solid line representing thebehavior2609 and by the now higher vertical position of thepicture2615 in theplayback display2617.
• FIGS.27A-B illustrate programming and operation for the function “vector object A controls the position of object B,” according to one embodiment of the present invention. This function depends upon support for vector objects, which are described at length in connection withFIG. 28A. In FIGS.27A-B, the exemplary vector object shown does not have media data that can be seen (and selected) in the playback display, and therefore a control display is provided for the part of the programming process where the vector object is selected; control displays are not required however, and depending on implementation, other approaches may be effective for selecting vector objects.
• FIG. 27A illustrates programming for the function “vector object A controls the position of object B.” The figure shows acontainer object2700 containing avector object2702 and apicture object2706; the media data of thepicture object2706 is seen in theplayback display2714 as thepicture2710. Below the playback display is acontrol display2718 presenting thecontainer object2700 and its contents (control displays are discussed at length in connection withFIGS. 29A through 30B). To program the function, the user first clicks on the vector object icon2716 (which represents the vector object2702), then clicks on thefunction command icon2708, then clicks2712 on thepicture2710 corresponding to thepicture object2706. As a result of this programming process, arelation2704 forms between the twoobjects2702 and2706.
• FIG. 27B illustrates how the function programmed inFIG. 27A operates during presentation playback. Thevector object2702 and thepicture object2706 are playing, and the media data of thepicture object2706 is seen in theplayback display2714 as thepicture2710. Due to the operation of the vector object, which produces (in this case) two channels of time-varying output which have been mapped via the present function to control the x-position and y-position of thepicture object2706, thepicture2710 displayed in theplayback display2714 moves in acircular motion2720; this motion either stops after once around the circle, or, if the vector object has been set to “loop,” the motion continues until either or both objects are stopped.
• FIGS.27C-D illustrate programming and operation for the function “vector object A controls the scale of vector object B,” according to one embodiment of the present invention. Like the previous example of FIGS.27A-B, this function depends upon support for vector objects, and the related considerations in this case are the same as in that previous example.
• FIG. 27C illustrates programming for the function “vector object A controls the scale of vector object B.” The figure shows acontainer object2750 containing aleft vector object2752, aright vector object2754 and apicture object2756; the media data of thepicture object2756 is seen in theplayback display2766 as thepicture2764. Below the playback display is acontrol display2772 presenting thecontainer object2750 and its contents. To help illustrate the present function, a previously programmed relation is already in place: theright vector object2754 and thepicture object2756 have been programmed with the function of FIGS.27A-B (“vector object A controls the position of object B”), as shown by therelation2760. This previous programming is not part of the present function, but is merely provided as a reference for the operation of the objects involved; in this example, without the present function, presentation playback of the right vector object and picture object would produce the same results seen inFIG. 27B. To program the present function, the user first clicks2770 on the left vector object icon (which represents the left vector object2752), then clicks on thefunction command icon2762, then clicks2768 on the right vector object icon corresponding to theright vector object2754. As a result of this programming process, arelation2758 forms between the twovector objects2752 and2754.
• FIG. 27D illustrates how the function programmed inFIG. 27C operates during presentation playback. All of the objects are playing, and the media data of thepicture object2756 is seen in theplayback display2766 as thepicture2764. Due to the operation of the right vector object, which produces (as inFIG. 27B) two channels of time-varying output which have been mapped via theprevious programming2760 to the x-position and y-position of thepicture object2756, thepicture2764 displayed in theplayback display2766 moves in a circular motion. However, unlike inFIG. 27B, theleft vector object2752 produces one channel of time-varying output which has been mapped via the present function to control the “scale” of theright vector object2754; this scale setting determines the overall scale of the vector object output. In the present example, theleft vector object2752 contains a looping sine wave function that produces a repeated raising and lowering of the vector object output; when mapped to the scale of theright vector object2754, this sine wave function affects the degree of “displacement” that thepicture2764 exhibits as compared to its original position shown inFIG. 27C. The result is that the overall motion produced by theright vector object2754 is circular as before, but due to the operation of theleft vector object2752, thepicture2764 follows a “winding”path2774 around the overall circle.
• DYNAMIC PARAMETER MODIFICATION—FIGS.28A-D illustrate dynamic modification of object parameters using “vector objects” and “tweening.” Vector objects, shown inFIG. 28A, are a special object type that generates one or more time-variant data sources, such as dynamic gestures, which can be routed to one or more target objects to cause their display settings (or other parameters) to vary over time. Tweening, shown in FIGS.28B-D, is programmed object behavior in which one or more objects is stopping, and one or more corresponding objects is starting, and the display settings for the one or more stopping objects gradually transition to the display settings for the one or more starting objects, resulting in a dynamic and smooth transition. Vector objects and tweening are each independent features of the invention that may or may not be included in any given system configuration.
• The functionality illustrated in FIGS.28A-D generally provides the advantage of enabling authors to create more lively and entertaining multimedia content with less effort. Vector objects, being independent objects whose dynamic control data can be triggered at will, routed to different target objects (including other vector objects), combined, processed, etc., provide more flexible and powerful dynamic control than is typically available without the complexities of scripting. Tweening, which is provided as time-based processing independent of whether or not the tweening objects are arranged within a timeline, provides the advantage of greater ease and flexibility for creating smooth and fluid transitions within presentations. Moreover, both vector objects and tweening, when used in conjunction with other features of the invention, such as editing display settings, time-based playback behavior, functions of the sentence paradigm, sub-displays, etc., result in still further advantages in terms of allowing authors to create more dynamic and sophisticated multimedia content with less effort.
• Before describing the vector object example shown inFIG. 28A, some general points about vector objects in the present invention should be noted, all of which depend on system configuration. First, the number of “channels” of dynamic control data provided in vector objects may vary. Second, the methods used for creating dynamic control data in vector objects may vary, and can include “gesture recording” by the user, drawing of function curves on a graph, various algorithms, etc. Third, the methods used for establishing the routing of dynamic control data from vector objects to target objects may vary, and can include programming functions of the sentence paradigm such as those discussed in connection with FIGS.27A-D, as well as various other programming methods. Fourth, the various target object types and target parameters which are controllable by vector objects may vary; target object types can include text, pictures, videos, containers with sub-display enabled and vector objects, and target parameters can include any of the display settings ofFIGS. 4A-6B (position, size, color, transparency, rotation, stretch, cropping, shape and softness) as well as the vector object parameters noted below. Fifth, provisions may be made within vector objects and/or within target objects and/or via independent intermediate objects for processing and/or managing dynamic control data, such as scaling it, offsetting it, inverting it, changing its speed, making it loop, etc. Finally, various vector object parameters such as speed, scale, playback position, etc., may themselves be made the target of dynamic data from another or the same vector object, producing complex dynamic results.
• FIG. 28A illustrates the operation of an exemplary vector object, according to one embodiment of the present invention.FIG. 28A-1 shows acontainer object2800 containing apicture object2802, avector object2804 and atext object2806. The media data of thepicture object2802 is seen in theplayback display2816 as thepicture2812, and the media data of thetext object2806 is seen as thetext2814. Two dynamic data outputs from thevector object2804 have previously been programmed as shown by theleft relation2808 routed to thepicture object2802 to control its vertical position, and theright relation2810 routed to thetext object2806 to control its vertical stretch. In this example, bothdynamic data outputs2808 and2810 share a common “channel” of dynamic control data from thevector object2804, shown to the left in thevector output graph2818 as a function of time (in this case an upward sloping linear function2820).Time indicator2822, called “now,” corresponds to the current moment in time as seen in theplayback display2816. As time passes, the dynamic data output from thevector object2804 increases in value, causing the displayed media data of thepicture object2802 and thetext object2806 to change continuously.
• The results of this change can be seen inFIG. 28A-2. Thetime indicator2822 now indicates that the dynamic data output of thevector object2804 has reached itsmaximum value2826. In theplayback display2816, thepicture2812 corresponding to thepicture object2802 is now at a higher vertical position than it was initially2824, and thetext2814 corresponding to thetext object2806 is now stretched in the vertical dimension. Other examples of the operation of vector objects may be found in FIGS.27A-D and the accompanying text.
• Before describing the examples of tweening shown in FIGS.28B-D, some general points about the tweening functionality of the present invention should be noted. First, any programmed object behavior that results in simultaneous stopping of one or more objects and starting of one or more other objects can provide an appropriate context for tweening. Second, while such programmed behavior is a requirement, there is no requirement as to the manner in which the behavior is programmed or implemented. Third, depending on system configuration, a variety of methods may be used for enabling tweening between particular objects, such as automatically enabling it when certain programming procedures are used, making it a per object option under user control, etc. Fourth, depending on system configuration, the various object display settings affected by tweening can include any or all of the display settings ofFIGS. 4A through 6B (position, size, color, transparency, rotation, stretch, cropping, shape and softness). Fifth, depending on system configuration, the time duration for a tweening process may be determined in various ways, such as by default values, randomized default values, user-specified values, various algorithms, etc. Sixth, depending on system configuration, multiple tweening processes may be chained together to produce a sequence of tweening processes, and such a sequence may be configured to include pauses and branches. Finally, depending on system configuration, tweening for two objects with visually different media data may be supported by various kinds of media transitions, such as gradually “fading out” the displayed content of the stopping object and “fading in” the displayed content of the starting object during the tweening process, “morphing” between two different images by stretching their bitmap data, etc.
• In addition, it should be noted that in FIGS.28B-D, the stopping and starting of objects is exemplified using either various relations (FIGS. 28B and 28D) or a sequence command (FIG. 28C). However the use of any particular functionality to exemplify the stopping of one object and the starting of another is for illustration purposes only, and is not inherent to the tweening process being shown. Depending on system configuration, various implementations may be used for the stopping and starting of the objects. Such implementations can include stopping and starting based on the relative placement of the objects within a timeline, stopping and starting based on the expiration of a timer associated with one of the objects, stopping and starting based on the user clicking in the playback display, stopping and starting based on user settings or default settings, etc. Finally, it should be noted that in cases where multiple objects are contained within containers which are transitioning via a tweening process (as seen inFIG. 28D), the correlation of objects between the two containers to determine which objects in the stopping container transition to which objects in the starting container can be accomplished using various implementations (depending on system configuration), such as automatic detection of similar media data, indication by the user, etc.
• FIG. 28B illustrates the operation of a tweening process, according to one embodiment of the present invention. The figure shows a tweening process occurring for two objects, in which one object transitions to another; the stopping of one object and the starting of another is exemplified using two relations which are similar to those inFIG. 20 (“object A, when clicked, stops itself and starts object B”).
• FIG. 28B-1 shows acontainer object2850 containing aleft text object2852 and aright text object2856 which have previously been programmed with tweening behavior as shown by thetweening indicator2854 and the tworelations2858 and2860. Initially, theleft text object2852 is playing and its media data is seen in theplayback display2866 as thetext2864. When the user clicks2862 on thetext2864, the previously programmed behavior causes a tweening process to begin in which theleft text object2852 transitions to theright text object2856. InFIG. 28B-2, the partially complete tweening process is shown. The twotext objects2852 and2856 are in a state of tweening from one to the other, as indicated by the partially active state of theirplay indicators2868 and2870. Thetext2872 seen in theplayback display2866 is a product of this tweening process, and is at a mid-point in terms of position and size between the text ofFIG. 28B-1 (the starting point) and the final text that will be displayed when the tweening is finished. InFIG. 28B-3, the tweening process has finished; theleft text object2852 has now stopped, and theright text object2856 is playing and its media data is seen in theplayback display2866 as the text2874.
• FIG. 28C illustrates the operation of a container tweening process, according to one embodiment of the present invention. The figure shows a tweening process occurring for containers configured in a sequence (such as might be used to provide a slideshow), in which an object in one container transitions to an object in another container; the stopping of one container and the starting of another is exemplified using a sequence command such as that seen inFIG. 19D.
• FIG. 28C-1 shows acontainer object2880 which contains aleft container object2884 and aright container object2886. Theleft container object2884 contains aleft picture object2888, and theright container object2886 contains aright picture object2892. The left andright containers2884 and2886 have previously been programmed with tweening behavior as shown by thetweening indicator2882 and thesequence indicator2890. Initially, theleft container object2884 and its containedpicture object2888 are playing, and the latter's media data is seen in theplayback display2898 as thepicture2894. When the user initiates a sequence command by clicking on thesequence command icon2896, the previously programmed behavior causes a tweening process to begin in which theleft container2884 containing theleft picture object2888 transitions to theright container2886 containing theright picture object2892.
• InFIG. 28C-2, the partially complete tweening process is shown; the twocontainers2884 and2886 and their respective containedpicture objects2888 and2892 are in a state of tweening from one to another. Thepicture2801 seen in theplayback display2898 is a product of this tweening process, and is at a mid-point in terms of position, size and shading between the picture ofFIG. 28C-1 (the starting point) and the final picture that will be displayed when the tweening is finished. InFIG. 28C-3, the tweening process has finished; theleft container2884 and its containedpicture object2888 have now stopped, and theright container2886 and its containedpicture object2892 are playing, with the latter's media data seen in theplayback display2898 as thepicture2803.
• FIG. 28D illustrates the operation of a sub-display tweening process, according to one embodiment of the present invention. The figure shows a tweening process occurring for containers configured as sub-displays, in which two objects in one container transition to two corresponding objects in another container; the stopping of one container and the starting of another is exemplified using two relations which are generally similar to those seen inFIG. 20, but are in fact those of its timer-based sibling function (“object A, upon timer expiration, stops itself and starts object B”). The sub-display functionality in the present example is used to accomplish “grouping” of objects such as that seen in many popular graphics programs (further discussion of sub-display functionality is provided in connection withFIGS. 40 through 45C). The present example also shows rotation functionality such as that seen inFIG. 5B, in which media data is rotated around a movable rotation anchor as part of the tweening process (providing the advantage of simulated limb movement). It should be noted that both the movement of the sub-display across the screen and the inclusion of rotation are exemplary only; neither is inherently necessary for the tweening process. In addition, depending on system configuration, the sub-display tweening functionality of the present example can be provided across multiple nesting levels whereby the contained objects which are transitioning to one another can themselves be containers containing contained objects transitioning to one another, etc., to produce more complex animations (for example, limbs with multiple joints); further discussion of the nested sub-display functionality of the invention is provided in connection withFIG. 41.
• FIG. 28D-1 shows acontainer object2811 which contains aleft container object2815 configured as a sub-display, and aright container object2817 also configured as a sub-display. Theleft container object2815 contains twopicture objects2823 and2825, and theright container object2817 contains twopicture objects2827 and2829. The left andright containers2815 and2817 have previously been programmed with tweening behavior as shown by thetweening indicator2813 and the tworelations2819 and2821. Initially, theleft container object2815 and its containedpicture objects2823 and2825 are playing, and the media data of the contained objects is seen in theplayback display2837 as the twopictures2831 and2833, respectively, which appear embedded within a sub-display2851 corresponding to theleft container2815. Therotation anchor2835 for thesmaller picture2833 has been positioned near the “elbow” position.
• FIG. 28D-2 shows the situation some period of time later, after the previously programmed behavior has initiated a tweening process (which is now partially complete). The twocontainers2815 and2817 and their respective contained picture objects (2823/2825, and2827/2829) are in a state of tweening from one to another. The sub-display2853 seen in theplayback display2837 is a product of this tweening process, and is at a mid-point in terms of position between the starting sub-display ofFIG. 28D-1 and the final sub-display that will be shown when the tweening is finished. The twopictures2839 and2841 seen in theplayback display2837 are also a product of this tweening process; in particular, thesmaller picture2841 has rotated around therotation anchor2843 and is at a mid-point between its starting rotation inFIG. 28D-1 and its final rotation that will be shown when the tweening is finished. InFIG. 28D-3, the tweening process has finished; theleft container2815 and its containedobjects2823 and2825 have now stopped, and theright container2817 and its containedobjects2827 and2829 are playing. The media data of the now-playingcontained objects2827 and2829 is seen in theplayback display2837 as the twopictures2845 and2849, respectively, which appear embedded within the sub-display2855 corresponding to theright container2817.
• THE CONTROL DISPLAY—FIGS. 29A through 30B illustrate characteristics and uses of control displays in the present invention. InFIG. 29A, a control display provides user control over the starting and stopping of individual objects, and also provides visual indication of the status of object playback. InFIG. 29B, a control display presents an icon for a special “container control object” associated with a corresponding container object. InFIG. 30A, a control display provides visual representation for relations and actions among objects using a “map view.” InFIG. 30B, a control display provides visual representation for relations and actions among objects using a “list view.” Each of these functions and capabilities of the control display is an independent feature of the invention that may or may not be included in any given system configuration. Moreover, control displays overall are optional in the present invention and may be omitted altogether.
• Throughout the present specification, control displays are depicted using either of two visual forms: (1) a map view in which object icons are arranged on a background, and (2) a list view in which object names are arranged in one or more lists. Unless specifically noted otherwise, either form of control display (map or list view), as well as various other visual arrangements for presenting the required elements, may be used effectively.
• The functionality illustrated inFIGS. 29A through 30B generally provides the advantage of more control and clarity in the management and development of multimedia content, with additional advantages as follows. The playback control presented inFIG. 29A provides the advantage of greater efficiency for controlling which objects are playing. The indication of object playback status inFIG. 29A provides the advantage of clearer and more immediate indication of object playback status. The container control object presented inFIG. 29B provides more integrated and intuitive control over container object playback. The visual representations of relations and actions among objects inFIGS. 30A and 30B provide a clearer and more understandable way to represent complex object behavior (such as might be programmed using functions of the sentence paradigm). Moreover, when control displays are used to access external data (such as data in an HFS) and make it persistent within the context of presentation authoring, further advantages are derived in terms of streamlining the content creation process and improving authoring efficiency.
• Before describing the control display functionality shown inFIG. 29A, the following points relating to the functionality seen in that figure should be noted. First, inFIG. 29A and throughout this specification, the starting and stopping of objects using a control display is accomplished by clicking on the name portion of the object icon, which toggles playback for the object on or off; other approaches may also be effective depending on implementation, such as clicking on the body of the icon, or on associated buttons, etc. Second, inFIG. 29A and throughout this specification, indication of object playback status is represented as an illuminated “halo” around the object icon; other approaches may also be effective depending on system implementation, such as making the object name bold, highlighting the name or icon in other ways, etc. Finally, in an optional enhancement to the above playback indication feature, the intensity of the “halo” or other playback indicator may be modulated to correspond with different levels of object playback, for example by fading the intensity of the halo up or down during entrances and exits (such as those shown inFIGS. 7D and 7E), etc.
• FIG. 29A illustrates a control display providing user control over the starting and stopping of individual objects, and also providing visual indication of the status of object playback, according to one embodiment of the present invention.FIG. 29A-1 shows acontainer object2900 containing atext object2902 and apicture object2904. The dottedoutline2901 around the object representation to the left is used in this and other diagrams to indicate which objects are being presented in the control display. In thecontrol display2914, thetext icon2908 represents thetext object2902 and thepicture icon2910 represents thepicture object2904. The user has previously clicked2912 on thetext icon2908 to start thetext object2902, and theplayback indicator2906 around thetext icon2908 indicates that thetext object2902 is playing; the media data of thetext object2902 is seen in theplayback display2918 as thetext2916. InFIG. 29A-2, the user has clicked2922 on thepicture icon2910 which represents thepicture object2904, causing that object to start playing as well, as seen by theplayback indicator2920; the media data of thepicture object2904 is now seen in theplayback display2918 as thepicture2924. Finally, inFIG. 29A-3, the user has clicked2926 on thetext icon2908 which represents thetext object2902, causing that object to stop playing, and its media data is no longer seen in theplayback display2918.
• FIG. 29B illustrates a control display which is presenting an icon representing a container control object associated with a corresponding container object, according to one embodiment of the present invention. In the present invention, container control objects (CCOs) are an optional object type that can be used to provide various useful capabilities associated with container objects; in system configurations which support CCOs, each container object contains a single CCO with which it is associated. The specific CCO capability shown inFIG. 29B is the ability for the user to start and stop the container object associated with a CCO by clicking on the icon for the CCO. The figure shows acontainer object2950 containing atext object2952, acontainer control object2954, and apicture object2956. In thecontrol display2966, the user has clicked2962 on the CCO icon2960 (which represents the container control object2954) causing its associatedcontainer object2950 to start playing. Due to the start propagation ofFIG. 8A, the objects contained in thecontainer object2950 have also started playing, and the media data of thetext object2952 and thepicture object2956 are seen in theplayback display2972 as thetext2968 and thepicture2970, respectively.
• Before describing the control display functionality shown in FIGS.30A-B, the following points relating to the functionality seen in that figure should be noted. First, the control displays in FIGS.30A-B provide visual representation for relations and actions between objects, and these relations and actions exist and occur as a result of programmed object behavior, such as behavior programmed using the sentence paradigm ofFIGS. 9A through 27D. While this display functionality of FIGS.30A-B is highly effective when used in conjunction with the sentence paradigm, neither that nor any other specific programming method is critical to the functionality of the control display being shown. Second, visual representation of relations between objects (seen inFIGS. 30A-1 and30B-1) may be provided as its own feature without any visual representation of actions between objects (seen inFIGS. 30A-2 and30B-2). Finally, the specific visual form of the representation of relations and actions depicted in these figures is just one approach for representing the relevant information, and various other visual forms may also be effective depending on implementation.
• FIG. 30A illustrates a control display that provides visual representation for relations and actions among objects using a map view, according to one embodiment of the present invention.FIG. 30A-1 shows acontainer object3000 containing atext object3002 and apicture object3004. The two containedobjects3002 and3004 have previously been programmed with object behavior, shown by therelation3006, such as that of FIGS.9A-B (“object A, when clicked, starts object B”). Initially, thetext object3002 is playing and its media data is seen in theplayback display3022 as thetext3018. In thecontrol display3016, two object icons are shown: thetext icon3008 represents thetext object3002, and thepicture icon3010 represents thepicture object3004. To indicate the programmed behavior, thetext icon3008 and thepicture icon3010 are connected by a “string”3012 that represents therelation3006. An optional “bead”3014 located along thestring3012 indicates the nature of the programmed behavior by providing visual indication on the “surface” of the bead (such as color coding and/or a graphical image). In cases where an object has a relation to itself, the bead may be placed on or near the object icon (and there is no string, since there is only one icon); also, depending on implementation, more than one of these beads may be located along a single string in order to depict multiple relations between two objects.
• When the user clicks3020 on thetext3018 corresponding to thetext object3002, the previously programmed behavior shown by therelation3006 causes thepicture object3004 to start playing, as shown inFIG. 30A-2, and its media data is now seen in theplayback display3022 as thepicture3024. At the same time in thecontrol display3016, to indicate the execution of the programmed behavior, thestring3012 representing therelation3006 begins oscillating back and forth as if it had been plucked, and thebead3014 “lights up;” after a period of time, both the string and the bead return to their previous condition.
• FIG. 30B illustrates a control display that provides visual representation for relations and actions among objects using a list view, according to one embodiment of the present invention.FIG. 30B-1 shows acontainer object3050 containing atext object3052 and apicture object3054. The two containedobjects3052 and3054 have previously been programmed with object behavior, shown by therelation3056, such as that of FIGS.9A-B (“object A, when clicked, starts object B”). Initially, thetext object3052 is playing and its media data is seen in theplayback display3072 as thetext3068. In thecontrol display3066, two object icons are arranged vertically in a list view: thetext icon3062 represents thetext object3052, and thepicture icon3064 represents thepicture object3054. A “bead”3060 located next to thetext icon3062 indicates that thetext object3052 is the “acting object” in some type of programmed object behavior; the nature of that behavior is indicated visually on the “surface” of the bead (such as color coding and/or a graphical image). In cases where a relation is non-directional (as explained in the discussion of the sentence paradigm), beads are placed next to the icons for both objects involved (not just next to the icon for the acting object as in the present example); also, depending on implementation, more than one of these beads may be located next to a single icon in order to depict multiple relations associated with that object.
• When the user clicks3070 on thetext3068 corresponding to thetext object3052, the previously programmed behavior shown by therelation3056 causes thepicture object3054 to start playing, as shown inFIG. 30B-2, and its media data is now seen in theplayback display3072 as thepicture3076. At the same time in thecontrol display3066, to indicate the execution of the behavior, thebead3060 “lights up” and thename3074 of theicon3064 representing the object being acted upon (in this case the picture object3054) becomes highlighted; after a period of time, both the bead and the name return to their previous condition.
• PUBLISHING AND EDITING OVER A NETWORK—FIGS.31A-B illustrate publishing and editing of presentation data over a network.FIG. 31A shows two features: built-in publishing of presentation data over a network, and presentation playback over a network.FIG. 31B also shows two features: editing of presentation data over a network, and collaborative editing of presentation data over a network. Each of the features shown in these two figures is an independent feature of the invention that may or may not be included in any given system configuration. In addition, the present invention may be configured to provide capabilities for exporting a presentation as an executable or other playable file, which may then be sent as an email enclosure or transferred in some other fashion (such as via an instant messaging system, etc.).
• The networking functionality illustrated in FIGS.31A-B generally provides the advantage of enabling users to distribute and share multimedia content with minimal effort. In addition, the collaborative editing feature ofFIG. 31B provides the advantage of allowing users to interact with immediacy and flexibility. Moreover, when the networking features of FIGS.31A-B are used with the invention's sophisticated authoring features, such as creating objects, editing display settings, time-based playback behavior, start propagation, functions of the sentence paradigm, dynamic parameter modification, control displays, etc., the result is a powerful blend of authoring power and connectivity not found among existing systems. In addition, the above networking functionality may be used in conjunction with various other features of the invention, such as exploration, pointer objects, integration with HFS data, navigation, sub-displays, etc., yielding additional advantages in terms of the clarity and understandability with which distributed multimedia content may be interconnected and accessed.
• It should be noted that the networking features presented in FIGS.31A-B represent a high level view of the networking functionality of the present invention; various other features presented elsewhere in this specification can be used to realize particular purposes and/or structures within the overall framework of network-based operations shown here in FIGS.31A-B. Several features discussed throughout this specification may be used to such effect, and in some cases these are signified by the inclusion of a network “cloud” in one or more diagrams for the feature in question.
• Before describing the network-based operations of FIGS.31A-B, a brief overview of networking in general may be helpful. There are two different types of networking in common use today. The first is traditional client-server networking, in which a network server hosts data for one or more users (as shown in FIGS.31A-B). The second type of networking is peer-to-peer networking, in which data is hosted directly from a user's computer without the use of a central network server as intermediary (as shown inFIG. 49). The present invention may be configured to support either, both, or a hybrid of these two types of networking (and may also be configured as a server-based system, or as a standalone system without networking). A more detailed discussion of the various network-related configurations of the present invention is provided in connection withFIG. 49.
• FIG. 31A shows two features, built-in publishing over a network and presentation playback over a network, according to one embodiment of the present invention. In this example, an author has created a presentation on theauthor computer3118 consisting of acontainer object3120 containing atext object3122 and apicture object3124; the media data for the containedobjects3122 and3124 is seen in theplayback display3116 as thetext3104 and thepicture3105.
• In an example of built-in publishing over a network, the author clicks the publishcommand icon3100 which causes the publishdialog3102 to appear (thiscommand icon3100 and publishdialog3102 are not critical to the functionality being discussed here, and other approaches for providing similar functionality may be used). The publishdialog3102 presents various options including: thetop option3106 to export the presentation as an executable file, thebottom option3110 to publish in a peer-to-peer fashion, and the middle option3108 (which the author selects) to publish via a server. The author then executes themiddle option3108 by clicking theOK button3112, causing the presentation data to be uploaded to theserver3132 over thenetwork3130; this results in a copy of the presentation being stored on the server, consisting of thecontainer object3134 containing thetext object3136 and thepicture object3138.
• In an example of presentation playback over a network, the uploaded presentation (3134,3136,3138) is then viewed on twoclient computers3148 and3158. The client computers may download the whole presentation over thenetwork3140, or may download portions of the presentation as needed. The playback displays3146 and3156 on the client computers show client views of the presentation, with the text3142 and3152 corresponding to thetext object3136, and thepictures3144 and3154 corresponding to thepicture object3138.
• FIG. 31B shows two features, editing of presentation data over a network and collaborative editing of presentation data over a network, according to one embodiment of the present invention. In this example, adata server3190 is storing a presentation consisting of acontainer object3192 containing atext object3194 and apicture object3196. The presentation on thedata server3190 is being accessed over anetwork3180 by twoauthor computers3160 and3170. Each of the two author computers is playing the presentation over the network as the client computers did in the example ofFIG. 31A. Initially, the media data for thetext object3194 and thepicture object3196 are seen in theplayback displays3168 and3178 of the client computers as the text (3162,3172) and the picture (3164,3174), respectively.
• In an example of presentation editing over a network, the author using theleft computer3160 drags and re-sizes the text in theplayback display3168 from its small size and upper-leftposition3162 to a larger size and morecentered position3166. This editing operation is conveyed over thenetwork3180 to thedata server3190, updating the display settings for thetext object3194. Extending this example so that the editing becomes collaborative, this change to thetext object3194 is read on theright author computer3170, resulting in a change to the text in theright playback display3178 from its old size andposition3172 to the new size andposition3176; depending on network performance, this change can happen smoothly while the left author is editing so as to appear to the right author as though it were being done locally.
• In another example of collaborative presentation editing over a network, the right author changes the cropping of thepicture3174 from itsoriginal cropping3175 to anew cropping3173. This editing operation is conveyed over thenetwork3180 to thedata server3190, updating the display settings for thepicture object3196. This change to thepicture object3196 is read on theleft author computer3160, resulting in a change to thepicture3164 in theleft playback display3168 from itsold cropping3165 to the new cropping3163; once again depending on network performance, this change can happen smoothly while the right author is editing so as to appear to the left author as though it were being done locally.
• HIERARCHICAL STRUCTURING OF PRESENTATION DATA—FIGS.32A-B illustrate hierarchically nested container objects forming a hierarchical object space.FIG. 32A shows a container object nested within an enclosing container object. InFIG. 32B, the nested container object is shown playing, and the media data of its contained objects is displayed in the same playback display as the media data of objects contained by its enclosing container. Each of these capabilities, the hierarchical nesting of container objects inFIG. 32A, and the playback operation shown inFIG. 32B, is a separate feature of the invention that may or may not be included in any given system configuration (the latter, of course, depending on the former). Moreover, when hierarchical nesting of container objects is used in conjunction with other features of the invention (such as navigation, sub-displays, etc.), the playback operation may be different than that shown inFIG. 32B.
• The functionality illustrated in FIGS.32A-B generally provides the advantage of more modular and intuitive organization of multimedia content; in addition, when used with multimedia content distributed over a network, it helps authors visualize and digest the organizational scheme more easily. Moreover, the full power of hierarchical container nesting in the present invention becomes manifest when used in conjunction with other features of the invention, such as exploration, pointer objects, integration of HFS data, navigation, sub-displays, etc.; the advantages produced in each case are discussed in connection with the feature in question.
• Before describing FIGS.32A-B, it should be noted that the presence and use of control displays in these figures is illustrative only; control displays are not in fact required for the features being presented in these diagrams.
• FIG. 32A illustrates a container object nested within an enclosing container object, constituting a hierarchical object space, according to one embodiment of the present invention. The figure shows acontainer object3200 containing atext object3202 and a nestedcontainer object3204 which in turn contains twopicture objects3206 and3208. In thecontrol display3216, thetext icon3210 represents thetext object3202 and thecontainer icon3212 represents the nestedcontainer object3204. Thetext object3202 is playing and its media data is seen in theplayback display3220 as the text3218. In thecontrol display3216, the user clicks3214 on thecontainer icon3212 to start thecontainer object3204.
• FIG. 32B illustrates the playback operation of a hierarchically nested container object, according to one embodiment of the present invention. The figure shows the objects ofFIG. 32A after the user has started the nested container object. The nestedcontainer object3204 has started playing, and due to the start propagation ofFIG. 8A, its containedobjects3206 and3208 have also started playing. The media data of the twoobjects3206 and3208 is now seen in theplayback display3220 as thepictures3222 and3224, respectively, playing alongside the text3218 corresponding to thetext object3202.
• USER EXPLORATION OF PRESENTATION DATA—FIGS.33A-B illustrate user “exploration” of the hierarchical object space using a control display. This capability involves changing which container is presented in a control display by “exploring” up or down through the hierarchical object space. In an optional enhancement shown in FIGS.45A-C, the change up or down may be emphasized by a visual “zooming” effect. User exploration of presentation data depends on hierarchical nesting of container objects, and is a separate feature of the invention that may or may not be included in any given system configuration.
• The functionality illustrated in FIGS.33A-B generally provides the advantage of enabling more efficient authoring by providing clear and efficient access to hierarchically structured presentation data. Moreover, when used with a control display that presents the contents of an HFS, the exploration feature provides the further advantage of more flexible and efficient access to external data. In addition, when user exploration is combined with other features of the invention, such as other control display features, object creation, pointer objects, integration of HFS data, navigation, sub-displays, etc., further advantages in terms of authoring efficiency and clarity of structure are achieved.
• FIGS.33A-B illustrate user exploration of hierarchically structured presentation data using a control display, according to one embodiment of the present invention.FIG. 33A shows acontainer object3300 containing atext object3302 and a nestedcontainer object3304 which in turn contains twopicture objects3308 and3310. All of the objects are playing (which is not critical to this example), and the media data of themedia objects3302,3308 and3310 is seen in theplayback display3326 as thetext3320, theleft picture3322 and theright picture3324, respectively. Thecontrol display3318 is presenting theupper container object3300 and its contents, as indicated by the dottedoutline3306 around those objects. In thecontrol display3318, the user double-clicks3316 on the container icon3314 (which represents the nested container object3304) to explore the data contained in it. This action (the specific form of which, a double-click, is not critical to the present functionality) causes a transition in the control display, the result of which is shown inFIG. 33B.
• InFIG. 33B, thecontrol display3318 is now presenting the nestedcontainer object3304 and its contents, as indicated by the dottedoutline3328 around those objects. Twoobject icons3332 and3334 representing the two containedobjects3308 and3310, respectively, are now shown in thecontrol display3318. At the top of thecontrol display3318, an “up”button3330 has appeared, giving the user a convenient way to return back up to the previous level in the hierarchy that was shown inFIG. 33A. In this manner, the user can traverse an entire hierarchical object space and can view the contents of any containers within in it.
• POINTER OBJECTS—FIGS.34A-F illustrate characteristics and uses of “pointer objects,” as well as one method for creating pointer objects. A pointer object is an object which references another object, called a “base object,” for some of its data.FIG. 34A illustrates one method for creating pointer objects.FIG. 34B illustrates the basic functionality of pointer objects in terms of the relationship between a pointer object and its base object.FIG. 34C illustrates a pointer object used in conjunction with networking functionality whereby the base object is referenced over a network.FIG. 34D illustrates a “container pointer object,” which is a container object that references a “base container object” for its contained objects.FIG. 34E illustrates a container pointer object used in conjunction with networking functionality whereby the base container object is referenced over a network. FIGS.34E-F also illustrate a networked container pointer object used in conjunction with the user exploration feature of FIGS.33A-B. Among these figures, the basic pointer object functionality ofFIG. 34B and the container pointer object functionality ofFIG. 34D are each independent features of the invention that may or may not be included in any given system configuration; the pointer object creation method ofFIG. 34A and the networked pointer objects ofFIGS. 34C and 34E are separate features that depend on the functionality ofFIGS. 34B and/or34D (and on networking functionality in the case ofFIGS. 34C and 34E).
• The functionality illustrated in FIGS.34A-F generally provides the advantage of a clearer and more intuitive framework for interlinking multimedia content, including content distributed over a network, and enables a variety of efficiencies in the areas of content authoring and use of system resources (such as storage and bandwidth). Moreover, the above pointer object functionality can be used in conjunction with any of the other features of the invention, such as all of the various authoring features, publishing and collaborative editing, hierarchical data, exploration, navigation, sub-displays, etc., in each case providing further advantages in terms of making it easier to access, manage and/or develop distributed multimedia content.
• FIG. 34A illustrates a method for creating pointer objects, according to one embodiment of the present invention. The figure shows acontainer object3400 which initially contains just atext object3402; the media data of thistext object3402 is seen in theplayback display3414 as thetext3408. To create a new pointer object, the user first clicks on thetext3408 corresponding to thetext object3402, then clicks on the “new pointer object”command icon3406, then clicks on a desiredspot3412 in the playback display, causingnew text3410 to appear there. As is shown on the left inFIG. 34A, anew pointer object3404 is created in thecontainer object3400, the new pointer object referencing themedia data3403 of the text object3402 (its base object) for itsown media data3405, which is seen in theplayback display3414 as thenew text3410.
• FIG. 34B illustrates the basic functionality of pointer objects in terms of the relationship between a pointer object and its base object, according to one embodiment of the present invention. The figure shows acontainer object3416 containing atext object3418 and a pointer object3420 (the latter referencing thetext object3418 as its base object). Themedia data3419 of thetext object3418 is seen in theplayback display3432 as theupper text3424, and themedia data3421 of the pointer object3420 (which refers to themedia data3419 of its base object) is seen in theplayback display3432 as thelower text3428. Initially, the displayed text for both objects looks the same as in theplayback display3414 ofFIG. 34A. To illustrate the relationship between the pointer object and its base object, the user performs two edit operations in theplayback display3432 ofFIG. 34B. First, the user performs atext edit operation3426 on theupper text3424, typing the word “Mom” at the end of the original text “Hello;” since this edit operation changes themedia data3419 of the text object3418 (which is the base object of the pointer object3420), the newly added word “Mom” is also seen at the end of thelower text3428 corresponding to thepointer object3420. Second, the user selects 3430 thelower text3428 and performs a re-size operation using keypad keys (as seen inFIG. 4B) to make the lower text smaller; since the affected display setting is part of theobject data3422 which does not reference the base object, the change has no effect on thebase object3418, whose displayedmedia data3424 stays the same size.
• FIG. 34C illustrates a pointer object used in conjunction with networking functionality whereby the base object is referenced over a network, according to one embodiment of the present invention. The figure shows acontainer object3434 containing atext object3436 and apointer object3438, the latter of which references apicture object3442 as its base object. The media data of thetext object3436 is seen in theplayback display3448 as thetext3444, and themedia data3439 of the pointer object3438 (which refers to themedia data3443 of itsbase object3442 over a network3440) is seen in theplayback display3448 as thepicture3446. This example, in which bothlocal media data3444 andnetworked media data3446 are playing alongside each other in the same playback display, illustrates one way in which networked pointer objects may be used; other examples are provided elsewhere in this specification.
• FIG. 34D illustrates a container pointer object, which is a container object that references a base container object for its contained objects, according to one embodiment of the present invention. The figure shows acontainer pointer object3450 referencing acontainer object3454 as its base container object. Bothcontainers3450 and3454 are depicted with a separatelower portion3451 and3455 corresponding to the listing or directory of the container's contained objects; this depiction is merely a visual convention used to clarify certain concepts in the diagrams, and is not to be understood as defining or limiting the implementation of the relevant functionality.
• In the example ofFIG. 34D, the contents listing3451 of thecontainer pointer object3450 references the contents listing3455 of itsbase container object3454 for its contained objects, in this case atext object3452 corresponding to thetext object3456 in the base container object, and apicture object3453 corresponding to thepicture object3457 in the base container object. These twoobjects3452 and3453 in the container pointer object are depicted in a special outline format to indicate that they are not instances of actual stored objects, but are rather “mirages” of objects that “seem to be there” due to the operation of thecontainer pointer object3450. Nevertheless, despite their mirage status, the twoobjects3452 and3453 are playing and their media data is seen in theplayback display3462 as thetext3458 and thepicture3460, respectively.
• FIG. 34E illustrates a container pointer object used in conjunction with networking functionality whereby the base container object is referenced over a network, according to one embodiment of the present invention. The figure shows anupper container object3464 containing a nestedcontainer object3466 which in turn contains atext object3472; thetext object3472 is playing and its media data is seen in theplayback display3494 as thetext3490. Theupper container object3464 also contains acontainer pointer object3468 which references acontainer object3478 as its base container object. The contents listing3469 of thecontainer pointer object3468 references the contents listing3479 of itsbase container object3478 over anetwork3476 for its contained objects, in this case apicture object3474 corresponding to thepicture object3480 contained in the base container object. As in the previous example ofFIG. 34D, thepicture object3474 in the container pointer object is depicted in a special outline format to indicate that it is a mirage resulting from the operation of thecontainer pointer object3468. Nevertheless, despite its mirage status, thepicture object3474 is playing and its media data is seen in theplayback display3494 as the picture3492 (alongside thetext3490 corresponding to the text object3472). For the purposes of the “networked container pointer object” functionality being presented here, the objects not directly involved (3464,3466,3472) and thecontrol display3488 are not essential, but are provided merely to show one possible context in which the functionality may exist.
• In addition, FIGS.34E-F show a networked container pointer object being used in conjunction with the user exploration feature of FIGS.33A-B, according to one embodiment of the present invention. InFIG. 34E, which illustrates a networked container pointer object as discussed above, thecontrol display3488 is presenting theupper container object3464 and its contents, as indicated by the dottedoutline3470 around those objects. In thecontrol display3488, the user double-clicks3486 on the right container icon3484 (which represents the pointer container object3468) to explore the data contained in it. This action causes a transition in the control display, the result of which is shown inFIG. 34F. InFIG. 34F, thecontrol display3488 is now presenting thecontainer pointer object3468 and its contents, as indicated by the dottedoutline3495 around those objects. Apicture icon3496 representing themirage picture object3474 is now shown in thecontrol display3488.
• INTEGRATING HFS DATA WITH PRESENTATION DATA—FIGS. 35A through 37C illustrate two ways of integrating data from a hierarchical file system (HFS) with presentation data, one by extending a presentation object space of containers and objects into an HFS object space of folders and files, and vice versa. FIGS.35A-B show an extension from presentation space into HFS space using a special “folder pointer object;” this HFS extension is illustrated using the previously discussed exploration feature of the invention.FIG. 36 shows an HFS extension used in conjunction with the previously discussed pointer object feature of the invention. FIGS.37A-C show exporting of presentation data to a file in HFS space that results in an extension from HFS space to presentation space; this extension from HFS space to presentation space is illustrated using the previously discussed exploration feature of the invention. These extensions from presentation space into HFS space and vice versa, as well as the specialized pointer object functionality ofFIG. 36 and the export functionality ofFIG. 37A, are each independent features of the invention that may or may not be included in any given system configuration.
• The functionality illustrated inFIGS. 35A through 37C generally provides the advantage of better integration between presentation data and HFS data, resulting in more seamless access for exploring and playing content stored “outside” the system. Moreover, the two types of extension, from HFS space to presentation space and vice versa, while fundamentally independent from one another, are also complementary and when used together provide new capabilities for interconnecting content; an example scenario in which they are both used is shown inFIG. 47. Also, when the functionality ofFIGS. 35A through 37C is used in conjunction with other features of the invention, such as networking, publishing and collaborative editing, pointer objects, control display features, etc., further advantages are derived in terms of greater continuity and simplicity in the integration and management of multimedia content from a variety of different sources.
• Before describingFIGS. 35A through 37C, it should be noted that the presence and use of control displays in these figures is illustrative only; control displays are not required for the features being presented in these diagrams. Moreover, the specific user steps shown inFIGS. 36 and 37A for (respectively) creating a pointer object and exporting presentation data, while streamlined and efficient, represent only one possible method for providing the functionality shown; other methods may also be effective depending on system implementation. Finally, inFIGS. 35A through 37C, various objects not critical to the functionality being presented have been included in order to provide context for the features being shown.
• FIGS.35A-B illustrate an extension from presentation space into HFS space using a special “folder pointer object,” according to one embodiment of the present invention.FIG. 35A shows anupper container object3500 containing a nestedcontainer object3502 which in turn contains atext object3512 whose media data is seen in theplayback display3528 as thetext3526. Theupper container object3500 also contains a “folder pointer object”3504. A folder pointer object is similar to a “container pointer object” such as that inFIG. 34D, except that the listing of contained objects for the folder pointer object, rather than referencing a “base container object,” instead references a folder stored in an HFS (such as a folder in Windows® or the MacOS®). In the present example, the contents listing3510 of thefolder pointer object3504 references the contents listing of a folder called “Desktop”3508 for its contained objects, in this case apicture object3514 corresponding to apicture file3516. As in earlier cases, thepicture object3514 is depicted in a special outline format to indicate that it is a mirage that seems to be there due to the operation of thefolder pointer object3504. Thefolder pointer object3504 and its contents comprise an HFS extension to the presentation object space.
• The HFS extension to the object space can be explored using the exploration feature of the control display seen in FIGS.33A-B. In the present example ofFIG. 35A, thecontrol display3524 is presenting theupper container object3500 and its contents, as indicated by the dottedoutline3506 around those objects. In thecontrol display3524, the user double-clicks3522 on the folder pointer icon3520 (which represents the folder pointer object3504) to explore it. This action causes a transition in the control display, the result of which is shown inFIG. 35B. Now thecontrol display3524 is presenting thefolder pointer object3504 and its contents, as indicated by the dottedoutline3530 around those objects. Apicture icon3532 representing thepicture object3514 is now shown in thecontrol display3524. The user clicks3534 on thepicture icon3532 to start thepicture object3514, whose media data is now seen in theplayback display3528 as thepicture3536 playing alongside thetext3526. Since thepicture object3514 is a mirage (in this case of the picture file3516), its media data is obtained from thepicture file3516 stored in theHFS folder3508. Note that if there were one or more nested folders in theHFS folder3508, corresponding icons would be presented in thecontrol display3524, and these folders could be further explored by the user via the exploration feature of the control display.
• Before describing the functionality shown inFIG. 36, some general observations about that functionality are provided as follows. The figure involves an HFS extension used in conjunction with the pointer object functionality ofFIG. 34B. In the example ofFIG. 36, the user creates a new pointer object by specifying a “mirage” object in an HFS extension as the base object. However when the new pointer object is created, its base object is not set to the specified mirage object, but to the actual file in the HFS corresponding to the mirage object. Of note here is not only the fact that the pointer object has an HFS file as its base object (the basic functionality), but also the fact that when the pointer object is created, the mirage object specified by the user as the base object is “bypassed” in favor of the HFS file to make the pointer object more robust (a preferred enhancement).
• FIG. 36 illustrates an HFS extension used in conjunction with the pointer object feature ofFIG. 34B, according to one embodiment of the present invention. The figure shows anupper container object3600 containing a nestedcontainer object3602, which in turn contains atext object3610 whose media data is seen in theplayback display3636 as the text3630. Theupper container object3600 also contains afolder pointer object3604 whose contents listing3608 references anHFS folder3606 for its contained items, which in this case is amirage picture object3616 corresponding to theHFS picture file3620. Thecontrol display3626 is presenting thefolder pointer object3604 and its contents, as indicated by the dottedoutline3618.
• To create a new pointer object, the user first clicks on the picture icon3624 (which represents the mirage picture object3616), then clicks on the “new pointer object”command icon3628, then clicks on a desiredspot3634 in the playback display3636 (which is presenting the contents of the nestedcontainer object3602 to the user for editing). As a result of these actions, apicture3632 appears in theplayback display3636. As is shown to the left inFIG. 36, a new pointer object3612 is created in the nestedcontainer object3602, the new pointer object referencing theHFS picture file3620 as the source for itsmedia data3614 which is seen in theplayback display3636 as thepicture3632. Note that the pointer object3612, because it refers to theHFS picture file3620 instead of themirage object3616 as its base object, does not require the ongoing existence of thefolder pointer object3604 in order to function properly.
• FIG. 37A illustrates exporting of presentation data to a file in HFS space, resulting in an extension from HFS space to presentation space, according to one embodiment of the present invention. The figure shows anupper container object3700 containing a nestedcontainer object3702 which in turn contains atext object3704 and apicture object3706. The nestedcontainer object3702 and its two contained objects are playing, and the media data of the containedobjects3704 and3706 is seen in theplayback display3742 as thetext3738 and thepicture3740, respectively. Theupper container object3700 also contains afolder pointer object3708 whose contents listing3710 references an HFS folder3720 (which is initially empty) for its contained items. Thecontrol display3734 presents thefolder pointer object3708 and its (initially empty) contents, as indicated by the dottedoutline3718.
• To export the presentation data playing in theplayback display3742, the user first clicks on theexport command icon3736, then clicks on a desiredspot3732 in thecontrol display3734, causing acontainer icon3730 to appear there. As is shown in the representation to the left inFIG. 37A, anew data file3722 containing the exported presentation data is created in theHFS folder3720, the new data file comprising acontainer object3724 containing atext object3726 and apicture object3728. At the same time, a corresponding “mirage” of this new data file appears within thefolder pointer object3708, this mirage consisting of acontainer object3712 containing atext object3714 and a picture object3716 (each corresponding to its respective object in the data file3722). Thecontrol display3734 presenting the contents of thefolder pointer object3708 now shows acontainer icon3730 representing themirage container object3712. This mirage container object and its contained mirage objects can be played, explored, etc., thereby providing an extension from HFS object space (that of the folder pointer object3708) into presentation object space (that of the mirage objects3712,3714 and3716).
• FIGS.37B-C illustrate user exploration of the extension from HFS space to presentation space just created inFIG. 37A, using the exploration feature of FIGS.33A-B. In addition,FIG. 37B illustrates an optional enhancement to the export functionality ofFIG. 37A, which is that when presentation data is exported to a file in an HFS, playback for the original presentation data is stopped and playback for the “mirage” of the exported data is started. To illustrate this enhancement, the same objects shown inFIG. 37A are now shown inFIG. 37B immediately after the export operation. The figure shows the original objects fromFIG. 37A, as well as the new data file3722 (which includes thecontainer object3724 and its two containedobjects3726 and3728) and its corresponding mirage objects3712,3714 and3716. However unlike inFIG. 37A, inFIG. 37B the nestedcontainer object3702 and its contained objects (the source data for the export operation) are no longer playing, and instead the mirage objects3712,3714 and3716 are playing, and the media data of the containedmirage objects3714 and3716 is seen in theplayback display3742 as thetext3746 and thepicture3748, respectively.
• To illustrate user exploration of the extension from HFS space to presentation space, inFIG. 37B thecontrol display3734 presents thefolder pointer object3708 and its contents, as indicated by the dottedoutline3718. To initiate exploration of the presentation space contained within thefolder pointer object3708, the user double-clicks3744 on the container icon3730 (which represents the mirage container object3712). This action causes a transition in the control display, the result of which is shown inFIG. 37C. InFIG. 37C, thecontrol display3734 is presenting themirage container object3712 and its contents, as indicated by the dottedoutline3750 around those objects. Thetext icon3752 in thecontrol display3734 represents thetext object3714, and thepicture icon3754 represents thepicture object3716.
• USER NAVIGATION THROUGH PRESENTATION DATA—FIGS. 38A through 39B illustrate user “navigation” through the hierarchical object space. FIGS.38A-B illustrate basic navigation, wherein a “navigable” container object nested within an enclosing container object “takes over” the playback display from its enclosing container. This basic navigation of FIGS.38A-B is an independent feature of the invention that may or may not be included in any given system configuration. Moreover, an optional enhancement to this basic navigation may be provided, also seen in FIGS.39A-B, wherein a control display performs “synchronized exploration” to follow the navigation. In FIGS.39A-B, basic navigation is shown in conjunction with a “networked container pointer object” such as that seen inFIG. 34E.
• The functionality illustrated inFIGS. 38A through 39B generally provides the advantage of enabling, in a clean and clear manner, user navigation from a containing container to one of its contained containers, which results in a hierarchical navigation model that represents a more intuitive and understandable way to present interlinked multimedia content. Moreover, when navigation functionality is used in conjunction with other features of the invention, such as pointer objects, networking, publishing and collaborative editing, sub-displays, exploration using control displays, etc., further advantages are derived in terms of a more unified and simplified approach for accessing and interacting with multimedia content, including content distributed over a network.
• Before describingFIGS. 38A through 39B, some general points should be noted. First, the presence and use of control displays in these figures is illustrative only; control displays are not required for the features being presented in these diagrams (the one exception being the above-mentioned “synchronized exploration” feature). Second, in the examples ofFIGS. 38A through 39B, the triggering event that initiates user navigation is the starting of a “navigable” container object; while this is the currently preferred method for triggering navigation, other methods of triggering navigation may also be effective depending on implementation. Third, in the examples ofFIGS. 38A through 39B and in later examples involving sub-displays, navigation results in previously playing objects becoming dormant pending “back navigation,” which may be implemented in a variety of ways such as with greater or lesser amounts of information maintained about dormant objects, etc.; in addition, in an optional enhancement applicable to both navigation and sub-display navigation, when all of the objects playing in the playback display have stopped playing, pending back navigation is triggered automatically. Finally, previously programmed object behavior shown in these examples is merely provided to exemplify the starting of objects that can occur during presentation playback, and neither the specific behavior nor any particular manner for programming it is critical to the navigation functionality being presented.
• FIGS.38A-B illustrate basic user navigation of presentation data, wherein a “navigable” container object nested within an enclosing container object “takes over” the playback display from its enclosing container, according to one embodiment of the present invention.FIG. 38A shows anupper container object3800 containing aleft text object3802, aright text object3804 and a nestedcontainer object3808 which in turn contains atext object3814 and apicture object3816. The media data of the left and right text objects3802 and3804 is seen in theplayback display3838 as theleft text3832 and theright text3834, respectively. In addition, theright text object3804 and the nestedcontainer object3808 have previously been programmed with object behavior, shown by therelation3812, such as that of FIGS.9A-B (“object A, when clicked, starts object B”). Thecontrol display3830 is presenting theupper container object3800 and its contents, as indicated by the dottedoutline3810. In thecontrol display3830, the twotext icons3818 and3820 represent the left and right text objects3802 and3804, respectively. Thestring3822 represents therelation3812, and thecontainer icon3828 represents the nestedcontainer object3808 and is presenting anediting panel3824 indicating that the container is “navigable”3826 (this property of “navigability” is the ability for a container object to be the destination of user navigation; it may either be implemented as an inherent property of some or all containers, or as a switchable property, the latter case involving various possible switching mechanisms such as editing panels, checkboxes, menus, command icons, etc.).
• To initiate navigation, the user clicks3836 on theright text3834 in theplayback display3838, causing the nestedcontainer object3808 to start playing due to the previously programmed object behavior shown by therelation3812. The starting of the nestedcontainer object3808 initiatesnavigation3806, and the results of the navigation are shown inFIG. 38B. InFIG. 38B, theupper container object3800 and its containedobjects3802 and3804 have stopped playing and are now dormant3840 pending “back navigation”3842 (in a preferred enhancement, the playback state of the dormant objects is maintained while they are dormant so that when corresponding back navigation occurs the preempted presentation data is restored to its pre-navigation condition). The nestedcontainer object3808 and its contained objects have started playing, and the media data of the containedobjects3814 and3816 is now seen in theplayback display3838 as thetext3852 and thepicture3854, respectively. The “back”button3850 in theplayback display3838 permits navigation back to theprevious container3800, as shown by the “back navigation”lines3842 to the left.FIG. 38B also illustrates the “synchronized exploration” feature involving the control display. As a result of the navigation, thecontrol display3830 now presents the nestedcontainer object3808 and its contents, as indicated by the dottedoutline3844. In the control display, thetext icon3846 represents thetext object3814 and thepicture icon3848 represents thepicture object3816.
• FIGS.39A-B illustrate user navigation of presentation data distributed over a network, according to one embodiment of the present invention. This example involves a “networked container pointer object” such as that seen inFIG. 34E.FIG. 39A shows anupper container object3900 containing aleft text object3902, aright text object3904 and acontainer pointer object3908 whose contents listing3909 references the contents listing3922 of its base container object3920 (accessed over a network3918) for its contained objects, in this case twomirage objects3914 and3916 corresponding to the twoobjects3924 and3926 contained in the base container object. The media data for the left and right text objects3902 and3904 is seen in theplayback display3948 as theleft text3942 and theright text3944, respectively. In addition, theright text object3904 and thecontainer pointer object3908 have previously been programmed with object behavior, shown by therelation3912, such as that of FIGS.9A-B (“object A, when clicked, starts object B”). Thecontrol display3940 is presenting theupper container object3900 and its contents, as indicated by the dottedoutline3910. In thecontrol display3940, the twotext icons3928 and3930 represent the left and right text objects3902 and3904, respectively. Thestring3932 represents therelation3912, and the container icon3938 (which represents the container pointer object3908) is presenting anediting panel3934 indicating that thecontainer pointer object3908 is “navigable”3936.
• When the user clicks3946 on theright text3944 in theplayback display3948, thecontainer pointer object3908 starts playing due to the previously programmed object behavior shown by therelation3912. The starting of thecontainer pointer object3908 initiatesnavigation3906, and the results of the navigation are shown inFIG. 39B. InFIG. 39B, theupper container object3900 and its containedobjects3902 and3904 have stopped playing and are now dormant3950 pending “back navigation”3952. Thecontainer pointer object3908 and its contained mirage objects have started playing, and the media data of the containedmirage objects3914 and3916 is now seen in theplayback display3948 as thetext3962 and thepicture3964, respectively. The “back”button3960 in theplayback display3948 permits navigation back to theprevious container3900, as shown by the “back navigation”lines3952 to the left.FIG. 39B also illustrates the “synchronized exploration” feature involving the control display. As a result of the navigation, thecontrol display3940 now presents thecontainer pointer object3908 and its contents, as indicated by the dottedoutline3954. In the control display, thetext icon3956 represents themirage text object3914 and thepicture icon3958 represents themirage picture object3916.
• NESTED SUB-DISPLAYS—FIGS. 40 through 45C illustrate characteristics and uses of nested sub-displays in the present invention.FIG. 40 shows the basic operation of nested sub-displays, as well as two enhancements to the basic operation: the ability to turn sub-display functionality on and off for a given container object, and the ability for the user to interact with a presentation displayed within a sub-display.FIG. 41 shows a third enhancement to the basic sub-display functionality: the ability to nest a sub-display within an enclosing sub-display.FIGS. 42 through 44B show sub-display functionality used in conjunction with other features of the invention, including: container pointer objects inFIG. 42, navigation inFIG. 43, and navigation over a network in FIGS.44A-B (along with synchronized exploration). FIGS.45A-C show a fourth sub-display enhancement, a “zoom effect” during sub-display navigation, as well as a “zoom effect” enhancement for the exploration functionality of FIGS.33A-B. Each of these sub-display capabilities (the basic operation and the four enhancements), as well as the “zoom” enhancement for user exploration, is a separate feature of the invention that may or may not be included in any given system configuration (the four sub-display enhancements, of course, requiring basic sub-display functionality).
• The functionality illustrated inFIGS. 40 through 45C generally provides the advantage of enabling, in a clean and clear manner, the creation of multi-level multimedia content involving sub-displays, which supports the objective of creating more pleasing and interesting multimedia content with less effort. Moreover, when sub-display functionality is used in conjunction with navigation and/or networked navigation as shown inFIGS. 43A through 45C, further advantages are derived for both authors and end users via a more intuitive and comfortable model for interconnecting and navigating through multimedia content. In addition, when sub-display functionality is used in conjunction with other features of the invention, such as editing display settings, time-based playback behavior, functions of the sentence paradigm, etc., additional advantages are derived in terms of enabling users to create even more sophisticated and entertaining multimedia content with minimal effort.
• Before describingFIGS. 40 through 45C, some general points should be noted. First, the presence and use of control displays in these figures is illustrative only; control displays are not required for the features being presented (the one exception being the “zoom” enhancement to user exploration shown in FIGS.45A-C). Second, inFIGS. 40 through 45C, the association between sub-displays and container objects is the currently preferred method for implementing sub-display functionality; other methods may also be effective depending on system implementation, however the preferred method provides advantages both in terms of authoring and in terms of how sub-display functionality can be used with other features of the invention. Third, depending on system configuration, various display settings and editing functions such as those seen inFIGS. 4A through 6B, as well as time-based processing such as that seen in FIGS.7A-G, may be applied to sub-displays. Fourth, the specific user actions shown inFIG. 40 to enable sub-display functionality and inFIGS. 43, 44 and45 to trigger sub-display navigation are exemplary only; other methods may also be effective depending upon implementation. Finally, the previously programmed object behavior shown inFIG. 40 is provided merely to illustrate the general capability of user interaction with a presentation nested in a sub-display; the specific behavior in this case is just one example of interactive presentation behavior, and many other types of behavior may also be supported depending on system configuration.
• FIGS.40A-B illustrate the basic operation of nested sub-displays, as well as the ability to turn sub-display functionality on and off and the ability to interact with a presentation in a sub-display, according to one embodiment of the present invention.FIG. 40A shows anupper container object4000 containing anupper text object4002 and a nestedcontainer object4004 which in turn contains apicture object4006 and alower text object4008. All the objects except thelower text object4008 are playing, and the media data of theupper text object4002 and thepicture object4006 is seen in theplayback display4022 as thetext4018 and thepicture4020, respectively. In addition, thepicture object4006 and thelower text object4008 have previously been programmed with object behavior, shown by therelation4010, such as that of FIGS.9A-B (“object A, when clicked, starts object B”). Thecontrol display4016 is presenting theupper container object4000 and its contents, which includes thetext icon4012 representing theupper text object4002 and thecontainer icon4014 representing the nestedcontainer object4004. This initial situation does not involve any new functionality beyond what has already been shown in previous figures.
• InFIG. 40B, thecontainer icon4014 representing the nestedcontainer object4004 now presents anediting panel4024 to the user for editing. The user clicks4026 in the editing panel, causing sub-display functionality to become enabled for the nestedcontainer object4004 as indicated by its double outline (sub-display functionality for container objects may either be implemented as an inherent property of some or all containers, or as a switchable property, the latter case involving various possible switching mechanisms such as editing panels, checkboxes, menus, command icons, etc.). At the same time, the media data for thepicture object4006, seen in theplayback display4022 as thepicture4020, now appears embedded within a sub-display4028 corresponding to the nestedcontainer object4004. Finally, the user clicks4032 on thepicture4020, and as a result of the previously programmed behavior shown by therelation4010, thelower text object4008 starts playing and its media data is now seen in theplayback display4022 as thetext4030, also embedded within thesub-display4028.
• FIG. 41 illustrates the ability to nest a sub-display within an enclosing sub-display, according to one embodiment of the present invention. The figure shows anupper container object4100 containing atext object4102 and amiddle container object4104 which in turn contains anupper picture object4106 and alower container object4108, the latter of which in turn contains alower picture object4110. All of the objects are playing, and the middle andlower container objects4104 and4108 are associated with sub-displays, as indicated by their double outlines. In the playback display4122, the media data of thetext object4102 is seen as thetext4112. The media data of theupper picture object4106 is seen as theleft picture4116 embedded within the outer sub-display4114 (which corresponds to the middle container object4104). The media data of thelower picture object4110 is seen as theright picture4120 embedded within the inner sub-display4118 (which corresponds to the lower container object4108). Theinner sub-display4118 is itself embedded within theouter sub-display4114, along with theleft picture4116, since both of their corresponding objects are contained by themiddle container object4104. Depending on implementation, this capability to nest sub-displays within sub-displays may be extended to additional nesting levels, such as a third level, fourth level, etc.
• FIG. 42 illustrates sub-display functionality used in conjunction with the “container pointer object” functionality ofFIG. 34D, according to one embodiment of the present invention. This example illustrates the application of various display settings to sub-displays, and highlights how the various sub-display settings for a container pointer object are independent from those of its base container object (similarly, the time-based behaviors of FIGS.7A-G may also be applied to sub-displays). The figure shows anupper container object4200 containing atext object4202, acontainer pointer object4204 and a nestedcontainer object4206. The contents listing4208 of thecontainer pointer object4204 references the contents listing4210 of itsbase container object4206 for its contained objects, in this case amirage picture object4212 corresponding to thepicture object4214. All the objects are playing, and thecontainer pointer object4204 and the nestedcontainer object4206 are both associated with sub-displays, as indicated by their double outlines. In theplayback display4228, the media data of thetext object4202 is seen as thetext4216, the media data of themirage picture object4212 is seen as theleft picture4220 within the left sub-display4218 (the latter of which corresponds to the container pointer object4204), and the media data of thepicture object4214 is seen as theright picture4222 within the right sub-display4224 (the latter of which corresponds to the nested container object4206).
• Of interest in this example is the fact that the sub-displays4218 and4224, despite the pointer-base relationship of theircorresponding container objects4204 and4206, have display settings that are independent from one another. Not only are the sub-displays located at different positions within theplayback display4228, but they are sized differently as seen by the different sizes of thepictures4220 and4222, and have different cropping as seen by the different relative positions of the pictures within their respective sub-displays. This independence is further illustrated by the fact that the user is adjusting4226 the cropping of theleft sub-display4218, while the cropping of theright sub-display4224 remains unchanged.
• As seen in the present example, the independence between the display settings for the sub-display of a pointer container object and that of its base container object is analogous to the independence between the display settings for the media data of a pointer object and that of its base object (as seen inFIG. 34B). Moreover, the independence of the present example includes the actual enabling of sub-display functionality as well, i.e., the base container object need not have sub-display enabled in order for the container pointer object to do so. In addition, sub-display independence such as that seen inFIG. 42 also applies to multiple container pointer objects which reference a single container object. In such cases, since the sub-display settings for the various container pointer objects are independent from the base object, they are also, by logical extension, independent from one another. This is an especially powerful capability of the present invention, in that it allows a single presentation to be embedded as a sub-display within a variety of other presentations, each instance having its own custom display settings determining how the embedded presentation appears.
• FIG. 43 illustrates sub-display functionality used in conjunction with the user navigation functionality of FIGS.38A-B, according to one embodiment of the present invention.FIG. 43A shows anupper container object4300 containing atext object4302 and a nestedcontainer object4306 which in turn contains apicture object4308. The nestedcontainer object4306 is “navigable,” and it is associated with a sub-display as indicated by its double outline. All the objects are playing, and in theplayback display4318 the media data of thetext object4302 is seen as thetext4310, and the media data of thepicture object4308 is seen as thepicture4314 embedded within the sub-display4312 (the latter of which corresponds to the nested container object4306).
• To initiate navigation “into” the sub-display, the user double-clicks4316 on the sub-display4312 which triggersnavigation4304, the results of which are shown inFIG. 43B (the double-clicking in this and the following examples is only one possible approach for triggering sub-display navigation, and other approaches may be effective depending on implementation, such as single-clicking on a sub-display, using buttons, icons, menus or other user interface elements, using keypad keys, etc.). InFIG. 43B, theupper container object4300 and itscontained object4302 have stopped playing and are now dormant4320 pending “back navigation”4322. The nestedcontainer object4306 is no longer associated with a sub-display, as indicated by its single outline, and the media data of its containedobject4308, seen in theplayback display4318 as thepicture4314, is now no longer embedded within a sub-display. The “back”button4324 in theplayback display4318 permits navigation back to theprevious container4300, as shown by the “back navigation”lines4322 to the left; clicking on the “back” button results in a restoration of the previous condition seen inFIG. 43A.
• FIGS.44A-B illustrate the use of a sub-display to navigate presentation data distributed over a network, according to one embodiment of the present invention. This example, like the navigation example of FIGS.39A-B, involves the use of a “networked container pointer object” such as that seen inFIG. 34E. This example also includes a control display performing “synchronized exploration” (such as that of FIGS.38A-B) in conjunction with the sub-display navigation.
• FIG. 44A shows anupper container object4400 containing aleft text object4402, aleft picture object4404 and acontainer pointer object4410 whose contents listing4412 references the contents listing4422 of itsbase container object4420 over anetwork4418 for its contained objects, in this case twomirage objects4414 and4416 which correspond (respectively) to the twoobjects4424 and4426 contained in the base container object. Thecontainer pointer object4410 is “navigable,” and it is associated with a sub-display as indicated by its double outline. All the objects (except thebase container object4420 and its contained objects) are playing, and in theplayback display4454, theupper text4442 corresponds to theleft text object4402, theupper picture4444 corresponds to theleft picture object4404, and the sub-display4452 corresponds to thecontainer pointer object4410. Within the sub-display4452, thetext4446 and thepicture4448 correspond to the mirage objects4414 and4416, respectively. Thecontrol display4440 is presenting theupper container object4400 and its contents, as indicated by the dotted outline4408. In thecontrol display4440, thetext icon4428 and thepicture icon4430 represent theleft text object4402 and leftpicture object4404, respectively. Thecontainer icon4434, which represents thecontainer pointer object4410, is presenting anediting panel4432 indicating that thecontainer pointer object4410 is both “navigable”4436 and is associated4438 with a sub-display.
• To initiate navigation “into” the sub-display, the user double-clicks4450 on the sub-display4452 which triggersnavigation4406, the results of which are shown inFIG. 44B. InFIG. 44B, theupper container object4400 and its containedobjects4402 and4404 have stopped playing and are now dormant4456 pending “back navigation”4458. Thecontainer pointer object4410 is no longer associated with a sub-display, as indicated by its single outline, and the media data of its containedmirage objects4414 and4416, seen in theplayback display4454 as (respectively) thetext4446 and thepicture4448, is now no longer embedded within a sub-display. The “back”button4466 in theplayback display4454 permits navigation back to theprevious container4400, as shown by the “back navigation”lines4458 to the left; clicking on the “back” button results in a restoration of the previous condition seen inFIG. 44A.FIG. 44B also illustrates the “synchronized exploration” feature involving the control display. As a result of the navigation process, thecontrol display4440 now presents thecontainer pointer object4410 and its contents, as indicated by the dottedoutline4460. In the control display, thetext icon4462 represents themirage text object4414, and thepicture icon4464 represents themirage picture object4416.
• FIGS.45A-C illustrate user navigation into a sub-display with a “zoom effect” enhancement to emphasize the transition into the sub-display, according to one embodiment of the present invention. This example also demonstrates the use of sub-display cropping to cause presentation content to be “revealed” as a result of navigating into a sub-display. This example also includes a control display performing “synchronized exploration,” which is used to illustrate a “zoom effect” enhancement for the exploration functionality of FIGS.33A-B.
• FIG. 45A shows anexemplary display screen4500 such as might be found on a personal computer or other computing device, within which is shown acontrol display4512 and aplayback display4526. Of course this specific display representation is just one possible implementation, and is not to be understood as limiting or restricting the manner in which control displays and/or playback displays can be presented to users of the system. Within the control display4512 atext icon4502 is shown, as well as fourcontainer icons4504,4506,4508 and4510 which represent four “navigable” container objects associated with sub-displays. For the purposes of this example, which involves four small business “sites” embedded as sub-displays within a “virtual mall,” the four containers represented by the four container icons are “networked container pointer objects” that each reference a different small business site stored on a different computer. However the functionality being presented in this example does not depend on this characterization, and other characterizations may equally apply. All the objects are playing as seen in the playback display4526: thetext4514 corresponds to thetext icon4502, and the sub-displays4516,4518,4522 and4524 correspond to thecontainer icons4504,4506,4508 and4510, respectively. Each sub-display further contains various displayed items such as might be appropriate for the various small business sites being presented.
• To initiate navigation, the user double-clicks4520 on a selected sub-display4516, and a “zooming” navigation transition begins.FIG. 45B shows a “snapshot” of this transition midway through the process. Theplayback display4526 has “zoomed in” toward the selectedsub-display4516, which is now seen at a larger size within the playback display. At the same time, only partial views of theother sub-displays4518,4522 and4524 are seen because the zoom effect is moving them out of the visible portion of the display. Moreover, we are beginning to see more information in the selected sub-display4516 as it “unfurls” to show a partial view of apicture4528 which was previously hidden due to the cropping of the sub-display. Meanwhile, thecontrol display4512 has been performing “synchronized exploration” with a “zoom effect” enhancement, and has zoomed in to a very close view of thecontainer icon4504 which corresponds to the selectedsub-display4516.
• FIG. 45C shows the end results of the navigation process seen inFIGS. 45A and 45B. In theplayback display4526, thetext4540 and the upperleft picture4542, both of which were previously seen in the selectedsub-display4516 ofFIGS. 45A and 45B, are now no longer embedded in a sub-display. Moreover, the presentation has now fully “unfurled” to reveal anew picture4528 and anew sub-display4544 which were previously hidden by the cropping of the sub-display. The “back”button4538 in theplayback display4526 permits navigation back to the previous condition seen inFIG. 45A (for which a “reverse zoom effect” may be provided). Thecontrol display4512 has now completed its “synchronized exploration” transition, and is presenting fouricons4530,4532,4534 and4536 corresponding to thetext4540, the upperleft picture4542, thenew sub-display4544 and thenew picture4528, respectively. Note that the container object represented by thecontainer icon4534 may itself be a navigable container object, possibly located on yet another computer, allowing further sub-display navigation into that container and to containers contained within it, etc.
• InFIGS. 43A through 45C, various examples of sub-display navigation have been presented. This functionality can be used in a variety of ways, and one of its most effective uses is to navigate extended hierarchies of presentation data (a few of examples of which are shown in the next section). Applied in this way, sub-display navigation provides users of the system with a vastly improved “surfing” experience compared to what is available using traditional Web browsers.
• Example Scenarios
• FIGS. 46 through 48 illustrate example scenarios showing various hierarchies of presentation data that might be created by users of the system. These examples show how features discussed in the above functional overview can be used to create deep, interconnected “webs” of multimedia content which can be explored, navigated and further developed by users of the system. Of course the presentation data in these scenarios is exemplary only, and many other different forms of presentation data may be created using embodiments of the present invention.
• FIG. 46 illustrates an overview of an exemplary data linking scenario, showing hierarchical databases of presentation data linked together and forming a virtual hierarchy.FIG. 47 illustrates a block diagram of another exemplary data linking scenario, in this case showing hierarchical databases and an HFS linked together and forming a virtual hierarchy that includes two transitions: one from presentation object space to HFS object space, and vice versa.FIG. 48 illustrates a block diagram of an individual, exemplary hierarchical database of presentation data that includes programmed behavior represented as relations between objects, container control objects for propagating relations across hierarchical boundaries, and various other features of the invention. In these examples ofFIGS. 46 through 48, the databases may be database files, or may be some other form of collected presentation data.
• In addition to showing example presentation data,FIGS. 46 and 47 also illustrate “path resolution” functionality, which is a separate feature of the invention that may or may not be included in any given system configuration. Path resolution is the presently preferred method for making interconnected presentation data appear as a virtual hierarchy (as seen in the examples ofFIGS. 46 and 47); it provides the advantage of enabling virtual hierarchies in a clear and efficient manner. Because this feature is more of an underlying system operation than a user-oriented function, and because it is best illustrated using large amounts of data, it is presented here rather than in the previous Functional Overview section. Path resolution is described below in the discussion ofFIGS. 46 and 47, but briefly, it can be summarized as follows. All the objects in a virtual hierarchy, regardless of their physical location, are identified using a “root path” oriented from the top of the hierarchy; then, whenever data for a particular object needs to be accessed, the root path for that object is converted to a “physical path” by performing a path resolution process, in which each “jump” in the virtual hierarchy is “resolved out” from the root path one jump at a time from top to bottom; once the entire path has been resolved in this way, the data for the object is accessed from its physical location using the fully resolved physical path.
• FIG. 46 illustrates an overview of an exemplary data linking scenario, showing hierarchical databases of presentation data linked together and forming a virtual hierarchy, according to one embodiment of the present invention. This figure also includes three examples of path resolution used in connection with the virtual hierarchy. The figure shows eight databases ofpresentation data4610,4620,4630,4640,4650,4660,4670 and4680, each containing various types of objects. These databases may be located on a local storage system with respect to the present invention, or across a network on one or more remote computers, or on some combination of the above. Adata access capability4600 included in embodiments of the invention can access data from each of the databases, as indicated by the data access lines4602 (which are shown going to only some of the databases to avoid visual clutter). From the user perspective, the various links among the database objects (indicated by the link lines4604) result in the different databases being presented to the user as a single virtual hierarchy “rooted” at thecontainer object4612 in thetop database4610.
• In the example ofFIG. 46, the various links among the database objects are accomplished using pointer objects such as those seen in FIGS.34A-E. A number of the links shown involve container pointer objects, and these include thecontainer pointer object4616 referencing abase container object4622, as well as various other container pointer objects4618,4619,4624,4636,4638 and4646 referencing various other base container objects4632,4642,4652,4662,4674 and4682, respectively. In addition, two of the links shown involve non-container objects, and these include apointer object4626 referencing abase object4664, and anotherpointer object4644 referencing abase object4648. Of course the particular links shown inFIG. 46 are exemplary only, and many other forms of virtual hierarchies may be created depending on the specific links chosen.
• To demonstrate how path resolution can be used in connection with the virtual hierarchy, three examples of path resolution are described. Each of these examples shows a different version of path resolution, each of which may be provided with or without other versions of path resolution depending on implementation. Moreover, it is the general logic of the path resolution process in each case that defines the functionality involved, and not the specific form of the paths being manipulated. The first example involves a case where the contents listing for thecontainer pointer object4616 has been requested, and the contents listing for itsbase container object4622 is provided instead; this is the basic building block of the extended virtual hierarchy shown inFIG. 46. The second example involves a case where the media data of thepicture object4676 has been requested; the deep location of this object is used to illustrate multi-step path resolution. The final example involves a case where the display settings for thepointer object4644 have been requested; in this example, the independence between the display settings of the pointer object and those of its base object is achieved by not executing the last step of the path resolution process.
• In the first example of path resolution, the contents listing for thecontainer pointer object4616 in thetop database4610 has been requested. In this example, thecontainer pointer object4616 is identified by the root path “4610//4612/4614/4616,” where the first entry in the path identifies the top database in the hierarchy (called the “root database”), the last entry identifies the object in question, and the intervening entries identify any intervening container objects (starting with the top container object in the root database). The process of path resolution begins with an evaluation of whether or not thefirst object4612 in the path is a pointer object. Since it is not, the evaluation moves on to thenext object4614, which is also not a pointer object. The evaluation then moves on to thenext object4616, and since that object is a pointer object, the path up to that point is replaced with the path of that object's base object: “4620//4622” (specified in reference to thedatabase4620 that contains the base object). Since there are no further objects in the path, the path resolution is now complete. The contents listing for thecontainer pointer object4616 is accessed using the fully resolved path “4620//4622,” and the listing returned is that of thebase container object4622 read from thedatabase4620 that contains the base container object.
• In the second example of path resolution, the media data for thepicture object4676 located at the bottom of the hierarchy has been requested. In this example, thepicture object4676 is identified by the root path “4610//4612/4614/4618/4634/4638/4676,” where once again the first entry in the path identifies the root database, the last entry identifies the object in question, and the intervening entries identify intervening container objects. Once again, the process of path resolution begins with an evaluation of whether or not thefirst object4612 in the path is a pointer object. Since it is not, the evaluation moves on to thenext object4614, also not a pointer object, and then on to thenext object4618. Since that object is a pointer object, the path up to that point is replaced with the path of its base object: “4630//4632,” resulting in a new path “4630//4632/4634/4638/4676.” The evaluation then continues with thefirst object4632 in the new path, which is not a pointer object, then thenext object4634, also not a pointer object, and then thenext object4638. Since that object is a pointer object, the path up to that point is replaced with the path of its base object: “4670//4672/4674” (note that in this case the base object is not the top object in its database, and therefore its path involves an intervening object). The new path is now “4670//4672/4674/4676,” and the evaluation then continues all the way to the end of the path with no further resolutions since there are no further pointer objects. With path resolution complete, the media data for thepicture object4676 is read from itsdatabase4670 using the fully resolved path.
• In the third example of path resolution, the display settings for apointer object4644 have been requested. This example shows how the independence of display settings between a pointer object and its base object can be achieved by not executing the last step of the path resolution process. In this example, thepointer object4644 is identified by the root path “4610//4612/4615/4619/4644,” where once again the first entry in the path identifies the root database, the last entry identifies the object in question, and the intervening entries identify intervening container objects. As before, the process of path resolution begins with an evaluation of whether or not thefirst object4612 in the path is a pointer object. Since it is not, the evaluation moves on to thenext object4615, also not a pointer object, and then on to thenext object4619. Since that object is a pointer object, the path up to that point is replaced with the path of its base object, “4640//4642,” resulting in a new path “4640//4642/4644.” The evaluation then continues with thefirst object4642 in the new path, which is not a pointer object, and then on to thenext object4644. Even though thatobject4644 is a pointer object, it is the last object in the path and it is the display settings of that object that are being requested. As a result, the path is not replaced with the path of the base object4648 (as it would be if the media data were being requested), but rather the display settings for thepointer object4644 are read from itsdatabase4640 using the almost fully resolved path.
• FIG. 47 illustrates a block diagram of a second exemplary data linking scenario, in this case showing three hierarchical databases of presentation data and a section of a hierarchical file system (HFS) linked together and forming a virtual hierarchy, according to one embodiment of the present invention. This example includes both types of transitions between presentation space and HFS space discussed in connection withFIGS. 35A through 37B, as well as corresponding path resolution functionality for each type of transition.
• FIG. 47 shows three databases ofpresentation data4700,4720 and4730, each containing various types of objects. The figure also shows asection4710 of an HFS, such as might be provided by the operating system on a typical computer. TheHFS4710 includes a number of folders (4712,4714, etc.) and files (4716, etc.) organized in a hierarchical arrangement whereby folders contain files and/or nested folders (as is typical in an HFS). All of the various databases and HFS objects ofFIG. 47 may be located on a local storage system with respect to the present invention, or across a network on one or more remote computers, or on some combination of the above. A data access capability included in embodiments the present invention (not shown, but similar to that ofFIG. 46) can access data from each of the databases and HFS objects. From the user perspective, various links among the data inFIG. 47 (indicated by thelink lines4740 and4750) and the containment of thedatabase4730 within the HFS folder4714 (indicated by the containment line4760) result in the databases and HFS objects being presented to the user as a single virtual hierarchy “rooted” at thetop container object4702 in theroot database4700.
• In the example ofFIG. 47, one of the links shown is accomplished using a container pointer object such as that seen inFIG. 34D, specifically, thecontainer pointer object4706 in theroot database4700 referencing thebase container object4722 in thedatabase4720. The other links involve transitions between presentation object space and HFS object space as discussed in connection withFIGS. 35A through 37B. In particular, afolder pointer object4708 in theroot database4700 references anHFS folder4712 in the HFS to create a transition from the presentation object space of the root database to the HFS object space of theHFS4710. Also, thefolder4714 in the HFS contains adatabase file4730 to create a transition from the HFS object space of theHFS4710 to the presentation object space of the containeddatabase4730. Of course the particular links shown inFIG. 47 are exemplary only, and many other forms of virtual hierarchies may be created depending on the specific links chosen.
• To demonstrate how path resolution can be used in connection with transitions between presentation object space and HFS object space, a single example of path resolution that involves both types of transitions is described. Although both transition types are shown in a single example, the path resolution procedures used for each of the two transition types are nonetheless independent versions of path resolution, each of which may be provided with or without other versions of path resolution depending on implementation. Moreover, it is the general logic of the path resolution process in each case that defines the functionality involved, and not the specific form of the paths being manipulated. In the following example, the media data of thepicture object4736 at the bottom of the hierarchy has been requested; in order to access the required data, a transition from presentation space to HFS space is performed first, followed by a transition from HFS space to presentation space.
• In an example demonstrating the two versions of path resolution just discussed, the media data for thepicture object4736 in thedatabase4730 has been requested. In this example, thepicture object4736 is identified by the root path “4700//4702/4704/4708/4714/4730/4734/4736, where once again the first entry in the path identifies a database, the last entry identifies the object in question, and the intervening entries identify intervening container objects (or in HFS space, intervening folders and/or database files). As before, the process of path resolution begins with an evaluation of whether or not thefirst object4702 in the path is a pointer object. Since it is not, the evaluation moves on to thenext object4704, also not a pointer object, and then on to thenext object4708. Since that object is a pointer object, specifically a folder pointer object, the path up to that point is replaced with the path of its base folder: “4710//4712,” resulting in a new path “4710//4712/4714/4730/4734/4736.” This represents a transition from presentation object space to HFS object space.
• The new path, unlike the other paths seen so far, is “rooted” in HFS space rather than presentation space, meaning that the first entry in the path identifies an HFS rather than a database. Path resolution continues in a similar manner as before, except that instead of each entry being evaluated as to whether or not it is a pointer object, each entry is evaluated as to whether or not it is a database file. So the evaluation continues with thefirst object4712 in the new path, which is not a database file, then thenext object4714, also not a database file, and then thenext object4730. Since that object is a database file, the path up to that point is replaced with the path of the top object in the database file, “4730//4732,” resulting in a new path of4730//4732/4734/4736. This change represents a transition from HFS object space to presentation object space. Now back in presentation space, the evaluation continues, once again checking for pointer objects all the way to the end of the path. Since there are no further pointer objects, path resolution is now complete and the media data for thepicture object4736 is read from itsdatabase4730 using the fully resolved path.
• FIG. 48 illustrates a block diagram of an individual, exemplary hierarchical database of presentation data, according to one embodiment of the present invention. This example includes a variety of features discussed throughout this specification, including various object types such as video objects and container control objects, programmed object behavior represented as relations between objects, dynamic parameter modification using vector objects, and container objects associated with sub-displays. In addition,FIG. 48 illustrates one new feature of the invention, which is the use of container control objects (discussed in connection withFIG. 29B) for “bussing” relations across hierarchical boundaries. This feature is an independent feature of the invention that may or may not be included in any given system configuration; it provides the advantage of a clearer and more understandable structure for propagating object behavior throughout a hierarchically arranged multimedia presentation.
• FIG. 48 shows ahierarchical database4800 with anupper container object4802 at the top level of its internal hierarchy. Theupper container object4802 contains a left nestedcontainer object4804, aleft picture object4806, acontainer control object4810, a right nestedcontainer object4812 and aright picture object4814. The left nestedcontainer object4804 in turn contains aleft picture object4820, acontainer control object4824, avector object4826 and aright picture object4828. The right nestedcontainer object4812 in turn contains a container control object4832, a text object4834 and avideo object4836. Both nestedcontainer objects4804 and4812 are associated with sub-displays, as indicated by their double outlines; as a result, the media data of their contained objects will be seen in corresponding sub-displays in the playback display.
• The presentation data inFIG. 48 involves dynamic and interactive content; the following verbal description is provided to depict how the resulting multimedia presentation appears when played. When theupper container object4802 is started, the start propagation ofFIG. 8A causes all of its contained objects to start playing, and the media data for the twopicture objects4806 and4814 appears in the playback display as pictures. At the same time, sub-displays associated with the nestedcontainer objects4804 and4812 also appear in the playback display. In the case of theleft container object4804, the start propagation ofFIG. 8A causes all of its contained objects to start playing as well, and the media data of its containedpicture objects4820 and4828 is seen embedded within its corresponding sub-display. At the same time, thevector object4826 starts playing, and via the programmed behavior shown by therelations4840 and4842, performs some entertaining manipulation to the display settings of the twopicture objects4820 and4828, such as changing the vertical stretch of the former and the horizontal stretch of the latter in a repeating dynamic pattern.
• Meanwhile, even though theright container object4812 has started playing and its sub-display is seen in the playback display, the sub-display is empty. The reason is that in the case of theright container object4812, the start propagation ofFIG. 8A is blocked by the “start propagation exemption” discussed in connection with that figure. Recall that this exemption causes start propagation to be blocked for objects that might be started by programmed behavior. The programmed behavior in this case is shown by the two lowerright relations4844 and4846, and will be explained shortly.
• First we examine the behavior shown by theupper right relation4818, which is similar to that of FIGS.9A-B (“object A, when clicked, starts object B”). However in this case, “object B” is not thecontainer object4812. This is because thecontainer object4812 “busses”4830 the relation to its container control object4832 (crossing a hierarchical boundary). The container control object4832 in turn busses therelation4844 to thevideo object4836. Thus, thevideo object4836 is actually the “object B” for theupper right relation4818. Therefore, when the user clicks in the playback display on the picture corresponding to thepicture object4814, thevideo object4836 starts playing within the sub-display corresponding to thecontainer object4812. And at a certain programmed “cue point” during the playback of thevideo object4836, it causes the text object4834 to also start playing within the same sub-display, via programmedbehavior4846 such as that seen in FIGS.25A-B (“video object A, upon reaching cue point, starts object B”).
• Turning now to the left side ofFIG. 48, the media data of the twopicture objects4820 and4828 is still seen in the sub-display corresponding to thecontainer object4804, and is still changing dynamically due to the manipulations of thevector object4826. As shown by therelation4838, theleft picture object4820 has been programmed with behavior such as that seen in FIGS.11A-B (“object A, when clicked, stops object B”). In this case once again, though, “object B” is not thecontainer control object4824. Rather, thecontainer control object4824busses4822 the relation to its associatedcontainer object4804, which inturn busses4816 the relation to the uppercontainer control object4810, which inturn busses4808 the relation to theupper container object4802. Thus, theupper container object4802, two hierarchical levels away, is actually the “object B” for therelation4838. As a result of all this bussing, when the user clicks in the playback display on the picture corresponding to theleft picture object4820, the entire presentation stops playing!
• As seen in the examples ofFIGS. 46 through 48, the networking and pointer object features of the invention allow distributed and disparate data to be interlinked and presented as a well-organized hierarchy. In addition, the programming and editing features of the invention allow authors to instill the content in the hierarchy with dynamic activity and visual appeal. Moreover, as seen earlier, the exploration, navigation and sub-display features of the invention allow these hierarchies to be easily traversed, presenting users with a fluid, coherent “surfing” experience. And finally, the collaborative editing features of the invention allow distributed content to be developed on an ongoing basis by a multiplicity of users. All of this is to say that the various features of the invention, while independent from one another and possessing their own individual advantages, are also highly complementary, and when provided together, their combined strength can alleviate the burden of multiple incompatible tools, and provide a unified approach to authoring, distribution and viewing of multimedia content within a system appropriate for users of all skill levels.
• Hardware Overview
• FIG. 49 illustrates how the present invention may be implemented on one or more computers executing software instructions. Operation of the system may be either standalone or networked, and three different network embodiments are shown. Regardless of whether operation is standalone or networked, the steps of accessing, downloading, and manipulating the data, as well as other aspects of the invention, are implemented by a central processing unit (CPU) in a computer executing sequences of instructions stored in a memory. The memory may be a random access memory (RAM), read-only memory (ROM), a persistent store, such as a mass storage device, or any combination of these devices. Execution of the sequences of instructions causes the CPU to perform steps according to embodiments of the present invention.
• The instructions may be loaded into the memory of the computer from a storage device, or from one or more other computer systems over a network connection. For example, a server computer may transmit a sequence of instructions to a client computer in response to a message transmitted to the server over a network by the client. The client may store the instructions for later execution, or it may execute the instructions as they arrive over the network connection. In some cases, the downloaded instructions may be directly supported by the CPU; in other cases, the instructions may be executed by an interpreter that interprets the instructions. In other embodiments, hardwired circuitry may be used in place of, or in combination with, software instructions to implement the present invention. Thus, the present invention is not limited to any specific combination of hardware circuitry and software, nor to any particular source for the instructions executed by the computer running the software.
• FIG. 49 illustrates acomputer system4900 that implements embodiments of the present invention, both standalone and networked. Ignoring for a moment the network system elements ofFIG. 49, the standalone embodiment of the present invention is illustrated by theresident application4912 and by the plug-inapplication4914, shown hosted in theauthor computer4910. Typically, a single computer would host either the resident or plug-in version of the application, although both may be hosted in the same computer. A detailed description of an implementation for theresident application4912 and plug-inapplication4914 is provided in the System Architecture section of this specification.
• In the network embodiments ofFIG. 49, the network can be the Internet, a Wide Area Network (WAN), a Local Area Network (LAN), a Virtual Private Network (VPN), or any other network or combination of networks that can effectively transfer the required data. With current technologies, a modem, a CATV (cable television) bi-directional network, ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network), DSL (Digital Subscriber Line), xDSL high-speed network or wireless network are examples of appropriate network infrastructures, though they are not intended to be exclusive as to the types of networks capable of practicing the present invention. It should be noted that the network embodiments of the present invention may include a larger number of interconnected author, client and server computers than shown inFIG. 49.
• InFIG. 49, three network embodiments of the present invention are shown. In the first, content is distributed over a network using a network data server. In the second, content is distributed over a network using peer-to-peer filesharing. In the third, the invention runs in a central server under the control of a remote user, who performs user actions and receives program output over a network. These three embodiments are not mutually exclusive and may be used in combination with each other. Moreover, they are not intended to restrict the invention to just these embodiments, or imply that other network embodiments cannot be used to practice the invention. Each of these network embodiments is now discussed in turn.
• In the first network embodiment ofFIG. 49, a network data server is used to provide content distribution. In this embodiment, a networkdata server computer4930 is coupled, directly or indirectly, to one ormore author computers4910 and to one ormore client computers4950 through anetwork4920. Thedata server4930 executes adata server process4932 to provide file access to author and client computers coupled to thenetwork4920. Content is uploaded4924 from theauthor computer4910 to thedata server4930 using a file transfer protocol. Once present on the server, the content can be accessed4926 from aclient computer4950 using a file access protocol. Other client computers (not shown) may access thenetwork4920 as well. Theserver process4932 and its associated protocols may be standard, such as a Web server using FTP and http, or they may be implemented as proprietary or dedicated programs or protocols that communicate over a public or private computer network.
• In the second network embodiment ofFIG. 49, peer-to-peer filesharing is used to provide content distribution. In this embodiment, theauthor computer4910 runs a filesharing process (which may, depending on implementation, be included within theresident application4912 or plug-in application4914) that simulates thedata server process4932 of thedata server4930. Theauthor computer4910 is coupled, directly or indirectly, to one ormore client computers4940 through anetwork4920. In order to distribute content in this embodiment, theauthor computer4910 logs the relevant data with its filesharing process, thereby making it accessible to other computers. This filesharing process may either be “pure” peer-to-peer, in which case there is no central server involved, or it may be “assisted” peer-to-peer, in which case thecentral server4960, running acentral server process4962, may be used to facilitate author-client transactions (such as to provide the author's network address to the client, or to cache frequently accessed data, etc.). Once the data is made accessible, it may be accessed4922 by theclient computer4940 using a file access protocol. As with the above server embodiment, the file access protocol can either be standard, such as http, or proprietary.
• In the third network embodiment ofFIG. 49, the invention runs in a central server under the control of a remote user, who performs user actions and receives program output over a network. In this embodiment, the plug-inapplication4914 is hosted by thecentral server process4962 running in thecentral server4960. Thecentral server4960 is coupled, directly or indirectly, to one ormore author computers4910 and to one ormore client computers4950 through anetwork4920. In this scenario, operations of the invention take place in the plug-inapplication4914 in thecentral server4960. This allows theresident application4912 or plug-inapplication4914 in the author and/or client computers to be a “dumb terminal” with minimal functionality (such as sending user actions over the network to thecentral server4960 in the form of keystrokes and/or movements of a pointing device, and receiving program output over the network from the central server in a the form of a video or audio-visual feed or some other format).
• As can be appreciated by those of ordinary skill in the art, the representative computers ofFIG. 49 can be implemented as any standard computer that includes a CPU coupled through a bus to various other devices. These devices can include random access memory (RAM), read only memory (ROM) and various other types of storage devices (such as magnetic disks, tape drives, optical compact disks, and/or any other cards or devices for storing data and instructions). The computer also typically includes input/output devices, such as a display device, a keyboard, a mouse or other pointing device, and a network interface device, along with other similar devices or interfaces. It may also include a “web cam” or otherimage capturing device4916 which captures images and makes them available to applications running in the computer. It may also include an audio playback system, which in most cases would consist of digital-to-analog audio converters and an amplifier and speakers (provided in a variety of physical configurations). Any of the computers inFIG. 49 can be implemented in the form of a personal computer, a laptop computer, a mainframe computer, other types of workstation computers, a set top box, a gaming device, a PDA or other handheld device, or any other computing device of comparable capabilities.
• The presently preferred embodiment of the invention was produced using Microsoft Visual C++ Version 6.0 running in a Windows 98 desktop computer.
• System Architecture
• A system which provides authoring and playback of multimedia content according to embodiments of the present invention is now described. The system can be implemented as a “resident application” for installation on a computer or as a “plug-in application” associated with a host application. In the presently preferred embodiments, the creation and playback of content occurs in the context of a personal computer which may or may not be connected to a network, as discussed above. At the same time, however, the scope of the invention is not limited to just these implementations.
• The system described in the following discussion operates within the field of multimedia authoring and playback; however another field relevant to an understanding of the system is the field of interactive entertainment, i.e., computer and video games. With games, the fluidity of the user experience is paramount. To produce a highly dynamic and responsive user experience, computer game developers typically develop system elements such as highly efficient playback engines and flexible object models that can effectively handle the constant starting and stopping of objects that occurs in a game. Some aspects of the present system have been inspired by a similar design approach. This use of a game-inspired design approach for a multimedia authoring and playback system is one of the underlying factors that distinguishes the present system from more traditional multimedia tools, such as those discussed earlier in the background section.
• In the following discussion, various system functions are described so that increasing levels of complexity and sophistication are revealed over the course of the discussion. Where appropriate, this increasing functional complexity is delineated in ways which correlate to features discussed earlier in the Functional Overview. In many cases, however, for the sake of clarity, certain system functions are described as generalized implementations that encompass multiple features at once. In cases where such generalized implementations are presented, it is the above Functional Overview, and not the generalized implementation, that defines and delineates the features of the invention and any dependencies between them.
• Furthermore, the structural and functional divisions of the software system explained below are intended to describe only the currently preferred implementation for the invention. The functionality of the invention may also be organized and arranged using many other system architectures, such as those in which similar functionality is redistributed among different system components, implemented in different ways, etc. Moreover, depending on which features of the invention are included within a particular system configuration, elements of the system described below may be simplified or omitted altogether. Therefore, no limitation to the present invention should be construed from the design of the software system comprising its currently preferred implementation, which is detailed as follows.
• An overall multimedia authoring and playback system, shown implemented as a “resident application” that can be installed in a computer, is illustrated by block diagram inFIG. 50. As seen in the embodiment ofFIG. 50, the authoring andplayback system5000 is comprised of a block ofapplication elements5010, as well aspresentation data5020. Thepresentation data5020 consists of multimedia content which can be authored and played by users of the system. In the preferred configuration ofFIG. 50, thepresentation data5020 is accessed by a “data manager”5030 within the block ofapplication elements5010, as illustrated byarrow5022. The main role of thisdata manager5030 is to make presentation data available to other system components for reading and writing (which can involve various functions for managing and manipulating data, detailed in connection withFIGS. 80 through 85).
• In addition to thedata manager5030, the block ofapplication elements5010 ofFIG. 50 shows a “presentation engine”5040, a “playback display manager”5050 and a “control display manager”5060. Thepresentation engine5040 is a mechanism, program or process which “presents” multimedia content by initiating and managing “playback processes” that output media data to one or more playback displays; in addition, an optional sub-block5046 may provide various editing functions for authoring presentation data. Theplayback display manager5050 is a system component that manages one ormore playback displays5052, each of which is a representation, such as a window in a graphical user interface (“GUI”), that displays visual content. Thecontrol display manager5060 is an optional system component that manages one ormore control displays5062, each of which is a GUI window, panel or other user interface device used to view, manage and/or edit presentation data.
• InFIG. 50, the two functional blocks shown in dotted outline, thecontrol display manager5060 and theedit manager5046, are optional blocks associated with certain categories of functionality provided by the system. With both blocks absent, the system is a “player application” that plays presentation data but does not provide editing. With theedit manager5046 present, the system can include editing functionality involving playback displays, such as any of the editing features seen in the Functional Overview which do not require a control display (the majority). With thecontrol display manager5060 present, the system can include any of the features involving control displays found in the Functional Overview. With bothblocks5060 and5046 present, the system can include any of the features and functions seen in the Functional Overview.
• In addition to the application elements shown inFIG. 50 (thedata manager5030, thepresentation engine5040, theplayback display manager5050 and the control display manager5060), the system also includes a number of typical functions and services found in many software applications. These include: (1) a “main loop” which drives the operation of the system, (2) provisions for receiving and routing user input, (3) window, menu and toolbar services, (4) memory allocation and deallocation services, (5) file access and network services, (6) audio output services, and (7) standard user interface services (buttons, checkboxes, radio buttons, text entry boxes, number boxes, dialog boxes, etc.). Because these functions and services are found in most software applications, they are not discussed in great detail, but are described in overview as follows.
• A “main loop” drives the basic operation of the system, providing two main functions. The first is to acquire user input from the local operating system and route it to the appropriate system components. The second is to issue an “update” function call to the system components on a periodic basis (in this case once per “frame,” i.e., once each time through the main loop). This update call enables the system components to perform repetitive or time-based operations, and an overall “system time” is made available so that this processing can be correlated to the passage of time.
• User input is received by the main loop and routed to thepresentation engine5040, as shown by thearrow5014, and may also be routed to thecontrol display manager5060 if one is present, as shown by thearrow5012. User input is defined in more detail later in this specification, but for the purposes of this high level view it includes user actions such as movements and clicks of a mouse or other pointing device, keystrokes on a keypad, etc. In the presently preferred implementation, user input is routed as discussed above to either the presentation engine or control display manager depending on whether the “top” window in the GUI (i.e., the most recently used window) is a playback display or control display (respectively). In the case of the top window being a playback display, theplayback display manager5050 is queried for the “presentation ID” of its top window, and that information is included with the user input when it is routed to thepresentation engine5040. In either case, when the user input involves a pointing device, the screen coordinates of the pointer are converted to the coordinate system of the top window before being passed to the appropriate system component.
• The system also provides various basic support services such as those found in many application programs. These include windowing, menuing, toolbar and user interface services, which are common in GUI-based systems. This functionality allows the various system components to create and manage GUI display fields and to add menu entries and/or toolbar icons to the GUI (as seen throughout the Functional Overview). User selection from a menu or toolbar results in the execution of a corresponding function call in the appropriate system component. In particular, certain editing capabilities in thepresentation engine5040 andcontrol display manager5060 make use of these menuing and toolbar capabilities. The system also provides typical low-level services in the form of an “OS layer,” which interfaces to the local operating system and encapsulates operating-system-specific details, revealing just the required functionality in a simplified function interface (which facilitates porting of the system to other platforms). The functionality provided by this OS layer includes various services such as memory services, file services, network services, audio services, etc.
• By following the flow of control throughFIG. 50, it can be seen how the various system components interrelate and communicate in the currently preferred embodiment of the invention. We begin with thedata manager5030. The data manager enables other system components to read and writepresentation data5020, and provides various capabilities for managing and manipulating presentation data. In the preferred embodiment of the invention, the data manager makes presentation data accessible to other system components in the form of a hierarchical data tree of one or more levels. The other system components can access the data tree by requesting listings for container objects fromdata manager5030, starting at the top level of the tree and going down the branches of the tree as needed. This data tree can include various types of object data supported by the system, and thedata manager5030 provides data reading and writing functions which can be used by the other system components to access or change particular data for specified objects.
• One system component which accesses presentation data in this way is thecontrol display manager5060. In the preferred system ofFIG. 50, the control display manager creates and manages one ormore control displays5062, each of which presents to the user a listing and other information for objects contained by a given container object. For each container object being presented in a control display, the control display manager, viapresentation data access5066, acquires a contents listing from thedata manager5030, whereupon it can present the listing to the user in the form of a “map view” or “list-view” display. Using control displays, the user can perform data management operations on containers and their contained objects, and these are illustrated byedit commands5032 going into thedata manager5030. Furthermore, thecontrol display manager5060 can display object data to the user in the form of editing screens, popup panels, etc., and these can also result in accessing ofpresentation data5066 and issuing of edit commands5032.
• By interacting with a control display viauser input5012, the user can explore and edit presentation data provided by thedata manager5030, and can also start and stop playback for one or more objects found within the presentation data. In order to accomplish the latter, thecontrol display manager5060 issues playback commands5064 to thepresentation engine5040. These playback commands5064 can also include status checking functions for monitoring the playback operations occurring in thepresentation engine5040, so that control displays can indicate the playback status of displayed objects to the user.
• When a command to start a particular object is issued to the presentation engine5040 (such as when a user clicks on an object name within a control display), thepresentation engine5040 routes the start command to itsinternal component5044, the “playback manager,” which in turn initiates one or more playback processes in response. When starting playback processes, theplayback manager5044 accessespresentation data5020 via thedata manager5030, as shown by thearrow5036, and issues commands to the “graphics engine”5042 causing that module to incorporate media data for the newly started objects into itsplayback output5048. Thisplayback output5048 is routed to theplayback display manager5050, which accepts a bitmap from the graphics engine once per frame and presents it in aplayback display5052 for the user to view.
• Once object playback has started in this way, the user can interact with the playback output being presented in the playback display, as indicated byuser input5014 going into thepresentation engine5040. Thisuser input5014 is routed to theplayback manager5044, where it may be used to trigger “playback behavior” as discussed later in this specification. Additionally, in embodiments where there is both a play mode and an edit mode and the user has entered edit mode, theuser input5014 is instead routed to theedit manager5046 in thepresentation engine5040. In edit mode, the user can perform various editing functions which cause theedit manager5046 to sendedit commands5034 to thedata manager5030, resulting in modifications to thepresentation data5020. At the same time, theedit manager5046 may issue refresh commands to theplayback manager5044 so that edits being performed by the user are reflected in theplayback output5048 presented in theplayback display5052.
• In addition to the interactions between the various system components shown inFIG. 50, certain additional component interactions can occur for various purposes as noted in the following discussion. Many of these interactions involve particular features, and in some cases they are provided to optimize the effectiveness of the user interface. While the interactions illustrated inFIG. 50 provide a good overview of the roles and relationships among the components of the system, the interactions shown are not intended to be exclusive as to the types of interactions which are possible among the various system components.
• Turning now to a second system configuration, an overall multimedia authoring and playback system, shown implemented as a “plug-in application” associated with a host application, is illustrated by block diagram inFIG. 51. As seen in the embodiment ofFIG. 51, the authoring andplayback system5100 is generally comprised of a different arrangement of many of the same components seen in the system ofFIG. 50. The system ofFIG. 51 is comprised of ahost application5102, a block of plug-inelements5110, andpresentation data5120. As with the system ofFIG. 50, thepresentation data5120 consists of multimedia content which can be authored and played by users of the system. In the preferred configuration ofFIG. 51, thepresentation data5120 is accessed by adata manager5130 within the block of plug-inelements5110, as illustrated by thearrow5122. The main role of thisdata manager5130, like the earlier data manager ofFIG. 50, is to make presentation data available to other system components for reading and writing (and as in the earlier case, this can involve various capabilities for managing and manipulating data).
• Regarding thehost application5102 in the system ofFIG. 51, various types of host applications may be able to provide the necessary hosting functionality, and these can include Web browsers, instant messaging programs, media integration platforms, server processes running on servers, etc. The host application is responsible for the manner and context in which the functionality of the present invention is presented to the user. For example, a community website which offers chat rooms or other forms of communication for its members might include options within its control interface for accessing displays and functionality associated with the present invention. Or alternatively, functionality of the present invention may be provided within the context of, or in association with, an instant messaging program. Or, the present invention may be configured as a “player” plug-in for a Web browser, either with or without editing features available. Overall, these host applications can include various types of display and interface functionality depending on the purposes at hand. In many cases this can involve functionality similar to that provided by theplayback display manager5050 andcontrol display manager5060 ofFIG. 50, as indicated within thehost application5102 by theplayback display5152 and the control display5162 (the latter being in dotted outline, as in the earlier figure, to indicate its optional nature).
• In general, the flow of control in the system ofFIG. 51, as well as the capabilities and interrelationships of the various system components, is the same as in the system ofFIG. 50, as can be seen by the similarity of the two figures. InFIG. 51, thedata manager5130 provides other system components with access to presentation data in a similar fashion as the data manager ofFIG. 50. As seen by the arrows inFIG. 51, thedata manager5130 can receive editcommands5132 from thehost application5102, and editcommands5134 from anedit manager sub-block5146 within thepresentation engine5140. Thedata manager5130 can also provide presentation data to both the host application, as shown by thearrow5166, and to thepresentation engine5140, as shown by thearrow5136.
• Also within the block of plug-inelements5110, thepresentation engine5140 manages playback processes and generates playback output, and generally performs the same functions as the presentation engine inFIG. 50. Like the earlier presentation engine, the plug-inpresentation engine5140 includes three sub-components: agraphics engine5142, aplayback manager5144 and anoptional edit manager5146, which perform the same functions as their resident application counterparts. The plug-inpresentation engine5140 can also receiveuser input5114 and playback commands5164 from thehost application5102, and can provideplayback output5148 to the host application for presentation in one or more playback displays.
• As with the system ofFIG. 50, inFIG. 51 the two blocks shown in dotted outline, thecontrol display5162 and theedit manager5146, are optional blocks associated with certain categories of functionality provided by the system. The considerations for these optional blocks in this case are the same those discussed earlier in connection with the resident application program.
• Now that the overall flow of control has been described for two configurations (resident application and plug-in application) of a software system that provides the currently preferred embodiment of the invention, a more detailed description of this preferred system is provided. The discussion begins with an explanation of some general concepts involving presentation data and system configuration. Next, a description of the system initialization procedure is provided. Finally, detailed descriptions for each of the main functional components of the system are presented. Occasionally throughout the following discussion, functionality is described specifically for the system ofFIG. 50; in such cases, similar functionality may be provided for the system ofFIG. 51 (allowing for certain differences based on host involvement, etc.). We begin with an explanation of some general concepts involving presentation data and system configuration, including an explanation of the preferred structure for the presentation data, how that structure may be adapted to handle various user scenarios, and how the concept of a “presentation” may vary according to system configuration.
• In the currently preferred embodiment of the system, the presentation data (5020,5120) is comprised of one or more databases of presentation data. An appropriate format for databases is detailed later in this specification, but in brief, the currently preferred format involves a hierarchically structured database with one container object at its top internal level that either directly or through container nesting contains the rest of the objects in the database. Each object in the database includes three forks of data: “properties data,” “setup data” and “content data.” The properties data for each object consists of data that specifies general object characteristics, such as object type, icon position, etc. The setup data for each object consists of data that specifies certain type-specific object characteristics, such as display settings for visual objects, etc. The content data for each object consists of either media data, such as text data, image data, video data, etc., or other kinds of content data appropriate for the different object types supported by the system. The specific data comprising the above “object model” is shown inFIG. 85, which is detailed later in this specification.
• At initialization time, a “root database” is specified to the data manager (5030,5130). The top container object in this root database is the “root object” for the system. This root object acts as an entry point through which the rest of the presentation data can be accessed. Throughout the system (except for the internal operations of the data manager), all objects located within the presentation data are identified using “root path” text strings, in which the first entry in the root path is the root object, the last entry in the root path identifies the object in question, and the intervening entries identify any intervening container objects. These root paths in the preferred system are equivalent to the root paths discussed earlier in the Example Scenarios section, except that in the preferred system it is assumed that the database for a root path is the root database specified at initialization time, and therefore the root database is not specified explicitly within each root path. Upon receiving a request or command with one of these root paths, the data manager performs “path resolution” on the root path to convert it into a “physical path.” In a physical path, the database is specified explicitly (and when pointer objects are involved, as in the examples ofFIGS. 46 and 47, the database may or may not be the root database). It is the physical path which is used by the data manager when it acts upon the request or command by accessing (5022,5122) presentation data via the system file services.
• After initialization, the data manager makes the path string of the root object available to other system components, and these other components can use it to query the data manager for a listing of the objects contained by the root object. While container nesting is not a requirement of the system, in embodiments where it is supported, further container listings can be queried for container objects nested within the root object, and so on. These container listings, provided by the data manager for the root object and any nested container objects beneath it, define the form of the presentation data as a hierarchical tree of one or more levels. As will become apparent later in this specification, in some configurations of the system this relatively straightforward “data tree” can hide significant complexity associated with creating and interconnecting multimedia content across a network. The data manager encapsulates this complexity away from the other system components, and therefore away from the user, which helps achieve improved clarity of structure and ease of use, both of which are advantages of the present invention.
• To understand the role of the root object, and how it's role may vary in different configurations of the system, it is important to understand that the system can also be implemented with multiple root objects instead of just one. In such an embodiment, these multiple root objects might, for example, represent different “presentations” that a user is playing, and there would likely be provisions for the user to select among them, start and stop them, etc. In the presently preferred embodiment of the system, there is just one root object at a time, i.e., only one entry point into the presentation data. This approach minimizes system complexity, and at the same time provides a versatile solution for some common user scenarios. Several such scenarios are described below, and in each case the approach of having just one root object can be successfully adapted to handle the situation. Of course, multiple root objects may also be effective for handling these or other scenarios, and the preferred system, whether using single or multiple root objects, may be implemented in a variety of configurations to handle different cases. The scenarios which follow are not intended to limit the scope of the invention, but are provided mainly to illustrate some of the ways in which the preferred system, and in particular embodiments using a single root object, can be applied and adapted.
• In a first scenario, the user is interested in launching the system in order to view a particular presentation (such as, for example, after receiving a message sent from a friend via email in the form of an executable file, or sent in the form of a playable presentation associated with an instant messaging session). For such cases, a minimum system configuration may be provided in which the root database is passed as a “launch parameter” during system initialization, and the root object (which contains the presentation) is automatically started so that the presentation starts playing immediately.
• In a second scenario, the user is interested in maintaining a “home” data tree where multiple presentations can be managed and arranged in hierarchically nested containers. For this type of scenario, a root database is maintained in an ongoing fashion as a “workspace” file (for example, there might be one such root database per registered user of the system, so that every user has their own “home” tree). The root object at the top level acts as the entry point into this data tree, and the tree extends out hierarchically from there. In this scenario, the root object is not started during initialization, but rather a control display is opened which displays the contents of the root object to the user. Various folder pointer objects (such as seen inFIGS. 35A through 37C) may be included in the data tree, and these may reference folders in the HFS of the host computer whose contents can thereby be presented in control displays (making it possible for the user to perform operations involving HFS objects, such as playing, importing, exporting, etc.).
• In a third scenario, the user is once again interested in managing multiple presentations, but rather than including all the presentations within a single workspace file, presentations are stored as individual database files in the HFS of the host computer. Once again, a root database is maintained in an ongoing fashion, but in this case it does double duty. One function of the root database is as a “scratchpad” file for the user to develop new presentations. At initialization time, a control display for the root object of this database is opened, providing a scratchpad in which the user may develop content. The other function of the root database is to make the HFS of the host computer accessible to the user. To this end, the top level root object contains a folder pointer object (as seen inFIGS. 35A through 37C) whose base folder is the local “Desktop” folder of the host computer; this folder pointer object is a “hidden” object, meaning that its icon is not displayed in the above scratchpad display for the root object. At initialization time, a second control display is opened for this hidden folder pointer object. The user develops content within the context of the root object scratchpad, and then uses this “Desktop” control display to export the content to an HFS database file via an export operation such as that seen inFIG. 37A. The user may also use this “Desktop” control display to explore the HFS, start and stop existing presentations stored in the HFS, perform import operations, etc.
• It should be noted that in the above scenarios, relatively minor changes to system operations can result in distinctly different types of user applications. These scenarios represent only a few examples of the types of situations that may be served by configurations of the preferred system. In fact, a variety of system configurations can be imagined, ranging from a minimum feature set to a complete feature set, to suit the needs of users in various scenarios.
• With such varied configurations possible, the concept of what constitutes a “presentation” may vary somewhat in different configurations of the system. To help explain what a “presentation” is in the preferred system, we first note briefly what the traditional concept of a presentation is in typical multimedia tools and systems. In typical tools and systems, a presentation is generally defined by the data format in which presentation data is organized, typically involving file formats, other data storage constructs and the like. For example, when creating a Web page using a typical site editing tool, there is an HTML file which contains the current “presentation,” and while that file may include links to other HTML files or references to external pictures or other media data, the file itself defines the scope of the presentation (i.e., one Web page). In the preferred system, this file-oriented concept of what a presentation is may apply to certain configurations of the system, for example, those in which a database file containing presentation data constitutes one presentation. However in other configurations, especially those involving pointer objects, navigation, sub-displays, etc., a less rigid sense of what constitutes a presentation is more appropriate, since a single database may contain what are in practice multiple presentations, and conversely, data from several databases may be presented in one playback display as a single presentation.
• To accommodate these various concepts of what a “presentation” is in the preferred system, the system defines a presentation in terms which are relatively flexible, allowing the system to support various configurations with minimal alteration. In the preferred system, each “presentation” is essentially the set of playing objects assigned to a given playback display, which share a common “presentation ID” associated with that playback display. Whenever an object is started, it is assigned to a presentation, meaning that its newly started playback process in the presentation engine (5040,5140) is associated with an existing presentation ID. In addition, each presentation is associated with a “master object,” and it is this object which is started or stopped when the presentation is started or stopped. With this model for defining what a presentation is, a variety of configurations for the system can be supported with minimal effort, ranging from the traditional concept of “one database per presentation,” to a more expansive concept that involves accessing content from multiple databases over a network and displaying the content in hierarchically nested sub-displays within a single playback display.
• It should be noted that in the presently preferred system, there are currently no provisions for creating additional playback displays other than the first one created during initialization (although a variety of such mechanisms can easily be imagined). Therefore, while the system is architected to support multiple presentations playing in multiple playback displays, in various places in the discussion certain details of managing this multiplicity are omitted for the sake of clarity. Whenever such omissions occur, the functionality for performing equivalent tasks in a system with multiple playback displays can be inferred directly from the functionality described.
• FIG. 52 shows an illustrated flow diagram of the initialization procedure for the presently preferred system; this initialization procedure is appropriate for most of the system configurations discussed above.Step5200 is triggered when the user launches the system. A root database may or may not be passed in as a launch parameter, depending on the manner of the launch: if the user launches the application by selecting a particular database, that database will be passed in as the root database; if the user launches the application directly, no root database will be passed in. Instep5202, the root database argument is checked, and if no root database was passed in, then instep5204 the system locates the root database by looking in a known storage location. In either case,step5206 occurs next, in which the system initializes the data manager (5030,5130) by passing it the location of the root database in the form of a Universal Resource Locator (URL), such as a file path or network address.
• Next, instep5208, the system initializes the presentation engine (5040,5140). In the followingstep5210, it calls the presentation engine to create a new presentation, specifying the top object of the root database (the root object) as the master object for the presentation; a presentation ID for the newly created presentation is returned. Next, instep5212, theplayback display manager5050 is initialized. Next, instep5214, a new playback display is opened, and it is assigned the presentation ID received instep5210.
• Instep5216, the presence or absence of the control display manager5060 (an optional system component) is checked. If one is present, it is initialized instep5218 and in step5220 a control display showing the contents of the root object is opened. Next, instep5222, the evaluation ofstep5202 is repeated. If the root database was passed in as a launch parameter, then instep5224 the root object in that database is started by issuing a playback command to the presentation engine, with the presentation ID fromstep5210 and the root object passed as arguments.Step5226, which follows, signifies that system initialization is complete.
• A detailed description of each of the main functional components of the system is now provided. The discussion begins with theplayback display manager5050 ofFIG. 50, which is the simplest component in the system. Next, thecontrol display manager5060 ofFIG. 50 is described. The discussion then proceeds with a description of the presentation engine (5040,5140) ofFIGS. 50 and 51. Finally, the data manager component (5030,5130) ofFIGS. 50 and 51 is described.
• Theplayback display manager5050, shown in the upper right ofFIG. 50, provides playback display functionality for presenting playback output to users of the system. In the preferred system, theplayback display manager5050 is a software module which can receive function calls for such functions as initialization, termination, and the opening and closing of playback displays. In response to these function calls, the playback display manager issues standard windowing calls to the system windowing services to create and manage the playback displays being presented. The playback display manager also has an update function, called once per frame, which acquires5048 a bitmap from thepresentation engine5040 for each playback display currently open, and transfers it to the system windowing services for display.
• Before discussing the details of the preferred embodiment of theplayback display manager5050, some alternate embodiments of playback display functionality are worth noting. For example, instead of presenting playback output using windows or displays in a GUI, theplayback display manager5050 might, in some system configurations, present playback output using various other output devices, such as: video output hardware connected to a video monitor or television set, a network connection that accepts visual or audio-visual output, other software applications, etc. Moreover, in the plug-in system configuration ofFIG. 51, the host application that accepts playback output from thepresentation engine5140 may also use a variety of output destinations for presenting playback output to users, and these can involve various hardware, software and network scenarios such as the above. Any or all of these alternate embodiments, as well as any other suitable means, may be used to implement playback display functionality in the present invention.
• Returning now to the presently preferred embodiment of playback display functionality, theplayback display manager5050 is a software module which receivesplayback output5048 and presents it to users via one or more playback displays5052. The playback display manager provides functions for opening and closing playback displays; in the preferred system these functions are called once each, during system initialization and termination, respectively, to open and close the playback display presented to the user. While open, the playback display presents playback output associated with a particular presentation ID. When the function for opening a playback display is called by the initialization routine, it is passed a presentation ID as an argument to specify which playback output is intended for that playback display. This presentation ID is used in the update function once each frame when the playback display manager acquires5048 a new bitmap from thepresentation engine5040.
• The left side ofFIG. 53 shows a flow diagram of the function for opening a new playback display, as implemented within theplayback display manager5050 ofFIG. 50. The function begins atstep5300, when it is called by the system initialization function ofFIG. 52 with a presentation ID passed as an argument. Instep5302, the presentation ID from the previous step is compared against those of any already open playback displays, and if a match is found, the function makes that window thetop window5304 and exits5306. Otherwise, instep5308, the engine mode (edit or play) and the presentation name (typically that of the current master object for the presentation) are acquired from thepresentation engine5040 based on the presentation ID fromstep5300. Next, instep5310, the mode and name from the previous step are combined to create the window title (this provision for a window title, as in the Functional Overview, is optional). Next, instep5312, a new window with the window title of the last step is created by calling the system window services, and a window ID is returned. Next, instep5314, the presentation ID, window ID and window title of the previous steps are stored in the playbackdisplay data structure5320. Next, the update function is called5316 to fill the window with its initial content, after which the function exits5318.
• The right side ofFIG. 53 shows a flow diagram of the playback display update function, as implemented within theplayback display manager5050 ofFIG. 50. The function begins atstep5322 when it receives its periodic call from the main loop. Instep5324, the engine mode and presentation name are acquired from the presentation engine5040 (as was done instep5308, but this time based on the presentation ID stored in the data structure5320). Next, instep5326, the mode and name are combined to create the window title (which, as before, is optional). Next, instep5328, the window title from the previous step is compared with the window title stored in thedata structure5320, and if they are not the same, then instep5330 the playback display (via the window services) and thedata structure5320 are updated accordingly. Next, instep5332, the size of the bitmap needed to fill the content area of the playback display (excluding window title, borders, etc.) is acquired from the window services using the window ID stored in thedata structure5320. Next, instep5334, a bitmap is acquired from thepresentation engine5040 by passing it the presentation ID stored in thedata structure5320, a bitmap buffer, and the bitmap size from the previous step. Next instep5336, the bitmap acquired in the previous step is passed to the system window services along with the window ID stored in thedata structure5320, causing the bitmap to be displayed in the playback display. With that, the update function is done5338.
• In addition to the above functions for opening and updating playback displays, theplayback display manager5050 also includes typical functions for closing playback displays, and for initialization and termination, as well as a query function that allows other system components to query the presentation ID of the top playback display. This latter function is part of the additional component interactions mentioned above, and is called by the main loop when routing user input and by thecontrol display manager5060 when starting an object. In the preferred system, since there is only one playback display, the presentation ID is simply returned from thedata structure5320. If there were multiple playback displays, theplayback display manager5050 would maintain a separate instance of thedata structure5320 for each playback display, and would return the presentation ID from the instance of the data structure that corresponds to the most recently active playback display.
• We now turn to a discussion of thecontrol display manager5060, shown in the upper left ofFIG. 50. The control display manager provides one or more control displays in which the objects contained in a particular container object are displayed either as icons arranged on a background (map view) or as names in a list (list view). Depending on which features are implemented in the system as a whole, control displays can provide various capabilities for users to view and interact with presentation data, and these can include: (1) starting and stopping of objects as seen in FIGS.29A-B, (2) visual indication of object playback status using intensity-modulated halos as seen inFIG. 29A, (3) visual representation for relations and actions among objects as seen in FIGS.30A-B, (4) exploration of hierarchically arranged presentation data as seen in FIGS.33A-B, (5) synchronized exploration of presentation data as seen in FIGS.38A-B, and (6) exploration with zooming enhancement as seen in FIGS.45A-C. Each of the above capabilities may be provided in either map view or list view.
• In addition to the above functionality, control displays may also be configured to provide various other useful functions that might be typical for such displays. This can include functions for managing and organizing presentation data (such as dragging icons to move or copy objects, etc.), as well as functions for editing media data in one or more “editing screens” (such as a text editor or picture editor). Moreover, the control display manager provides two functions which are part of the additional component interactions mentioned earlier. The first is a query function which allows other system components to query the most recently selected object in a control display; this query function allows thepresentation engine5040, in its handling of user commands, to support object selection via a control display. The second is a function which allows other system components to initiate control display exploration by causing the top control display to “explore” to a specified container; this function is called by thepresentation engine5040 during user navigation, which causes the top control display to perform synchronized exploration as cited above.
• As mentioned earlier, thecontrol display manager5060 is an optional system component, in that many of the features of the present invention can be successfully implemented without this component in the system. In the following discussion, which describes the currently preferred implementation of the control display manager, the full set of control display functionality is described. It should be understood that not all of the functions discussed are essential to the invention, nor even essential to the successful implementation of other control display features. Depending on system configuration, various portions of the full functionality described below may be omitted.
• In the preferred embodiment shown inFIG. 50, thecontrol display manager5060 is a software module which can receive function calls for such functions as initialization, termination, the opening and closing of control displays, and user input handling. Thecontrol display manager5060 uses the system window services to create control displays, and has an update function called once per frame in which it renders a bitmap for each open control display and transfers the bitmap to the system window services for display. This update function monitors and indicates the playback status of displayed objects, and is responsible for creating a “zooming” effect to visually enhance hierarchical transitions occurring during user exploration.
• The left side ofFIG. 54 shows a flow diagram of the function for opening a new control display, as implemented within thecontrol display manager5060 ofFIG. 50. The function begins atstep5400, when it is called by the system initialization function ofFIG. 52 with the path of a “display object” passed as an argument. Instep5402, the display object from the previous step is compared against those of any already open control displays, and if a match is found, the function makes that window thetop window5404 and exits5406. Otherwise, instep5408, the name of the display object is extracted from the last segment of the path fromstep5400, and instep5410, a window title is created by combining the text string “Control:” with the name extracted in the previous step. Next, instep5412, a new window with the window title of the previous step is created by calling the system window services, and a window ID is returned. Next, instep5414, the display object and window ID of the above steps, as well as a view mode that defaults to map view (which can later be switched by the user), are stored in a new instance of the control display data structure5426 (a separate instance of which is created and maintained for each new control display). Next, instep5416, the “selected object” variable5428 is initialized to null. Next, instep5418, the update function is called to initially render the window contents, and then the function exits5420.
• On the right side ofFIG. 54 is a query function, discussed above, which allows other system components to query the control display manager for the object most recently selected in a control display. The function begins atstep5422, when it is called by thepresentation engine5040. The operation of the function consists of asingle step5424, which is to return the address of the “selected object” variable5428 (a character array containing the path string of the most recently selected object; this path string is updated every time a user selects an object icon in a control display).
• FIG. 55 shows a flow diagram of the control display update function, as implemented within thecontrol display manager5060 ofFIG. 50. The function begins atstep5500, when it receives its periodic call from the main loop. For every control display currently open (i.e., for every instance of the controldisplay data structure5426 ofFIG. 54), the update function performs its update procedures as follows. Instep5502 it queries thedata manager5030 for the properties data of the display object specified in the controldisplay data structure5426. Next, instep5504, it checks to see if the query of the previous step was successful, and if not, then instep5506 the control display window is closed and the function returns with anerror code5508. Otherwise, if the properties data query ofstep5502 was successful, then instep5510 the properties data is examined to determine whether or not the display object is a container object.
• If the display object is a container object, then instep5512 the data manager is queried for the list of objects contained within the display object. Next, a loop goes through the list of contained objects, starting at thefirst object5514, which becomes the “current object.” At the top of theloop5516, a “current object path” string is created by appending the name of the current object to the display object path stored in the controldisplay data structure5426. Next, in step5518, using the current object path from the previous step, thepresentation engine5040 anddata manager5030 are queried for the playback status and object properties (respectively) of the current object; the returned information is stored for later use in the rendering portion of this function. Next, instep5520, a check is performed to determine whether the end of the list has been reached, and if it has not been reached, then instep5522 the current object is set to the next object on the list, and the operation of the function proceeds to the top of theloop5516 for another iteration.
• When the end of the list is reached instep5520, then instep5524 the view mode previously stored in the controldisplay data structure5426 is checked. If the view mode is list view, then operation of the function continues atstep5530. Otherwise, if the view mode is map view, then instep5526 the zoom and scroll settings of the control display are updated to provide zooming into and out of icons during user exploration. To create a zoom effect, new zoom and scroll settings are calculated based on the current “zoom state” (none, zoom-in, zoom-out) and the elapsed time since the most recent exploration action; these new settings are applied to the control display using standard scaling and scrolling functions. Next, the operation of the function continues atstep5530.
• Returning to step5510, if the properties data examined in that step specifies that the display object is not a container object, then instep5528 the data manager is queried for the content data of the display object, which is stored for later use in the rendering portion of this function. Instep5530, the bitmap size for the content portion of the control display window (excluding window title, borders, etc.) is acquired from the system window services using the window ID stored in the controldisplay data structure5426. Instep5532, a bitmap of the appropriate size is rendered (as discussed in the following paragraphs). Once the bitmap is rendered, instep5534 the bitmap is passed to the system window services for display, and the function is done5536.
• Regarding the rendering functionality ofstep5532, above, in the case of display objects which are not containers, each object type has its own standard type of editing screen which is rendered: a text object has a text editor, a picture object has a picture editor, etc. One somewhat less standard type of editor which may be rendered is the editing screen for vector objects; a vector object is a timeline with changing numbers, and the currently preferred editing screen for this type of object is similar to editing screens used for MIDI continuous controller data in typical MIDI sequencer programs. In any event, for non-container objects, the rendering step of the control display update function uses the display object's type (acquired as part of the properties data in step5502) and its content data (acquired in step5528) to render an appropriate editing screen that displays the object's content data and allows users to modify the data.
• In cases where the rendering functionality ofstep5532 is rendering a display object which is a container object, then what it renders is the set of objects contained in that container object. Either a map view or a list view is used, depending on the view mode stored in the controldisplay data structure5426. Both views are similar to typical views provided by standard windowing operating systems, such as Windows® or MacOS®, and the rendering functionality in the present invention is implemented using many of the same techniques found in those systems. There are, however, some significant differences from those standard systems that arise out of various control display features mentioned above, including visual indication of object playback status and visual representation for relations and actions among objects. These features are handled in the rendering step of the control display update function as discussed in the following paragraphs.
• One area where the control display rendering functionality differs from that of standard windowing operating systems is in the visual indication of object playback status, as seen inFIG. 29A. Unlike in standard windowing operating systems, in the present invention objects may play, and thecontrol display manager5060 of the preferred system provides visual indication as to the current status of playback for each object in a control display. To do this it makes use of the playback status information that was stored for each object in step5518 of the update function ofFIG. 55. Using this information, the rendering functionality of the control display manager draws a “halo” behind the icon of every object that is playing. This halo is created by first placing a filled white circle behind the icon, and then applying an alpha (opacity) map to the circle whereby the alpha decreases further from the center of the circle, producing a highlight glow behind the icon.
• In the most preferred embodiment, not only is this playback status indicated as on or off, but the level of playback activity is indicated as well by varying the brightness of the halo. To accomplish this, the playback status acquired in step5518 includes not only a flag specifying if the object is playing, but also a percentage between 0 and 100 that characterizes the degree of “activity” of the object (such as might vary during entrances, exits, etc.). Then, when the halo is drawn, its overall alpha is scaled by this activity level to provide the desired effect. Of course it should be noted that highlighted halos are merely one possible way to provide indication of object playback status, and many other approaches may be effective depending on system implementation (such as, for example, making icon names bold for objects that are playing, etc.).
• Another area where the control display rendering functionality differs from that of standard windowing operating systems is in the visual representation of relations and actions among objects, as seen in FIGS.30A-B. This functionality operates differently depending on whether the control display is in map view or list view. Each of these is now discussed in turn.
• In map view, as seen inFIG. 30A, relations between objects are displayed as lines between icons. To accomplish this, the control display manager aquires from the presentation engine5040 a listing of the relations among the objects whose icons it is showing, to determine which pairs of icons should have lines drawn between them (only one line is drawn per icon pair). In addition, the control display manager also aquires from the presentation engine information regarding the nature of the relations between any two objects, including an “activity level” for each such relation (more detail on how this is accomplished is provided in the discussion of the presentation engine).
• Using the above information, the rendering functionality of the control display manager draws not only lines between icons, but also, for each relation existing between two objects, places along the line between their icons an informative colored “bead” which symbolizes the programming function used to create the relation in question (in the case of an object with a relation to itself, the bead is drawn on top of the object icon). This representation of relations between objects makes it easier for users to visualize the structure of programmed object behavior. Moreover, based on the returned activity level for each relation, when a relation has recently been triggered, the control display manager “lights up” the bead (by placing a brighter version of the bead on top of the original and adjusting the opacity of the brighter version), and also “wiggles” the corresponding line between the two icons (by swapping in alternate curved versions of the line every frame). These indications of relation-based activity between objects allow users to follow programmed object behavior as it unfolds during presentation playback.
• In list view, as seen inFIG. 30B, relations between objects are displayed using only the beads discussed in the previous paragraph, since lines between icons would not be appropriate. As above, the control display manager aquires information from thepresentation engine5040, in this case provided as a listing of relations (and their activity levels) for each individual object in a given container. More detail on how this is accomplished is provided in the discussion of the presentation engine, but in brief, each relation which is “directional” (as explained in the discussion of the sentence programming paradigm ofFIGS. 9A through 27D) is listed only for the acting object, while each relation which is “non-directional” is listed for both objects. In addition, for each relation associated with a given object, a listing of “partner objects” connected to that relation may be aquired from the presentation engine.
• Using the above information, the control display manager draws beads for each object next to that object's entry in the list view display. Also, as above, when a relation has been recently active, the control display manager “lights up” the corresponding bead or beads, and in the case of a directional relation where only one bead is displayed next to the acting object, the list enty of the object being acted upon is highlighted as well. Moreover, in order for users to be able to manually determine which object or objects a given bead is associated with (other than the object it is drawn next to), user input handling is provided as follows. When the user clicks and holds on a bead in list view, if it is a directional bead, the bead is lit up (as above) and the list entry of the object being acted upon is highlighted; if it is a non-directional bead, it and all the beads related to it are lit up (including beads related through the transitive principle, as discussed earlier in connection with the sentence programming paradigm).
• In addition to the functions detailed above for creating and updating control displays, thecontrol display manager5060 also includes provisions for handling user input as follows. If a control display is presenting an editing screen for the content data of a non-container object, the user input handling functionality is similar to that offered in many popular programs for editing text, pictures, video, etc. Otherwise, if a control display shows the contents of a container object, then as with the rendering functionality discussed above, much of the user input handling is similar to that found in standard windowing operating systems such as Windows® or MacOS® (especially the more common functions such as dragging, selecting, exploring, data management, etc.). There are, however, some significant differences from these standard windowing operating systems that arise out of various control display features mentioned above, such as the starting and stopping of objects. Moreover, some of the more traditional functions, such as exploring, data management, etc., involve certain preferred choices that deserve mention. These noteworthy aspects of user input handling in thecontrol display manager5060 are described as follows.
• One area where user input handling in control displays differs from that of standard windowing operating systems is the starting and stopping of objects. In the present invention, when the user clicks on the name of an object, either in icon view or list view, the object is started if it is not already playing, and stopped if it is already playing. This toggling of playback is accomplished via playback commands5064 issued to thepresentation engine5040 by thecontrol display manager5060. When the control display manager issues one of these playback commands to the presentation engine, in addition to passing as an argument the path of the object being started or stopped, it also queries the presentation ID of the top playback display from theplayback display manager5050 and passes that as well.
• Regarding control display user input handling functions which are found in standard windowing operating systems, but still involve certain noteworthy aspects, the exploration of hierarchically structured presentation data in the preferred system involves certain aspects worthy of mention. In the control display of the preferred system, double-clicking on a container object causes the control display to switch to a view of the contents of that object, and this switch is emphasized by “zooming in” to the double-clicked container object as discussed above. Double-clicking on a media object causes the control display to switch over to an editing screen for media objects of that type (also with zooming). After having explored an object as above, pressing the “escape” key or selecting an “up” button in the GUI causes the display to switch from its current container or editing screen (also with zooming) to a view for the enclosing container object (in which the object previously being “explored” is now one of the contained items). With the exception of the zooming, which involves setting a variable to notify the rendering functionality that a zoom is in progress, all of the input handling for these operations is provided using typical input handling functionality as found in standard windowing operating systems.
• Finally, two further non-standard pieces of functionality associated with control display user input handling are noteworthy. The first is that whenever the users clicks on an object in a control display, or on the background of a control display, thecontrol display manager5060 notifies thepresentation engine5040 by calling (respectively) the “cmd object click” and “cmd background click” functions of theedit manager5046. This notification, which is part of the additional component interactions mentioned earlier, allows object selection and background selection in control displays to be integrated into the editing functions provided by the edit manager. The second is that whenever the user drags a control display icon from a control display to a playback display (as shown inFIG. 3B), the control display manager calls the “handle edit command” function of the edit manager (specifying “duplicate” as the command) and then calls the “cmd background click” function (specifying the playback display location), resulting in a copy of the selected data being incorporated into the current presentation.
• We now turn to a discussion of the presentation engine (5040,5140) ofFIGS. 50 and 51.FIG. 56 shows a block diagram5600 of the currently preferred embodiment of the presentation engine. Within thepresentation engine5600, theplayback manager5620 provides playback of objects by managing playback processes. This playback manager, in response to playback commands5624 anduser input5626, accesses5622 presentation data from the data manager (5030,5130) and issues graphics calls5628 to thegraphics engine5660. Thegraphics engine5660 providesplayback output5662 to one or more playback displays in the form of bitmaps acquired once per frame. In the present system, user editing of presentation data takes place within an “edit mode,” during which theplayback manager5620, after receivinguser input5626, routes it5642 to the edit manager5640 (an optional system element that may be omitted in configurations where user editing of presentation data is not supported). Theedit manager5640 responds to theuser input5642 by modifying presentation data via edit commands5646 issued to the data manager, and also provides refresh calls5644 to the playback manager to keep playback processes and playback output up to date as objects are being edited. More detailed descriptions of each of these sub-blocks of the presentation engine (playback manager5620,edit manager5640 and graphics engine5660) are provided as follows, beginning with the playback manager.
• FIG. 57 shows a block diagram of the internal structure of the playback manager ofFIG. 56. The diagram shows that the functionality of the playback manager may be further divided into sub-blocks, each providing a different type of functionality. Depending on system configuration, one or more of these sub-blocks may be omitted if the functionality provided is not needed. Following the flow of control through theplayback manager5700 ofFIG. 57, we begin with the userinput handling block5780, which interpretsincoming user input5782 and in response issues commands to any of the other functional blocks. For example, if the incoming user input consists of a command to start playback for a particular presentation, such as by clicking on thecommand icon808 ofFIG. 8A, the userinput handling block5780 issues aplayback command5786 to theplayback processing block5720 indicating that a playback process for the appropriate container object should be started. Theplayback processing block5720, which can also respond to playback commands5722 from outside the playback manager (such as might come from the control display manager as discussed earlier), is responsible for managing the playback processes that comprise object playback. More detail on these playback processes is provided shortly, but in general, starting a playback process involves readingpresentation data5724 from the data manager (5030,5130) and issuing graphics calls5728 to the graphics engine.
• Once playback processing is underway within theplayback processing block5720 ofFIG. 57, various operations and events occurring in the playback processing can involve programmed object behavior based on “low-level relations.” In the preferred system, low-level relations are a specific form of data used to implement the various programmed relations seen throughout the Functional Overview; the nature and operation of these low-level relations is detailed at length later in this discussion. Whenever such an operation or event involving these low-level relations occurs, theplayback processing block5720 issues afunction call5762 to the relation-basedcommunications block5760. This relation-based communications block5760 may also receivefunction calls5768 from the userinput handling block5780 in response to user actions occurring in the playback display. The operation of this relation-based communications block5760 is detailed inFIG. 67, but briefly, upon receiving a function call from one of the above sources, it acquires5766 a listing of relevant low-level relations from the data manager, determines what if any action needs to be taken, and if appropriate, issues one or more function calls5764 to theplayback processing block5720 to start or stop objects or read object parameters.
• Also seen within theplayback manager5700 ofFIG. 57 is a fourth functional block, thenavigation block5740, which provides user navigation functionality (as seen in FIGS.38A-B and in other figures where navigation is combined with other features). Thisnavigation block5740 receives afunction call5742 from theplayback processing block5720 whenever a navigable container object that is not associated with a sub-display is started (which is one of the triggers for navigation in the present system), and also receives afunction call5744 from the userinput handling block5780 whenever the user double-clicks on a sub-display associated with a navigable container object, or clicks on the “back navigation” button in the GUI (which are two other triggers for navigation in the present system). In response to these function calls, thenavigation block5740 executes the required navigation as detailed inFIGS. 69 and 70. Finally,FIG. 57 shows that when the system is in edit mode, the userinput handling block5780 receivesincoming user input5782 and routes it5784 to theedit manager5640 ofFIG. 56, which in turn may issue refresh calls5726 to theplayback processing block5720.
• Turning now toFIG. 58, we see the internal structure of the playback processing block ofFIG. 57. As seen inFIG. 58, theplayback processing block5800 consists of three sub-blocks as follows. The playback commandsblock5820 receives playback commands5822 and5824, which can include commands for creating new presentations, commands for starting and stopping objects, as well as various query functions that allow other modules to acquire information such as the playback status for a particular object, the activity level for a particular object, etc. A second sub-block, theupdate function block5840, is called by the main loop once per frame and performs periodic and time-based processing for object playback. In some configurations, thisupdate function block5840 may also makenavigation calls5802 to thenavigation block5740 ofFIG. 57 (such as to trigger “back navigation” when the current presentation has stopped playing).
• A third sub-block inFIG. 58, the type-specific functions block5860, provides functionality for those aspects of object playback which differ according to object type. This type-specific functions block5860 contains a sub-module for each object type supported by the system. Both the playback commandsblock5820 and theupdate function block5840, when performing operations on particular objects, issue subroutine calls5826 and5842 (respectively) to the appropriate one of these sub-modules whenever type-specific handling is required. For example, when a picture object is started, it is the picture-specific sub-module that actually issues graphics calls5862 to the graphics engine to display the image data for the object being started. Likewise, it is the container-specific sub-module that issues anavigation call5802 whenever a navigable container object that is not associated with a sub-display is started. Also, during edit mode, it is these type-specific sub-modules which receive refresh calls5864 from the edit manager to keep playback processing in accord with user editing. Moreover in some cases, these type-specific sub-modules may makefunction calls5828 to the playback commandsblock5820, for example, when the starting of a container object is propagated to its contained items (as seen inFIG. 8A). Finally, any of the three sub-blocks5820,5840 and5860 within the overallplayback processing block5800 may access5808 presentation data as needed from the data manager (5030,5130), and blocks5820 and5860 may also send5804 and/or receive5806 function calls to and from the relation-based communications block5760 ofFIG. 57.
• Turning now toFIG. 59, the left side of the figure shows a flow diagram of the function for creating a new presentation, as implemented within the playback commands block5820 ofFIG. 58. The function begins atstep5900 when it is called by the initialization procedure ofFIG. 52, with the path of a “master object” passed as an argument. Instep5902, a function call is issued to the graphics engine to create a new “draw list.” In the present embodiment, a draw list is a data structure in the graphics engine that includes a unique “canvas ID,” a list of graphical items and their display settings, and various global settings that affect the way the draw list is rendered (such as background color, zoom setting, scroll settings, etc.). When the call to the graphics engine instep5902 returns, it returns the canvas ID of the newly created draw list structure; this canvas ID becomes the “master canvas ID” for the presentation being created. Next, instep5904, the master object path fromstep5900 and the master canvas ID fromstep5902 are stored in a presentation data structure5908 (a separate instance of this data structure is created for each new presentation). Finally, instep5906, the master canvas ID fromstep5902 is returned to the caller, so that it may be used as a presentation ID to identify the newly created presentation in subsequent calls to the presentation engine.
• The right side ofFIG. 59 shows a flow diagram of the function for starting an object, as implemented within the playback commands block5820 ofFIG. 58. The function begins atstep5912 when it is called, with an object path and canvas ID as arguments, from one of the following functional blocks: the type-specific functions block5860 ofFIG. 58; the userinput handling block5780 ofFIG. 57; the relation-based communications block5760 ofFIG. 57; or thecontrol display manager5060 ofFIG. 50. Instep5914, a check is made to see if the canvas ID fromstep5912 is valid; if it is not recognized as a canvas ID which is currently in use, then the function returns with anerror5920. Otherwise, instep5916, the data manager is queried using the object path fromstep5912 to aquire various object properties (object type, setup change count, content change count and icon position, the last of which is used only for error checking and not for display). Next, instep5918, the return code from the previous step is checked, and if it is a failure code, the object may no longer exist or may be inaccessible, and the function returns with anerror5920.
• Otherwise, instep5922, an object state data structure5910 (OSDS) is allocated using the system memory services. Next, instep5924, the fields of theOSDS5910 are initialized using the object path and canvas ID fromstep5912, and the object properties fromstep5916. Next, instep5926, the OSDS is added to the object list in thepresentation data structure5908. Next, instep5928, a function call is issued to the object start function within the appropriate type-specific sub-module in the type-specific functions block5860 ofFIG. 58, with the OSDS from the previous steps passed as an argument. Oncestep5928 has returned, the function is complete5930.
• In addition to the two functions just described (create new presentation and start object), the playback commands block5820 ofFIG. 58 also includes the following functions. A “stop object” function is provided to stop playback for a specified object; this stop function receives an object path as an argument, then it finds the OSDS for the specified object and calls the appropriate type-specific stop function with the OSDS as an argument. A status checking function is also provided for querying the playback status of a specified object; this status checking function receives an object path as an argument, and it determines whether or not an active OSDS for the specified object is included in a presentation object list, returning the result as true or false. The above status checking function also returns a value specifying the object's activity level on a continuous scale, such as a percent from 0 to 100; this value is derived from certain variables involved with entrance and exit processing which are detailed later in connection with the type-specific functions block5860.
• FIG. 60 shows a flow diagram for the presentation update function, as implemented within theupdate function block5840 ofFIG. 58. The function begins atstep6000 when it receives its periodic call from the main loop. For every instance of thepresentation data structure5908 ofFIG. 59, the update function performs its update procedures as follows. Instep6002, it checks whether the object list in thepresentation data structure5908 is empty. If the list is empty, then in step6004 a function call is issued to the “navigate back” function in thenavigation block5740 ofFIG. 57, which performs back navigation if it is pending. After that, the function is done6006. Otherwise, if the object list evaluated instep6002 is not empty, then instep6008 the mode of the system is checked, and if the system is in edit mode, a function call is issued to the “update edit” function in theedit manager block5640 ofFIG. 56, which performs any required edit processing. Next, instep6010, a “current object” variable is initialized to the object path from thefirst OSDS5910 in the object list of thepresentation data structure5908. Instep6012, the data manager is queried using this current object path from the previous step, and various object properties are returned (object type, setup change count, content change count, icon position). Next, instep6014, the return code from the previous step is checked, and if it is a failure code, then the object may be unavailable or it may have been renamed since the previous call to this function.
• To determine whether the current object is really gone or just renamed, in step6016 a temporary path string is created specifying the container object that contains the current object; this temporary path string is created by copying the current object path into the temporary path string and deleting the last segment from it (the current object's name). Instep6018, using this container path, the data manager is queried for a listing of the objects in the same container as the current object. Instep6020, the properties data for each object in this listing is aquired from the data manager and examined. Instep6022, if any object in the listing is found to have the same properties data as the presently unavailable current object, it is assumed that the object with the same properties is in fact the current object, and the current object has merely been renamed by the user since the last call to this function. In this case, instep6024, the path of the newly found object (which is the correct path for the current object) is written into the object path of theOSDS5910 for the current object, and operation continues atstep6012. Otherwise, if no object is found with the same properties as the current object, it is assumed that the current object is gone or unavailable, and instep6026 theOSDS5910 for the current object is purged from the object list of thepresentation data structure5908, and operation continues atstep6036.
• Returning to step6014, if the check determines thatstep6012 was successful, then instep6028 the setup change count and content change count acquired instep6012 are compared against those stored inside theOSDS5910 for the current object. If there is a discrepancy between either the two setup change counts or the two content change counts, that means that the setup data and/or content data of the current object has changed since the last update and needs to be refreshed. This is accomplished by calling the appropriate type-specific refresh function instep6030, which is skipped if there has been no change to the setup or content. Next, instep6032, the update function in the appropriate type-specific sub-module is called to perform any time-based processing needed for the current object. Next, instep6034, if the OSDS for the current object is the last OSDS in the object list of thepresentation data structure5908, then the update function is done6038. Otherwise, instep6036, the current object is set to the next object in the object list, and another iteration of the loop begins atstep6012.
• We now turn to a discussion of the functionality found in the type-specific functions block5860 ofFIG. 58. Depending on system configuration, different object types may be supported by the system, and for each object type supported, the type-specific functions block5860 includes a type-specific sub-module that provides a set of functions for performing operations which vary according to object type. The function set provided by each type-specific sub-module includes: start function, stop function, update function, refresh function, communication response function and communication query function. These six functions, which are implemented uniquely for each object type, are referred to as type-specific functions (TSFs).
• In the currently preferred embodiment of the system, the following object types are supported: picture objects, text objects, video objects, sound objects, vector objects, script objects, container objects and container control objects. These eight object types, times six functions each, yields a total of forty-eight individual TSFs. Rather than illustrating all forty-eight of these TSFs, various representative TSFs are shown in the flow diagrams ofFIGS. 61 through 66, and special considerations for the remaining TSFs are noted as appropriate in the accompanying text.
• Before proceeding with the discussion of the TSFs, some general points should be noted. First, a special object type supported by the present system is the container control object (CCO), which is used to provide various useful capabilities associated with container objects; in the present system, each container object contains a single CCO. Second, some or all of the CCO functionality described in the following discussion may, in an alternate implementation, be included within the type-specific sub-module for container objects (this is especially likely in system configurations where CCOs are not supported). Third, throughout the type-specific functionality described in the following discussion, various operations are performed which involve the relation-based communications block5760 ofFIG. 57; to help clarify the overall logic behind these operations, an overview of the relation-based communications functionality of the preferred system is now provided.
• In the preferred system, a real-time method of object communications is provided to implement the various forms of programmed object behavior that were represented in the Functional Overview as relations (the curved lines between objects). Two types of communications are provided for this purpose. The first type is when a trigger “event” causes one or more “actions” to be executed in response; this type of communication is used to implement the behavior discussed in connection withFIGS. 9A through 26D. The second type is when an information “sink” queries data from one or more information “sources;” this type of communication is used to implement the behavior discussed in connection with FIGS.27A-D and28A (involving vector objects). In the first case, that of an “event-action” relation, the trigger event might be the starting or stopping of an object, expiration of an object timer, etc., and the triggered action is typically the starting or stopping of another (or the same) object. In the second case, that of a “sink-source” relation, the information sink is typically an update process which needs to update a display setting or other object parameter, and the information source is typically a readable value in another (or the same) object. In either case, the initiating operation (the event or sink) occurs within the type-specific functions block5860, and results in the issuing of a function call to the relation-based communications block5760 ofFIG. 57 to trigger the action or read the data.
• As implemented in the preferred system, the above object communication model is based on “low-level relations.” A low-level relation is a piece of data which relates two objects (which can be one and the same object) that are directly contained within a container, by specifying each object name of the two objects and the name and type of a relational capablity for each object (capability types include: event, action, sink and source). Essentially, each low-level relation signifies a relationship between two objects according to a specified capability for each object; a low-level relation can be thought of as connecting two capabilities to form an “event-action” or “sink-source” pair. The data manager system component (5030,5130) makes available a listing of the low-level relations for the objects contained in a given container object, as well as a listing of any partner objects for a given object and capability.
• One main advantage of these low-level relations is that they provide a convenient way to implement the various forms of programmed object behavior discussed in connection withFIGS. 9A through 27D andFIG. 28A. Throughout the Functional Overview, this behavior is represented by relations, which are shown as curved lines between objects. For the remainder of this specification, a distinction is made between these relations of the Functional Overview, which are hereinafter referred to as “high-level relations,” and the low-level relations just described. The essence of the distinction is that high-level relations define behavior without regard for how that behavior is implemented, whereas low-level relations are associated with a specific mechanism for implementing the behavior. Throughout the remainder of the specification, whenever relations or relation-based communications are mentioned, unless otherwise noted it is low-level relations and their associated communication operations which are being described.
• In the preferred system, each high-level relation is implemented using one or more low-level relations. Most high-level relations can be implemented as a single low-level relation, but in some cases, a single high-level relation may require up to four low-level relations. For example, the function ofFIG. 17, “objects A and B play together,” is implemented as a combination of four low-level relations: (1) object A “starting” event =>object B “start” action; (2) object A “stopping” event =>object B “stop” action; (3) object B “starting” event =>object A “start” action; and (4) object B “stopping” event =>object A “stop” action. Note that in this example, a set of four low-level relations consisting of eight object names and eight capability names and types is equivalent to one high-level relation specifying a particular relationship between two objects.
• In the preferred system, whenever the user executes one of the programming commands discussed in connection withFIGS. 9A through 27D, theedit manager5640 ofFIG. 56 handles the command by translating from the high-level relation specified by the command into one or more low-level relations, which it creates via the data manager. The exact translation between high-level relations and low-level relations is detailed in connection with theedit manager5640. In addition, in the same way that the data manager provides listings of low-level relations and associated information, the relation-based communications block5760 ofFIG. 57 provides listings and associated information for high-level relations, which it derives by accessing low-level relations from the data manager and performing a translation similar to that of the edit manager but in reverse.
• Now that the overall framework of relation-based communications in the preferred system has been explained, a detailed description is provided for the functionality of the type-specific functions block5860 ofFIG. 58 as follows.FIGS. 61 and 62 present flow diagrams for four picture-specific functions: “start picture object,” “stop picture object,” “refresh picture object” and “update picture object;” corresponding functions for other object types are discussed in reference to these picture object functions.FIG. 63 presents a flow diagram for a video processing function that provides video playback.FIGS. 64 and 65 present flow diagrams for three container control object functions: “start container control object,” “stop container control object” and “update container control object.” Finally,FIG. 66 presents some examples of communication response and communication query functions.
• The left side ofFIG. 61 shows a flow diagram of the function for starting a picture object, as implemented within the type-specific functions block5860 ofFIG. 58. The function begins atstep6100 when it is called by the object start function ofFIG. 59 with an object state data structure (OSDS)5910 passed as an argument. This OSDS, in addition to including the variables shown inFIG. 59, includes additional variables associated with type-specific functionality. In the case of the present picture functionality, those additional variables are shown in thedata structure6120 ofFIG. 61. Instep6102, the picture start function queries the data manager for the setup data and content data of the picture object specified in the OSDS fromstep6100. Next, instep6104, the return code from the previous step is checked, and if it was not a success, the function returns with anerror6106. Otherwise, in step6108, a function call is issued to the graphics engine to add the picture content fromstep6102 to the draw list specified by the canvas ID stored in theOSDS5910, and an item ID for the newly added picture is returned. Next, instep6110, the display settings for the newly added picture are initialized, as per stored information in the setup data fromstep6102, by calling the appropriate graphics engine functions with the canvas ID, item ID and desired value as arguments.
• Next, instep6112, the type-specific variables6120 in theOSDS5910 from step6100 (hereinafter referred to as the TSF-OSDS) are initialized as follows. The “setup data” is set to the setup data returned instep6102. The “item ID” is set to the item ID returned in step6108. The “start time” is set to the current system time as per a function call to the system services. The “adjusted start time” is set to the current system time minus any time spent in edit mode since the initialization of the system; this adjusted start time allows the progress of certain time-based operations (such as timers expiring, video playing, etc.) to be determined based exclusively on time spent in play mode. The “trans type” is set to the appropriate entrance type as per the setup data ofstep6102, or is set to null if no entrance is specified. If an entrance is specified, the “trans start time” is set to the current system time and the “trans end time” is set to the current system time plus the entrance duration specified in the setup data. Next, instep6114, a function call is issued to the “handle event” function in the relation-based communications block5760 ofFIG. 57, specifying the current picture object and the event name “starting.” Next, instep6116, the picture update function is called, and when that function returns, the present function is done6118.
• Alternatively,step6112 provides additional functionality in configurations which support tweening as seen in FIGS.28B-D. This additional functionality evaluates “Tween” relations accessed via the data manager to determine if another object sharing the same canvas ID is the “tween partner” for the present object. If there is such a tween partner, the trans variables in the TSF-OSDS6120 for both the present object and its tween partner, as well as various additional tween variables (not shown), are set as follows: “trans type” for both the current object and its tween partner is set to “tween;” “trans start time” for both the current object and its tween partner is set to the current system time; “trans end time” for both the current object and its tween partner is set to the current time plus the mean of the entrance duration specified in the setup data of the present object and the exit duration specified in the setup data of the tween partner; a set of initial display settings for the present object is set to the same values as the tween partner's display settings (except with opacity equal to zero); a set of final display settings for the tween partner is set to the same values as the present object's display settings (except with opacity equal to zero). The processing for these tween variables is described below in the discussion of the picture update function.
• On the right side ofFIG. 61 is a flow diagram of the function for stopping a picture object, as implemented within the type-specific functions block5860 ofFIG. 58. The function begins atstep6122 when it is called by the object stop function of the playback commandsblock5820, or by the picture update function ofFIG. 62, with anOSDS5910 passed as an argument. Instep6124, a function call is issued to the “handle event” function in the relation-based communications block5760 ofFIG. 57, specifying the current picture object and the event name “stopping.” Next, instep6126, the setup data in the TSF-OSDS6120 is examined, and if it specifies that an exit is to take place, then instep6128 the trans variables in the TSF-OSDS6120 are set as follows: “trans type” is set to the appropriate exit type as per the setup data; “trans start time” is set to the current system time; “trans end time” is set to the current time plus the exit duration specified in the setup data. After setting these variables, the function exits6130. Otherwise, if an exit is not specified, then in step6132 a function call is issued to the graphics engine to remove the picture item from its draw list, with the canvas ID from theOSDS5910 and the item ID from the TSF-OSDS6120 passed as arguments. Next, instep6134, theOSDS5910 is removed from the object list of thepresentation data structure5908 and deallocated, after which the function is done6136.
• Alternatively,step6128 provides additional functionality in configurations which support tweening as seen in FIGS.28B-D. This additional functionality evaluates “Tween” relations accessed via the data manager to determine if another object sharing the same canvas ID is the “tween partner” for the present object. If there is such a tween partner, the trans variables in the TSF-OSDS6120 for both the present object and its tween partner, as well as various additional tween variables (not shown), are set as follows: “trans type” for both the current object and its tween partner is set to “tween;” “trans start time” for both the current object and its tween partner is set to the current system time; “trans end time” for both the current object and its tween partner is set to the current time plus the mean of the exit duration specified in the setup data of the present object and the entrance duration specified in the setup data of the tween partner; a set of final display settings for the present object is set to the same values as the tween partner's display settings (except with opacity equal to zero); a set of initial display settings for the tween partner is set to the same values as the present object's display settings (except with opacity equal to zero). The processing for these tween variables is described below in the discussion of the picture update function.
• At the bottom right ofFIG. 61 is a flow diagram of the refresh function for picture objects, as implemented within the type-specific functions block5860 ofFIG. 58. The function begins atstep6138 when it is called with an object path passed as an argument by theedit manager5640 ofFIG. 56 during user editing, or by the presentation update function ofFIG. 60 when a change to the object's setup data or content data has been detected. Instep6140, the function acquires the specified object's current setup data and/or content data from the data manager as needed. Instep6142, the setup data stored in the object's TSF-OSDS6120, as well as the object's current status in the graphics engine (its picture content and display settings), are updated to reflect the current data fromstep6140. With that, the function is done6144.
• FIG. 62 shows a flow diagram of the update function for picture objects, as implemented within the type-specific functions block5860 ofFIG. 58. The function begins atstep6200 when it is called by the presentation update function ofFIG. 60, or by the picture start function ofFIG. 61, with anOSDS5910 passed as an argument. Before proceeding with the step by step description, it should be noted that in a number of steps in this picture update function, adjustments are made to picture display settings based on various operations occurring; these adjustments are cumulative in nature, in that the final value for any given display setting is the nominal value for that setting (stored in the setup data of the TSF-OSDS6120) plus the sum of any adjustments made within the present function.
• Instep6202, the “read source” function in the relation-based communications block5760 ofFIG. 57 is called for each display setting that can be usefully modulated by information from other objects (examples being shown in FIGS.27B and28A); in the preferred system, this includes the following display settings shown in FIGS.4A through6B: x-position, y-position, size, color hue, color brightness, color saturation, transparency, rotation, x-stretch, y-stretch, left cropping, right cropping, top cropping, bottom cropping, shape and softness. For each display setting, the “read source” function is passed the object name and the display setting name, and returns the cumulative value of any data sources “connected” to that display setting via low-level relations; if the returned value is non-zero, the display setting is adjusted accordingly.
• Instep6204, the current system time is read from the system services. The elapsed time between the start time previously stored in the TSF-OSDS6120 and this current system time provides a basis for the time-based processing of the next several steps. Instep6206, the setup data stored in the TSF-OSDS6120 is checked, and if it specifies that “undulation” is enabled, then instep6208 the size of the picture is adjusted in a manner such as that seen inFIG. 7A (the elapsed time is divided by the cycle period and the remainder yields the current cycle phase, from which the adjustment is derived). Next, instep6210, the setup data is checked again, and if it specifies that “bouncing” is enabled, then instep6212 the position of the picture is adjusted in a manner such as that seen inFIG. 7B (once again, the cycle phase is calculated and the adjustment is derived from that). Then instep6214, the setup data is checked again, and if it specifies that “color cycling” is enabled, then instep6216 the color of the picture is adjusted in a manner such as that seen inFIG. 7C (once again, the cycle phase is calculated and the adjustment is derived from that).
• Instep6218, a software timer is evaluated as follows if it has not previously expired. First, the system time fromstep6204 is adjusted to remove any time spent in edit mode since the initialization of the system. Next, the “adjusted start time” previously stored in the TSF-OSDS6120 is subtracted from this adjusted system time to yield the “elapsed playing time” (distinct from the elapsed time above in that it only includes time spent in play mode). Next, this elapsed playing time is compared with the timer duration stored in the setup data of the TSF-OSDS6120, and if the elapsed playing time exceeds the timer duration, then the timed has expired. If this is the case, then in step6220 a function call is issued to the “handle event” function in the relation-based communications block5760 specifying the current picture object and the event name “timer.” Next, instep6222, the setup data in the TSF-OSDS6120 is examined, and if the timeout flag specifies that “timing out” is enabled (as seen inFIG. 7F), then instep6224 the picture stop function ofFIG. 61 is called, after which the present function is done6226. Otherwise, if either the timer has not expired or timing out is not enabled, then instep6227 collision processing accesses relations via the data manager to determine if the current object has any “collision partners” (other playing objects related to the current object via “Collision” relations); if there are any such collision partners, and if the current object and a collision partner are graphically overlapping in the playback display, then a third object is started or stopped according to an associated relation accessed via the data manager.
• Next, instep6228 the “trans type” stored in the TSF-OSDS6120 is examined, and if it does not specify that a transition is in progress, then the function is done6238. Otherwise, if the “trans type” specifies an entrance, exit or tween, then instep6230 the appropriate trans processing takes place. This trans processing will vary somewhat depending on the type of transition involved, but in general it involves interpolating one or more display settings from a starting value to an ending value, based on how far along the current system time is between the “trans start time” and “trans end time” stored in the TSF-OSDS6120. In the case of an entrance, the trans processing can include ramping up the size (as seen inFIG. 7D) and/or the opacity of the picture from zero to its nominal value. In the case of an exit, the processing can include ramping down the size and/or the opacity (as seen inFIG. 7E) of the picture from its nominal value to zero. In the case of a tween (as seen in FIGS.28B-D), the display setting starting values (for the starting object) and ending values (for the stopping object) will have been stored in the TSF-OSDS6120 by the picture start and/or stop functions ofFIG. 61, as discussed above. Over the course of the tween, the display settings for the starting object are interpolated from the stored starting values to their nominal values, and the display settings for the stopping object are interpolated from their nominal values stored to the stored ending values.
• Once the trans processing ofstep6230 has been completed, then instep6232 an evaluation is made as to whether or not the trans processing resulted in the end of an exit (or the end of a tween for a stopping object). If it did not, then the function is done6238. Otherwise, instep6234, a function call is issued to the graphics engine to remove the picture item from its draw list, with the canvas ID from theOSDS5910 and the item ID from the TSF-OSDS6120 passed as arguments. Next, instep6236, theOSDS5910 is removed from the object list of thepresentation data structure5908 and deallocated, after which the function is done6238.
• Four functions of the picture object sub-module of the type-specific functions block5860 ofFIG. 58 have just been discussed in reference toFIGS. 61 and 62: “start picture object,” “stop picture object,” “refresh picture object” and “update picture object.” These four functions may be seen as a model for the corresponding functions in many of the other type-specific sub-modules, and in particular, for those sub-modules of the following object types: text objects, video objects, sound objects, vector objects, script objects and container objects. At the same time, within the corresponding functions in these other sub-modules, various operations may take place which are not included in the above picture functionality, and these are described as follows.
• The type-specific functions block5860 ofFIG. 58 provides a type-specific sub-module for text objects. Within this type-specific sub-module for text objects, the functionality of the start, stop, refresh and update functions is essentially identical to that for picture objects. The only noteworthy exception is that various common text style options, such as font, fontsize, bold, underline, italic, etc. may be stored as setup data and/or included within the content data. Like the display settings in the picture functions discussed above, these various text options are read from the data manager and are passed to the graphics engine where they are used by the rendering functionality.
• The type-specific functions block5860 ofFIG. 58 provides a type-specific sub-module for video objects. Within this type-specific sub-module for video objects, the functionality of the start, stop, refresh and update functions includes all of the operations seen above with picture objects, and in addition includes some special functionality associated with video object playback as follows. The preferred implementation of the video sub-module takes advantage of the fact that image data is passed to the graphics engine via a data pointer, and implements video playback as a picture object whose content buffer is continually being overwritten by new image data corresponding to the current “frame” of video playback. This is a relatively straightforward mechanism that both supports the desired video functionality, and conveniently leverages the features of the invention that apply to picture objects. Of course other implementations for the video sub-module may also be effective, and many proprietary and publicly available video playback systems exist with enough control features to successfully implement the desired functionality.
• In the preferred implementation of the video sub-module, the TSF-OSDS for video objects includes all of the variables shown in the picture object TSF-OSDS6120 ofFIG. 61. Moreover, the TSF-OSDS for video objects (not shown) includes some additional variables: “frame count,” “current frame,” “msec per frame,” “duration” (in msec), “loop offset” (in msec), “marker index” and an array of markers.
• The start function of the video sub-module, in addition to its other operations, initializes these extra variables of the video TSF-OSDS as follows. The frame count, msec per frame and duration are set to values specified in the video content data which is read at the beginning of the function (as was done instep6102 ofFIG. 61). The loop offset, current frame and marker index are set to zero. The marker array is an array of cue points where each cue point corresponds to a low-level relation associated with the video object being started. To create the marker array, the video start function queries the data manager for the listing of relations in the same container as the current video object, and then it searches the listing for any relations where the event object is the current video object, and the event name begins with the text “T-” followed by a number of milliseconds, such as “T-8000” specifying 8000 milliseconds. Relations such as this are created by theedit manager5640 ofFIG. 56 when handling the programming function of FIGS.25A-B “video object A, upon reaching cue point, starts object B.” For each such relation, the number of milliseconds specified in the event name gets added as a cue point in the marker array of the TSF-OSDS for the video object; when the array is complete, it is sorted so that it proceeds from earliest cue time to latest cue time.
• In addition to initializing these extra variables of the video TSF-OSDS, the start function for video objects allocates a picture buffer and fills it with the bitmap of the first video frame from the above-mentioned content data. It is this picture buffer which is added to the graphics engine draw list in the step corresponding to step6108 of FIG.61. Finally, the video start function calls the system audio services to initiate audio playback for the audio component of the video data. The stop function and refresh functions for video objects are essentially the same as those for picture objects; the one noteworthy difference is that the stop function must call the system audio services to stop the audio playback process initiated in the start function.
• The update function for video objects, prior to performing its general update operations as discussed above for picture objects, issues a subroutine call to a video processing function that performs special processing operations associated with video playback. The operation of this “process video” function is detailed in the flow diagram ofFIG. 63. The function begins atstep6300 when it is called by the video update function with anOSDS5910 passed as an argument. Instep6302, if the system is in edit mode, then the function is done6304, which effectively causes video playback to pause during edit mode (as seen inFIG. 25A). Otherwise, instep6306, the system time is read from the system services, and is adjusted to remove any time spent in edit mode since the initialization of the system.
• Instep6308, a “while loop” is performed to trigger any markers whose cue time has been exceeded since the last call to this function. Starting at the marker indicated by the “marker index” variable stored in the video TSF-OSDS, the cue time of the marker is added to the adjusted start time stored in the TSF-OSDS, and if the total is less than the adjusted system time fromstep6306, then the following steps are performed. Instep6310, a function call is issued to the “handle event” function in the relation-based communications block5760 ofFIG. 57. For this function call, the current video object is specified as the event object, and the event name is a combination of “T-” plus the cue time of the marker in milliseconds (such as “T-8000”); note that the marker list was created in the first place by finding relations of this form and performing a reverse operation, so these arguments will specify a valid relation and the “handle event” function will trigger the appropriate behavior. Next, instep6312, the marker index in the video TSF-OSDS is incremented, and the evaluation ofstep6308 is repeated for the new marker index. This “while loop” ofstep6308 continues until the marker index either reaches the end of the array, or is incremented to a marker whose cue time has not yet been exceeded.
• Instep6314, the “adjusted start time” stored in the TSF-OSDS is subtracted from the adjusted system time ofstep6306. The result, which is the current elapsed playing time of the video object, is divided by the “msec per frame” variable in the video TSF-OSDS, and the result of the division yields the current video “frame.” Instep6316, if the newly calculated frame from the previous step does not exceed the last frame of the video as specified by the “frame count” variable in the TSF-OSDS, then instep6318 the newly calculated frame is compared with the “current frame” previously stored in the TSF-OSDS. If they are the same, then the function is done6324. Otherwise instep6320, the bitmap in the video content data which corresponds to the newly calculated frame fromstep6314 is written into the picture buffer that was passed to the graphics engine by the video start function, causing the bitmap for the new frame to appear in the playback display upon the next rendering by the graphics engine. Next, instep6322, the “current frame” variable in the TSF-OSDS is updated to the newly calculated frame fromstep6314, and the function is done6324.
• Returning to step6316, if the newly calculated frame fromstep6314 exceeds the last frame of the video as specified by the “frame count” variable in the TSF-OSDS, then instep6326 the setup data stored in the TSF-OSDS is checked to see if video “end-looping” is enabled (as seen inFIG. 7H). If video end-looping is not enabled, then instep6328 the stop function for video objects is called, and when that function returns, the present function is done6330 (alternatively in configurations which support video freeze-frame or overall looping, typical handling for these capabilities may be provided at this point). Otherwise, if video end-looping is enabled, then instep6332 the “loop offset” variable in the TSF-OSDS is checked, and if it is zero, then it is set as follows: a random time between 1000 and 3000 milliseconds is subtracted from the “duration” variable in the TSF-OSDS, and the result is stored in the “loop offset” variable in the TSF-OSDS. Next, instep6334, the “adjusted start time” stored in the TSF-OSDS is subtracted from the adjusted system time ofstep6306, yielding the elapsed playing time; the “duration” in the TSF-OSDS is subtracted from this elapsed playing time to produce the “excess time” (the portion of the elapsed playing time which exceeds the end of the video data).
• When end-looping is enabled, a certain amount of this excess time is dedicated to a “video crossfade,” to smoothly blend between the final frame of the video and the frame corresponding to the loop offset selected instep6332. Instep6336, an evaluation is made as to whether or not the excess time fromstep6334 has exceeded the desired crossfade duration (350 milliseconds being currently preferred). If it has not, then in step6338 a series of operations is performed to blend the two frames mentioned above into the picture buffer. First, the excess time fromstep6334 is divided by the crossfade duration (in this case350) to produce a percentage of completion for the crossfade. Next, the “loop offset” variable in the TSF-OSDS is divided by the “msec per frame” variable in the TSF-OSDS to produce the frame number for the frame that corresponds to the loop offset (the “loop frame”). Then, the two bitmaps from the video content data corresponding to the loop frame and the final frame of the video are aquired from the data manager, and are “alpha-blended” into the picture buffer pixel by pixel. The pixels for the loop frame are blended in at a percentage equivalent to the percetage of completion of the crossfade, and the pixels for the final frame are blended it at a percentage equivalent to one hundred percent minus the percentage of completion of the crossfade. Once the blending is complete, the function is done6340.
• If the evaluation ofstep6336 determines that the excess time fromstep6334 has exceeded the desired crossfade duration, then in step6342 a series of operations is performed to reposition video playback so that thereafter playback will continue from the loop frame. First, the “loop offset” variable in the TSF-OSDS is subtracted from the adjusted system time ofstep6306, and result is written into the “adjusted start time” variable in the TSF-OSDS. Next, the “loop offset” in the TSF-OSDS is divided by the “msec per frame” in the TSF-OSDS (as was done instep6338, above), and the resulting loop frame is written into the “current frame” variable in the TSF-OSDS. Next, the bitmap for the loop frame (now the “current frame”) is written into the picture buffer so that it will be displayed by the graphics engine the next time rendering occurs. Finally, the “loop offset” in the TSF-OSDS is set to zero, and the function is done6344.
• The type-specific functions block5860 ofFIG. 58 provides a type-specific sub-module for sound objects. Within this type-specific sub-module for sound objects, the start, stop, refresh and update functions include many of the same operations seen earlier in connection with picture objects and video objects. The main difference, of course, is that sound has no visual component; unlike the above sub-modules which manage visual data by interacting with the graphics engine, the sound sub-module manages audio data by interacting with the system sound services. In particular, the sound start function, rather than adding a picture item to a draw list in the graphics engine, initiates an audio playback process by adding a sound item to a “play list” in the sound services. Therafter, the sound update function calls a sound processing function that is substantially similar to the video processing function ofFIG. 63, except that rather than checking to see if a new frame needs to be passed to the graphics engine, it checks to see if more audio data needs to be passed to the sound services to fill the audio playback buffer. Once the end of the sound is detected by this sound processing function, then depending on the setup data, it either loops the sound by resetting the relevant variables, or it stops the sound by calling the sound stop function. The sound stop function, rather than removing a picture item from the graphics engine, removes the sound item from the sound services.
• Aside from the differences cited above, the sound sub-module includes much of the same functionality seen so far in the sub-modules for picture and video objects. For example, the sound sub-module includes similar interactions with the data manager to read setup and content data, as well as similar calls to the “handle event” function when sound objects start and stop. Likewise, refresh functionality such as that of the picture refresh function is included, as is timer functionality and entrance and exit functionality such as that of the picture update function (except that sound entrances and exits involve volume fades rather than visual fades). Also, the sound processing function, like the video processing function, skips sound processing during edit mode so that sound playback is paused (it also mutes audio so that looping of the unattended sound buffer is not heard).
• Finally, the sound sub-module includes marker functionality such as that seen in the video sub-module for triggering relation-based communications. This marker functionality includes operations in the sound start function such as those in the video start function for creating a marker array based on relations of a similar format. This marker functionality also includes operations in the sound processing function such as those in the video processing function for checking if any markers have been exceeded by the elapsed playing time, and if so, making appropriate calls to the “handle event” function of the relation-based communications block.
• The type-specific functions block5860 ofFIG. 58 provides a type-specific sub-module for vector objects (as seen inFIG. 28A). Within this type-specific sub-module for vector objects, the start, stop, refresh and update functions include many of the same operations seen earlier in connection with picture objects and video objects. The main difference, of course, is that vector objects have no visual component; unlike those other sub-modules which manage visual data by interacting with the graphics engine, the vector object sub-module manages time-based playback for a series of stored values (each with an associated millisecond offset) that comprise the vector object content data. The current output value for each vector object can be aquired at any time via the communication query function of the vector object sub-module, which is described below in connection withFIG. 66. Calls to this query function are made by the “read source” function of the relation-based communications block5760, which is itself called when an “info sink” operation in a type-specific module requests the current value for any “info sources” connected to it via relations (as is done, for example, instep6202 of the picture update function ofFIG. 62).
• Compared to the start function for picture and video objects, the vector object start function, rather than adding a picture item to a draw list in the graphics engine, merely initiates a vector playback process by initializing the variables in its TSF-OSDS. Thereafter, the vector update function calls a vector processing function that is generally similar to the video processing function ofFIG. 63, but with some differences due to the different nature of the content. The main difference is that rather than passing bitmaps to the graphics engine, the vector processing function sets the current output value (or values in the case of multiple output channels) for the vector playback process by aquiring from the vector content data the value or values corresponding to the elapsed playing time (this can involve interpolating between values if needed). In addition, the setup data in the TSF-OSDS contains a scale setting and a speed setting which affect the overall output scale and playback speed (respectively) of the vector playback processing; moreover, these scale and speed settings may be adjusted by function calls to the “read source” function in the relation-based communications block5760 (similar to the way display settings for picture objects may be adjusted instep6202 ofFIG. 62). In addition, the playback position of the vector playback process may also be adjusted by a function call to the “read source” function in a similar fashion. Once the end of the vector content data has been exceeded by the elapsed playing time, then depending on the setup data, the vector processing function either loops playback by resetting the relevant variables, or it stops the vector object by calling the vector object stop function. The stop function purges the OSDS to end the process.
• Aside from the differences cited above, the vector object sub-module includes much of the same functionality seen so far in the sub-modules for picture and video objects. For example, the vector object sub-module includes similar interactions with the data manager to read setup and content data, as well as similar calls to the “handle event” function when vector objects start and stop. Likewise, refresh functionality such as that of the picture refresh function is included, as is timer functionality and entrance and exit functionality such as that of the picture update function (except that vector object entrances and exits involve scaling the dynamic range of vector object output). Also, the vector object processing function, like the video processing function, skips vector object processing during edit mode so that the progress of vector objects is paused.
• Finally, the vector sub-module includes marker functionality such as that seen in the video sub-module for triggering relation-based communications. This marker functionality includes operations in the vector start function such as those in the video start function for creating a marker array based on relations of the proper format. This marker functionality also includes operations in the vector processing function such as those in the video processing function for checking if any markers have been exceeded by the elapsed playing time, and if so, making appropriate calls to the “handle event” function of the relation-based communications block.
• The type-specific functions block5860 ofFIG. 58 provides a type-specific sub-module for script objects. Within this type-specific sub-module for script objects, the start, stop, refresh and update functions include many of the same operations seen earlier in connection with picture objects and video objects. The main difference, of course, is that script objects have no visual component. So unlike those other sub-modules which manage visual data by interacting with the graphics engine, the script object sub-module is essentially an “interpreter” that interprets a list of script commands that comprise the script object content data. The script object sub-module can communicate from its internal script playback processes to other types of objects (or to other script objects) using relation-based communications, such as by issuing calls to the “handle event” function of the relation-based communications block5760 when certain internal script events occur, and by providing a communication query function that allows the “read source” function of the relation-basedcommunication blocks5760 to read the current value of internal script variables.
• Compared to the start function for picture and video objects, the script object start function, rather than adding a picture item to a draw list in the graphics engine, merely initiates a script playback process by initializing the variables in its TSF-OSDS. Thereafter, the script update function calls a script processing function that is substantially similar to the video processing function ofFIG. 63, except that rather than passing bitmaps to the graphics engine, it interprets the current script command and performs any specified actions (using typical script playback functionality as described earlier in the background section). The stop function, rather than removing a picture item from the graphics engine, merely purges the OSDS to end the process.
• Aside from the differences cited above, the script object sub-module includes much of the same functionality seen so far in the sub-modules for picture and video objects. For example, the script object sub-module includes similar interactions with the data manager to read content data, as well as similar calls to the “handle event” function when script objects start and stop. Likewise, refresh functionality such as that of the picture refresh function is included, as is timer functionality and entrance and exit functionality such as that of the picture update function (except that script object entrances and exits involve scaling the dynamic range of script object data outputs). Also, the script object processing function, like the video processing function, skips script object processing during edit mode so that the progress of script objects is paused.
• The type-specific functions block5860 ofFIG. 58 provides a type-specific sub-module for container objects. This type-specific sub-module for container objects performs various duties involved with container object playback. In addition, it provides functionality for associating container objects with nested sub-displays (as seen inFIGS. 40 through 45C). Finally, as stated earlier, the container object sub-module may also include some or all of the functionality associated with container control objects (which is detailed in connection withFIGS. 64 and 65).
• In providing sub-display functionality, the container object sub-module relies on a special feature of the graphics engine, detailed in connection withFIGS. 78 and 79. Briefly, this special feature involves “sub-display” items, which can be added to draw lists in the graphics engine just as picture items and text items may be added. A sub-display item defines a visual field in the playback display and associates the visual field with a separate, nested draw list. The nested draw list is a subordinate draw list for the sub-display item, such that any item added to the nested draw list is rendered within the visual field defined by the sub-display item. In addition, any of the display settings that can be applied to picture items can also be applied to sub-display items, producing a variety of possibilities for altering the appearance of sub-display visual fields.
• In the case of a container object whose setup data specifies that sub-display functionality is enabled, the start, stop, refresh and update functions employ all of the operations seen above with picture objects. The most significant difference is that the various graphics operations are performed on sub-display items rather than picture items. For example, in the container start function, in the operation corresponding to step6108 ofFIG. 61, a sub-display item rather than a picture item is added to the graphics engine draw list. This involves first allocating a new draw list by calling a graphics engine function that returns a canvas ID; the returned canvas ID for the new draw list is stored as a “sub-canvas ID” in the container object TSF-OSDS, and it is this sub-canvas ID which is specified as the nested draw list when the new sub-display item is added. Like other visual items, the new sub-display item is added to the draw list specified by the canvas ID in theOSDS5910 ofFIG. 59 (this draw list may itself be a nested draw list for some other sub-display item, resulting in a sub-display within a sub-display as seen inFIG. 41). Once the sub-display item is added, then in the operation corresponding to step6110 ofFIG. 61, the display settings of the sub-display item are initialized as per the setup data read earlier in the function. Likewise, the other operations of the picture sub-module apply within the context of the container sub-module in a similar way.
• In the case of a container object whose setup data specifies that sub-display functionality is not enabled, the above operations involving the graphics engine are not required; the other operations of the picture sub-module, however, are still included in the container sub-module. Moreover, whether or not sub-display functionality is enabled, the container sub-module also includes special functionality for managing container object playback as follows.
• The container object start function, after going through its other operations as discussed above, checks if the container control object (CCO) in the container being started is already playing; if it is not, then a function call is issued to the object start function ofFIG. 59 to start the CCO (the CCO, in turn may start one or more other objects in the same container to implement the “start propagation” of FIGS.8A-B). When starting the CCO, the container start function passes as an argument either the canvas ID from itsOSDS5910 ofFIG. 59, or if sub-display functionality is enabled, the “sub-canvas ID” previously stored in the TSF-OSDS (the latter case resulting in all of the contained objects being rendered within the visual field of the sub-display). Next, the container start function examines the setup data in the TSF-OSDS, and if the container object is navigable and its sub-display functionality is disabled, the container start function calls the “navigate” function in thenavigation block5740 ofFIG. 57, passing it theOSDS5910 of the just started container object in order to navigate to it (as depicted in FIGS.38A-B). If the above conditions are not met, or after the navigation call has returned, the container start function is done.
• The container object refresh function, in addition to operations such as those seen for pictures, includes operations for detecting when there has been a change to the flag in the setup data that specifies whether or not sub-display functionality is enabled. This flag changes from disabled to enabled whenever the user enables sub-display functionality for a playing container object (as seen inFIG. 40). In such cases, the container object refresh function first performs certain operations already discussed in connection with the container start function, including allocating a new nested draw list, creating a new sub-display item associated with the nested draw list, and initializing the display settings for the new sub-display item. Next, it identifies any playing objects which are hierarchically below the container object (i.e., contained by it either directly or indirectly) and which also have the same canvas ID as the container object (as specified within the OSDS data structures for the container and its contained objects). For each such object, it sets the canvas ID in its respective OSDS to the canvas ID of the nested draw list just created. Alternatively, when the sub-display flag in the setup data changes from enabled to disabled, the refresh function performs essentially the reverse operations: each currently playing object with a canvas ID the same as that of the nested draw list has its canvas ID set to that of the container object, and the sub-display item and nested draw list are deallocated. In addition, the container object refresh function includes functionality for detecting when there has been a change to the flag in the setup data that specifes whether or not the container object is navigable. In such cases, if sub-display functionality is not enabled, the container object is stopped by calling the container object stop function.
• The container object stop function, in addition to operations such as those seen for pictures, deallocates the nested draw list if one is currently allocated for a sub-display, and also calls the general object stop function to stop its associated container control object; the container control object in turn stops all of the objects contained by the container (as per the “stop propagation” ofFIG. 8A). This additional functionality for deallocating the nested draw list and stopping the container control object is also included in the container update function in the case where the end of an exit is reached (corresponding tosteps6234 and6236 inFIG. 62).
• In the case of a container object which is entering into a tweening process with another container, the container object start and stop functions provide additional tweening-related functionality beyond that seen for pictures. In particular, these functions make a determination as to which objects in the stopping container should transition to which objects in the starting container. Depending on system configuration, this determination may be made using various factors, such as similarity of media data, similarity of display settings, similarity of object names, special instructions or programming by the user, etc. Based on the results of this determination, tweening processes are established for one or more object pairs, each object pair consisting of an object in the stopping container that is tweening to an object in the starting container. The initiation of these tweeening processes is accomplished using techniques already discussed in connection with picture objects (FIG. 61,steps6112 and6128).
• The type-specific functions block5860 ofFIG. 58 provides a type-specific sub-module for container control objects (CCOs). Three functions within this type-specific sub-module for CCOs are illustrated in the flow diagrams ofFIGS. 64 and 65: “start container control object,” “stop container control object” and “update container control object.” These three functions are explained below after a brief discussion of the CCO refresh function. As stated earlier, some or all of the functionality of this CCO sub-module may be included within the sub-module for container objects (in some cases requiring minor adaptation).
• The main task of the CCO refresh function, like the other type-specific refresh functions, is to make sure that the playback process for a CCO accurately reflects its stored data (which in this case is setup data only, since CCO's do not have content data). In addition to reading the CCO setup data from the data manager and writing it into the TSF-OSDS (shown as CCO-OSDS6442 inFIG. 64), the CCO refresh function also checks the value of the background color in the new setup data (which specifies the desired background color for the draw list corresponding to the canvas ID in the CCO's OSDS5910). If it detects that the background color in the new setup data is different than the background color in the old the setup data, it issues a function call to the graphics engine to update the draw list background color, causing it to change to the new color the next time the draw list is rendered (this step is skipped if the present CCO is not the hierarchically topmost CCO assigned to this canvas ID). Like the other type-specific refresh functions, the CCO refresh function is called by the general presentation update function ofFIG. 60 whenever a change to the setup data is detected; this will typically happen when the “color dragging” editing function ofFIG. 4C is applied to the playback display backdrop and is handled by theedit manager5640 ofFIG. 56 (resulting in real-time changes to the playback display background color).
• FIG. 64 shows a flow diagram of the start function for container control objects, as implemented within the type-specific functions block5860 ofFIG. 58. The function begins atstep6400 when it is called by the object start function ofFIG. 59 with anOSDS5910 passed as an argument. Instep6402, the setup data for the CCO specified in the previous step is read from the data manager (and as insteps6104 and6106 of the picture start function ofFIG. 61, the success of the previous step is evaluated, and if it was a failure, the function returns with an error code). Next, instep6404, the CCO-OSDS6442 (the type-specific portion of the OSDS from step6400) is initialized as follows. The “setup data” is set to the setup data read instep6402. The “start time” is set to the current system time as per the system services. The “adjusted start time” is set to an altered version of the current system time, which is the current system time minus any time spent in edit mode since the initialization of the system. The “color trans old color” is set to the current background color of the draw list specified by the canvas ID in the OSDS from step6400 (this is in case the old color is needed for entrance processing as discussed shortly). The “sibling activity flag” is set to false. Next, the background color of the above-mentioned draw list is set to the background color specified in the setup data by calling a graphics engine function and passing it the color and canvas ID (this step is skipped if the present CCO is not the hierarchically topmost CCO assigned to this canvas ID).
• Next, starting atstep6408 and continuing throughstep6434, the majority of the CCO start function is dedicated to providing start propagation functionality as discussed in connection with FIGS.8A-B (this functionality may be omitted in system configurations where start propagation is not supported). Instep6408, a list of potential “start propagation targets” is constructed, the list consisting of one instance ofdata structure6444 for each object in the same container as the current CCO. To build the list, a contents listing is acquired from the data manager by passing it the container path, which is produced by removing the CCO name from the end of the object path in the OSDS fromstep6400. For each object listed by the data manager which is not the current CCO, a start propagation target (SPT)data structure6444 is initialized (by writing the object name and setting the other variables to zero) and added to the list. This “SPT list” is used throughout the start propagation functionality as follows.
• The first thing that happens with the SPT list is that the “group ID” and “first in group flag” for each entry is set. To understand the purpose of these variables, recall that there is a “start propagation exemption” which was discussed in connection with FIGS.8A-B, whereby objects which are programmed to be started by other objects are not started by the start propagation (since that would defeat the purpose of the programming). In the present function, the test for whether or not an object should be exempted is as follows: if the object in question has a low-level relation connected to its “start” action, and the “partner” object on the other side of that relation is not in the same group as the object in question, then the object in question is exempted from start propagation. In this context, grouping for objects is based on whether they have been programmed with the function ofFIG. 17: “objects A and B play together.” Any objects which have been grouped via this function (and recall that it is transitive) are considered to be in the same group, and the relation-based communications block5760 provides a query function that returns a listing of the partner objects which have been grouped with a given object via the function ofFIG. 17.
• In order to set the “group ID” and “first in group flag” as discussed above,step6410 comprises a loop that is performed once for each entry in the SPT list as follows. First, instep6412, if the group ID in theSPT6444 is currently set to zero, then it is set to the next available non-zero ID that has not yet been used, and the “first in group flag” is set to true. Next, instep6414, a function call is issued to the above-mentioned query function in the relation-based communications block5760 to get a listing of the partner objects grouped with the current SPT object; the arguments passed to this query function are the object path of the current SPT object (produced by adding the object name in the current SPT to the end of the container path used in step6408), and the text string “play together” (to identify the function ofFIG. 17). Next, in step6416, a sub-loop is performed for each partner object returned in the previous step, as follows. Starting with the next SPT past the current SPT, all of the remaining SPTs are checked, and if an SPT has the same object name as the current partner object, the group ID for that SPT is set to the same value as the group ID for the current SPT. When both loops (the sub-loop of step6416 and the loop of step6410) have finished, the “group ID” and “first in group flag” for each entry in the SPT list will be properly set.
• Next, instep6418, a loop is performed to set the “no start flag” for each entry in the SPT list. For each entry in the list, the following operations are performed. First, in step6420, if the current SPT represents a container object (as per a call to the data manager to read the object's properties data), and if that container object is both navigable and does not have sub-display functionality enabled (as per a call to the data manager to read the object's setup data), then the “no start flag” in that SPT is set to true (this blocks start propagation for such objects, since otherwise navigation would be triggered automatically, producing undesirable results). Next, instep6422, a data manager function is called to get a listing of the partner objects connected via low-level relations to the “start” action of the current SPT object. Next, instep6424, a sub-loop is performed for each partner object returned in the previous step as follows. Starting with the first entry in the SPT list, all of the SPTs are checked, and if an SPT has the same object name as the current partner object, the group ID for that SPT is checked, and if it is different from that of the current SPT, then the “no start flag” for the current SPT is set to true, and moreover, the “no start flag” for every other SPT in the SPT list with the same group ID as the current SPT is also set to true (requiring yet another nested loop). When all the loops, including the sub-loop ofstep6424 and the loop ofstep6418, have finished, the “no start flag” for each entry in the SPT list will be properly set.
• Next, instep6426, if the setup data fromstep6402 specifies that random start is enabled for the current CCO, then in step6428 a group from the SPT list is randomly selected for start propagation as follows. First, a “group count” variable is set to zero. Then, all of the entries in the SPT list are examined, and for any entry where the “first in group flag” is set to true and the “no start flag” is set to false, the group count is incremented. Then a random group number is selected based on the above group count. Next, instep6430, a loop is performed to start all of the objects in the selected group, as follows. For each entry in the SPT list, if the group ID in theSPT6444 is equal to the selected group number, then the object represented by that SPT is started by calling the object start function ofFIG. 59.
• Alternatively, if the setup data checked instep6426 specifies that random start is not enabled, then in step6432 a loop is performed to start the appropriate objects as follows. For each entry in the SPT list, if the “no start flag” in theSPT6444 is set to false, then the object represented by that SPT is started by calling the object start function ofFIG. 59. In either case, whether random start is enabled or not, in thenext step6434 the SPTs in the SPT list are deallocated. Next, instep6436, a function call is issued to the “handle event” function in the relation-basedcommunications block5760, specifying the current CCO and the event name “starting.” Next, instep6438, the update function for container control objects is called, and when that function returns, the present function is done6440.
• The left side ofFIG. 65 shows a flow diagram of the function for stopping a container control object, as implemented within the type-specific functions block5860 ofFIG. 58. The function begins atstep6500 when it is called by the object stop function of the playback commandsblock5820, or by the CCO update function on the right side ofFIG. 65, with anOSDS5910 passed as an argument. Instep6502, a list is created for all the objects in the same container as the current CCO (by calling the data manager for the container listing and omitting the current CCO). Instep6504, a loop is performed in which the object stop function of the playback commands block5820 is called for every object on the list fromstep6502. Next, instep6506, a loop is performed in which the playback status of every object on the list fromstep6502 is checked via the status checking function of the playback commandsblock5820, and if any of them is still playing, the present function exits (this allows the CCO to remain active while other objects are performing exit processing). Instep6508, assuming the function did not exit in the previous step, the OSDS fromstep6500 is removed from the object list of thepresentation data structure5908 and deallocated. Next, instep6510, if the container object which contains the CCO is still playing, it is stopped by calling the object stop function in the playback commandsblock5820. With that, the function is done6512.
• On the right side ofFIG. 65 is a flow diagram of the update function for container control objects, as implemented within the type-specific functions block5860 ofFIG. 58. The function begins atstep6514 when it is called by the presentation update function ofFIG. 60, or by the CCO start function ofFIG. 64, with anOSDS5910 passed as an argument. Instep6516, a loop is performed to detect when all the objects in the same container as the CCO specified by the OSDS fromstep6514 have stopped playing, as follows. First, a list is created for all the objects in the same container as the current CCO (by calling the data manager for the container listing and omitting the current CCO). Then, the playback status of each object in the list is checked via the status checking function of the playback commandsblock5820, and if any object is found to be playing, then a local “sibling activity flag” (initialized to false) is set to true.
• Next, instep6518, if the local sibling activity flag from the previous step is true (meaning that other objects in the same container as the above CCO are playing), then the “sibling activity flag” in the CCO-OSDS6442 ofFIG. 64 is set to true and operation continues atstep6524. Alternatively, if both the local sibling activity flag from the previous step and the “sibling activity flag” in the CCO-OSDS are false, then that means no other objects in the same container were ever playing, and execution also continues atstep6524. Only if the local sibling activity flag from the previous step is false and the “sibling activity flag” flag in the CCO-OSDS is true does it mean that other objects were once playing and have now stopped, in which case the CCO stop function on the left side ofFIG. 65 is called instep6520. Note that instep6510 of the CCO stop function, the enclosing container object is also stopped, which in this case results in “inverse stop propagation” as seen inFIG. 8B. When the function call ofstep6520 returns, the present function is done6522.
• Otherwise, instep6524, the current system time is read from the system services. Next, instep6526, the system time from the previous step is adjusted to remove any time spent in edit mode since the initialization of the system, and the “adjusted start time” stored in the CCO-OSDS6442 is subtracted from this adjusted system time to yield the elapsed playing time. If this elapsed playing time exceeds the timer duration stored in the setup data of the CCO-OSDS (and if the timer has not previously expired), then in step6528 a function call is issued to the “handle event” function in the relation-based communications block5760 specifying the current container control object and the event name “timer.” Next, instep6530, the setup data in the CCO-OSDS is checked, and if the timeout flag specifies that “timing out” is enabled (as seen inFIG. 7F), then instep6520 the CCO stop function on the left side ofFIG. 65 is called, after which the present function is done6522.
• Otherwise, in the next several steps, the elapsed time between the “start time” stored in the CCO-OSDS6442 and the system time read instep6524 becomes the basis for the following time-based processing. Instep6532, the setup data stored in the CCO-OSDS is checked, and if it specifies that “color cycling” is not enabled, then operation continues atstep6536. Otherwise, instep6534, the background color of the draw list specified by the canvas ID in the OSDS fromstep6514 is adjusted in a manner such as that seen inFIG. 7C (the elapsed time is divided by the cycle period and the remainder yields the current cycle phase, from which the adjustment is derived). In an enhanced implementation, the color setting for draw list backgrounds can involve a “color queue” managed by the graphics engine, such that each change to the background color of a draw list appears to “emanate” from the center of the background and progress outward to fill the background; when this capability is used with frequent color updates (such as those that occur when CCO color cycling is enabled), it results in a visual effect consisting of multiple bands of color emanating from the center of the background.
• Next, instep6536, the setup data stored in the CCO-OSDS is checked, and if it specifies that “entrance” is not enabled, then the function is done6540. Otherwise, instep6538, the background color of the draw list specified by the canvas ID in the OSDS fromstep6514 is adjusted as follows. A color interpolation is performed between the “color trans old color” stored in the CCO-OSDS and the current background color (the latter being either the background color stored in the setup data, or if color cycling is enabled, the color produced in step6534). This color interpolation involves taking the elapsed time and dividing it by the entrance duration specified in the setup data to determine the percentage of completion of the entrance. If the result is greater than one, then the entrance duration has been exceeded and the function is done6540. Otherwise, a color blend is performed between the current color (at a level equal to the percentage of completion of the entrance) and the old color (at a level equal to one hundred percent minus the percentage of completion of the entrance). The color resulting from this blend operation is passed to the graphics engine, and becomes the background color for the above draw list. With that, the function is done6540.
• In the preceding discussion, four type-specific functions (start, stop, refresh and update) have been described for each of the eight sub-modules in the type-specific functions block5860 ofFIG. 58. In addition to these four type-specific functions, each of the sub-modules also contains two more type-specific functions: a communication response function and a communication query function. These latter two functions (representative examples of which are described below) are called from within the relation-based communications block5760 ofFIG. 57 whenever the “handle event” function or “read source” function, respectively, finds a low-level relation corresponding to the specified event or sink. In essence, calls to these type-specific communication response functions or communication query functions complete communications which are initiated by calls to “handle event” or “read source,” respectively.
• At the top ofFIG. 66 is a flow diagram of the communication response function for picture objects, as implemented within the type-specific functions block5860 ofFIG. 58. The function begins atstep6600 when it is called by the “handle event” function of the relation-basedcommunications block5760, with an object path and an action name passed as arguments. Instep6602, the action name from the previous step is evaluated, and if it is equal to the text string “stop,” then instep6604 the picture stop function ofFIG. 61 is called to stop the object specified in step6600 (this requires searching the object list in thepresentation data structure5908 to find the OSDS with an object path the same as that fromstep6600, and that OSDS is passed to the stop function as an argument). When the function call ofstep6604 returns, the present function is done6606. Otherwise, if the action name evaluated instep6602 is not “stop,” then instep6607 the incoming action is processed. To handle the “Attribute” action, various object attributes may be modified. When the incoming action has been processed, the present function is done6608. Regarding the communication response functions for the other type-specific sub-modules, they all provide essentially the same functionality as the above picture function, except for those in the container sub-module and container control object sub-module, which are described as follows.
• In the middle ofFIG. 66 is a flow diagram of the communication response function for container objects, as implemented within the type-specific functions block5860 ofFIG. 58. The function begins atstep6610 when it is called by the “handle event” function of the relation-basedcommunications block5760, with an object path and an action name passed as arguments. Instep6612, the action name from the previous step is evaluated, and if it is equal to the text string “stop,” then instep6614 the container stop function is called to stop the container object specified in step6610 (this requires searching the object list in thepresentation data structure5908 to find the OSDS with an object path the same as that fromstep6610, and that OSDS is passed to the stop function as an argument). When the function call ofstep6614 returns, the present function is done6616.
• Otherwise, if the action name evaluated instep6612 is not “stop,” then instep6618 the action name is evaluated again. If the action name is “event bus1,” then instep6620 the present function effectively “busses” the relation down one hierarchical level (an example of this was seen inFIG. 48) by issuing a function call to the “handle event” function in the relation-basedcommunications block5760, specifying the path for the CCO contained by the current container (produced by adding the name “CCO” to the end of the path from step6610) and the event name “event1.” When the function call ofstep6620 returns, the present function is done6622.
• Otherwise, if the action name evaluated instep6618 is not “event bus1,” then instep6623 the incoming action is processed as follows. To handle the “Next” action, the current container is stopped and the next container in the sequence (as determined by evaluating “Next” relations via the data manager) is started. To handle the “Previous” action, the current container is stopped and the previous container in the sequence (as determined by evaluating “Next” relations via the data manager) is started. To handle the “Navigate” action, if the current container is playing as a sub-display then navigation to the current container is initiated. To handle the “Back” action, if there has been navigation without corresponding back navigation then back navigation is initiated. To handle the “Attribute” action, various container attributes may be modified. When the incoming action has been handled, the present function is done6624.
• It should be noted that the relation-bussing functionality in the above communication response function involves a single bus that provides bussing for an event-action relation in a hierarchically downward direction. The above function could easily provide multiple busses of the same type by simply repeating the test ofstep6618 for other action names (“event bus2,” “event bus3,” etc.) and passing corresponding event names to the “handle event” function instep6620. Likewise, the communication response function for container control objects provides one or more similar busses going in the other direction (up) by replicatingsteps6618 and6620 (in this case calling the “handle event” function with the path of the containing container object as the first argument). Moreover, in the same way that this bussing for event-action relations is provided via the communication response functions of the container and CCO sub-modules, bussing for sink-source relations is provided via the communication query functions in a similar fashion (the main differences being that the communication query function looks for a source name rather than an action name, such as “sink bus1,” and calls the “read source” function rather than the “handle event” function and passes it a sink name, such as “sink1”).
• At the bottom ofFIG. 66 is a flow diagram of the communication query function for vector objects, as implemented within the type-specific functions block5860 ofFIG. 58. The function begins atstep6626 when it is called by the “handle event” function of the relation-basedcommunications block5760, with an object path and a source name passed as arguments. Instep6628, the source name from the previous step is evaluated, and if it is not equal to “out1,” then instep6632 the function returns a null value to the caller. Otherwise, if the source name is “out1,” then instep6630 the function returns the current value for its dynamically changing ouput (previously stored in the vector TSF-OSDS by the vector object processing function). Of course by replicating the evaluation ofstep6628 for other source names (“out2,” “out3,” etc.) a number of channels of vector object output may be supported. With regard to the communication query functions for the other type-specific sub-modules, beyond the relation bussing noted above, these functions can be configured to provide access to a variety of useful information about objects, such as display settings, various playback parameters (including flags), variables within script objects (including text strings), etc.
• We now turn to a discussion of the relation-based communications block5760 ofFIG. 57. This component provides communications between object playback processes based on low-level relations read from the data manager (5030,5130). An overview of the relation-based communications functionality of the preferred system was provided earlier in the discussion of the type-specific functions block5860 ofFIG. 58. Recall from that discussion that two forms of relation-based communications are provided: “event-action” communications and “sink-source” communications. These two forms of relation-based communications are implemented in the functions “handle event” and “read source,” respectively. The relation-based communications block5760 also provides query functions for converting from low-level relations read from the data manager into high-level relations that correspond to the programming functions of the sentence paradigm (discussed in reference toFIGS. 9A through 27D). The above functions of the relation-based communications block5760 are now described.
• The left side ofFIG. 67 shows a flow diagram of the function “handle event,” as implemented within the relation-based communications block5760 ofFIG. 57. The function begins atstep6700 when it is called by the type-specific functions block5860 ofFIG. 58, or by the userinput handling block5780 ofFIG. 57, with an event name and the path of an “event object” passed as arguments. Instep6702, a path string for the container containing the event object is created by removing the object name from the end of the path fromstep6700. Next, instep6704, a listing of the relations among the objects contained in the container ofstep6702 is acquired from the data manager. Recall that in the preferred implementation of the system, a low-level relation relates two objects (which can be one and the same object) that are directly contained within a container, by specifying each object name of the two objects and the name and type of a relational capablity for each object. Recall also that the capability types include: event, action, sink and source.
• After the listing of relations is acquired instep6704, the rest of the “handle event” function comprises a loop that processes the relation listing as follows. Instep6706, the first relation in the listing is specified as being the current relation for the present loop iteration. Next, instep6708, each “side” of the current relation (consisting of object name, capability name and capability type) is compared with the event object and event name fromstep6700 and the capability type “event.” If there is no match, then the function continues atstep6720.
• Otherwise, if there is a match instep6708, then instep6710 the “action object” and the “action name” are aquired from the other side of the relation. Next, instep6712, a query is issued to the playback commands block5820 ofFIG. 58 to determine if the action object from the previous step is playing. If it is, then in step6714 a function call is issued to the communication response function for the action object (in type-specific functions block5860), with the action object and action name specified as arguments. Otherwise, if the action object is not playing, then instep6716 the action name is compared to the text string “start,” and if there is no match, then operation continues atstep6720. Otherwise, if there is a match, then instep6718 the object start function ofFIG. 59 is called to start the action object. In addition, steps6716 and6718 support the random start functionality ofFIG. 14B as follows: if the text string matched instep6716 is “r-start” rather than “start,” then instep6718 the action object is not started but is rather placed on a random start list, and before exiting, the function randomly selects one object from this random start list and starts it. Instep6720, when the above handling for the current relation is complete, if the current relation is the last relation in the listing fromstep6704, the function is done6724. Otherwise, instep6722, the next relation in the listing is made current, and the loop continues atstep6708.
• The right side ofFIG. 67 shows a flow diagram of the function “read source,” as implemented within the relation-based communications block5760 ofFIG. 57. The function begins atstep6726 when it is called by the type-specific functions block5860 ofFIG. 58, with a sink name and the path of a “sink object” passed as arguments. Instep6728, a path string for the container containing the sink object is created by removing the object name from the end of the path fromstep6726. Next, instep6730, a listing of the low-level relations among the objects contained in the container ofstep6728 is acquired from the data manager. Recall again that in the preferred implementation of the system, a low-level relation relates two objects (which can be one and the same object) that are directly contained within a container, by specifying each object name of the two objects and the name and type of a relational capablity for each object. Recall also that the capability types include: event, action, sink and source.
• After the listing of relations is acquired instep6730, the rest of the “read source” function comprises a loop that processes the relation listing as follows. Instep6732, the first relation in the listing is specified as being the current relation for the present loop iteration. Next, instep6734, each “side” of the relation (consisting of object name, capability name and capability type) is compared with the sink object and sink name fromstep6726 and the capability type “sink.” If there is no match, then the function continues atstep6742.
• Otherwise, if there is a match instep6734, then instep6736 the “source object” and the “source name” are aquired from the other side of the relation from the matching object. Next, instep6738, a query is issued to the playback commands block5820 ofFIG. 58 to determine if the source object from the previous step is playing. If it is not, then the function continues atstep6742. Otherwise, if it is playing, then in step6740 a function call is issued to the communication query function for the source object (in type-specific functions block5860), with the source object and source name specified as arguments; the return value from this function call is added to a “total” variable (which was initialized to zero at the beginning of the function). Instep6742, when the above handling for the current relation is complete, if the current relation is the last relation in the listing fromstep6730, the function returns the value of the “total” variable to thecaller6746. Otherwise, instep6744, the next relation in the listing is made current and the loop continues atstep6734.
• As mentioned above, the relation-based communications block5760 also provides query functions for converting from low-level relations accessed from the data manager into high-level relations corresponding to the functions of the sentence paradigm. Three such query functions are provided. The first query function provides a listing of all the high-level relations existing among objects in a given container (including an activity level for each such relation based on how recently it was last triggered). The second query function provides a listing of any high-level relations associated with a given object (also, as above, including an activity level for each such relation). The third query function provides a listing of any “partner objects” associated with a given high-level relation for a given object. These three query functions, detailed in the following paragraphs, are called from thecontrol display manager5060 when rendering map view and list view control displays (as seen in FIGS.30A-B); the third one is also called from the CCO start function ofFIG. 64 when performing start propagation.
• Before describing the three query functions of the relation-basedcommunications block5760, some associated support functionality is explained. First, a subroutine is provided for determining whether or not a given low-level relation is an embodiment, either in whole or in part, of a high-level relation (and if so, which one). It does this by examining the given low-level relation (as well as, potentially, other low-level relations in the same container) to determine which high-level function created it; this is essentially the opposite of the logic that occurs when low-level relations are created via the sentence programming paradigm (which is detailed in connection with the edit manager5640). Second, an “activity” history, consisting of a list of recently triggered high-level relations and the time that each was last triggered, is maintained by the relation-based communications block5760 as follows. Whenever the “handle event” function ofFIG. 67 performsstep6714 or6718, the corresponding high-level relation is derived using the above support routine, and is added to or updated in the activity history (its trigger time is set to the current time). The first two of the three query functions below, in order to return the activity level for a given high-level relation, search this activity listing for that relation, and if it is there, derive the activity level based on the the amount of time passed since the relation was last triggered (starting at one hundred percent when the relation is triggered and going down to zero percent over a preferred time duration).
• The first of the three query functions of the relation-based communications block5760 ofFIG. 57 provides a listing of all the high-level relations existing among the objects in a given container, and an activity level for each such relation, as follows. First, the function builds an overall list of all of the high-level relations within the specified container. To do this, it gets the listing of low-level relations from the data manager, and for each low-level relation, it uses the above support routine to determine what if any high-level relation it corresponds to. Each high-level relation derived in this way, if it is not redundant with one already on the list, is added to the list. Next, the function aquires the current activity level for each high-level relation in the list as per the above support functionality. Once all the high-level relations and their activity levels have been added to the list, the list is returned.
• The second of the three query functions of the relation-based communications block5760 ofFIG. 57 provides a listing of any existing high-level relations associated with a given object and an activity level for each such relation, as follows. First, using techniques similar to those in the previous query function, the present function builds an overall list of all the high-level relations within the container that contains the specified object. Next, the function searches this overall list for any high-level relations that include the specified object (if the relation is “directional” as per the discussion of the sentence paradigm ofFIGS. 9A through 27D, then the specified object must be the “acting” object in order for there to be a match). Any matching relations found in this way are added to a secondary list, along with their current activity level as per the above support functionality. Once all the relations in the overall list have been evaluated in this way, the secondary list is returned.
• The third of the three query functions of the relation-based communications block5760 ofFIG. 57 provides a listing of any “partner objects” associated with a given high-level relation for a given object, as follows. First, as above, the function builds an overall list of all the high-level relations within the container that contains the object. Next, the list is searched for any high-level relations that match the specified relation and specified object, and for any such matching relations, the object which is not the matching object (i.e., the partner object) is added to a secondary list. Note that if the specified high-level relation corresponds to either the function ofFIG. 17 (“objects A and B play together”) orFIG. 18 (“objects A and B play separately”), then it is transitive, which requires that the process of finding matching relations be performed again for any partner objects which are found, and again for partners of those objects, etc. Finally, when the above matching process is complete, the function returns the secondary list.
• We now turn to a discussion of the userinput handling block5780 ofFIG. 57. The userinput handling block5780 interpretsincoming user input5782 and in response issues commands to any of the other functional blocks of playback manager5700 (playback processing block5720,navigation block5740, relation-based communications block5760). Theincoming user input5782 consists of various user actions, such as key commands, sequence commands, actions of a pointing device in the playback display, and selection of any of the following command icons: the editmode command icon130 ofFIG. 1B; the containerstart toggle button808 ofFIG. 8A; the publishcommand icon3100 ofFIG. 31A. Moreover, as discussed earlier, when the system is in edit mode, the userinput handling block5780 receivesuser input5782 and routes it5784 out of the playback manager to theedit manager5640 ofFIG. 56 (in some cases performing initial processing on the user input before passing it along). The various handling functions of the userinput handling block5780 are now described.
• To implement the handling for the three command icons mentioned above, at system initialization time the userinput handling block5780 calls the system menu services to create and place the various icons in the user interface; each icon is associated with a callback function in the userinput handling block5780. Thereafter, whenever the user selects one of these command icons, its associated callback function is called. The callback function for the editmode command icon130 ofFIG. 1B operates as follows: it toggles edit mode by checking the current status of edit mode and setting it to the opposite. The callback function for the containerstart toggle button808 ofFIG. 8A operates as follows: it queries theplayback processing block5720 to get the master object path from thepresentation data structure5908 ofFIG. 59, then it queries theplayback processing block5720 to see if that master object is playing; if it's playing it is stopped, and if it's not playing it is started.
• The callback function for the publishicon3100 ofFIG. 31A operates as follows. First, it presents a dialog box to the user for selecting among various publishing options. Next, it exports a database containing the desired data by calling the data manager export function, passing as an argument the “master object path” from thepresentation data structure5908 which is assigned to the topmost playback display. Next, it publishes the just created database according to the selected option presented in the above dialog box: (1) by adding an executable “wrapper” to the database so that it may be “launched” within a standard operating system or other computing environment; (2) by copying the database over a network to a known server location; or (3) by logging the database with a peer-to-peer filesharing system. For a more extensive explanation of the network-related capabilities and options of the present invention, see the discussion provided earlier in connection withFIG. 49.
• FIG. 68 shows a flow diagram of the function for handling “mouse down” input events (which are caused by user activation of the mouse button or other pointing device), as implemented within the userinput handling block5780 ofFIG. 57. The function begins atstep6800 when it is called by the main loop, or by itself recursively (as discussed below), with a canvas ID, click x-position and y-position, and a double-click flag passed as arguments. Instep6802, the x and y coordinates from the previous step (which use the coordinate system of the context of the specified canvas) are converted into local coordinates for the specified canvas; this is accomplished by calling a utility function in the graphics engine which calculates the local coordinates based on the current zoom and scroll settings for the specified canvas. Next, in step6804, a graphics engine function is called to determine if the x and y coordinates from the previous step (i.e., where the user clicked) is a location over an item on the draw list of the specified canvas ID; this graphics engine function is passed the canvas ID fromstep6800 and the adjusted click position from the previous step, and returns the item ID of the top item hit (or zero if no item was hit).
• Next, instep6806, an attempt is made to find a playing object that corresponds to the item ID returned in the previous step; to do this, the object list in thepresentation data structure5908 ofFIG. 59 is searched, with the goal of finding anOSDS5910 whose type-specific portion (TSF-OSDS6120 ofFIG. 61) has an item ID equal to the item ID returned in the previous step. Next, instep6808, the success of the previous step is evaluated, and if no such object was found, then instep6810 it is assumed that the user clicked on the background, and an attempt is made to find a playing container control object responsible for the background of the draw list specified by the canvas ID fromstep6800; to do this, the object list is again searched to find anOSDS5910 whose object type is equal to CCO and whose canvas ID equal to the above canvas ID (if there are several CCOs sharing the specified canvas ID due to nested container playback, the one highest in the hierarchy is selected). Next, instep6812, the success of the previous step is evaluated, and if no such object was found, the function is done6814; otherwise, if an appropriate CCO was found, the operation of the function continues atstep6830.
• If the evaluation ofstep6808 was successful, meaning that an object matching the item ID from step6804 was found, then instep6816 an evaluation is made as to whether or not the item that the user clicked on is a sub-display being managed by a container object. If it is not, then the operation of the function continues atstep6830. Otherwise, if the item is a sub-display, then instep6818 the double-click flag fromstep6800 is evaluated to determine whether or not the mouse-down event currently being handled is the second click of a double-click (i.e., the second of two clicks in quick succession). If the double-click flag is set to true, then instep6820 the “navigate” function in thenavigation block5740 ofFIG. 57 is called to trigger user navigation into the clicked upon sub-display (as seen inFIG. 43), with theOSDS5910 of the container object fromstep6806 passed as an argument. When the function call ofstep6820 returns, the present function is done6822.
• Otherwise, if the double-click flag examined instep6818 is set to false, then instep6824 the mode of the system is checked, and if edit mode is currently active, the function continues atstep6830. Otherwise, if edit mode is not active, then instep6826 the present function calls itself recursively in order to pass the click “into the sub-display” for further handling; this allows users to interact with presentations that are being displayed within nested sub-displays (as seen inFIG. 40). For the recursive function call ofstep6826, the canvas ID passed as an argument is the “sub-canvas ID” which was stored in the TSF-OSDS when the container start function first allocated the nested draw list associated with the sub-display item; also, before passing the x-position and y-postion fromstep6802 as arguments, they are adjusted so that they are relative to the upper left corner of the sub-display item. When the recursive function call ofstep6826 returns, the function is done6828.
• Instep6830, the mode of the system is checked, and if edit mode is active, then in step6836 a function call is issued to the “handle edit mouse-down” function in theedit manager5640 ofFIG. 56. This function performs edit processing as discussed later in this specification, and the arguments passed to it are theOSDS5910 for the object found instep6806 or6810, and the x and y coordinates fromstep6802. When the function call ofstep6836 returns, the present function is done6838. Otherwise, if edit mode is not active, then in step6832 a function call is issued to the “handle event” function in the relation-based communications block5760 ofFIG. 57, with the text string “M-Click” and the path of the object found instep6806 or6810 passed as arguments. This call to the “handle event” function triggers any programmed behavior associated with the user clicking on an object (as seen in many of the functions of the sentence programming paradigm ofFIGS. 9A through 27D). When the function call ofstep6832 returns, the present function is done6834.
• In addition to the “handle mouse-down” function just described, the userinput handling block5780 ofFIG. 57 also includes handling functions for mouse-up events (the release of the mouse button or pointing device), mouse-move events (movement of the mouse or pointing device), sequence commands (user-initiated commands to progress to the next item in a sequence, as might be used in a slide presentation), and keystroke events (pressing of keys on a keypad); these handling functions are described as follows.
• The handling function for mouse-up events receives the same arguments as the above mouse-down handling function. First it converts the click position to local coordinates (as was done in the above mouse-down function), and then if edit mode is active, it calls the “handle edit mouse-up” function in theedit manager5640 ofFIG. 56, passing it the adjusted x and y coordinates as arguments.
• The handling function for mouse-move events receives as arguments a canvas ID and the pointer position. First it converts the pointer position to local coordinates (as was done in the above mouse-down function), and then if edit mode is active, it calls the “handle edit mouse-move” function in theedit manager5640 ofFIG. 56, passing it the adjusted x and y coordinates as arguments. If edit mode is not active, the function checks for movement of the pointer over (or off of) graphical items, in order to generate “mouse over” and “mouse leave” events that can be used to provide the functionality seen inFIG. 16B. To do this, it determines if the pointer is over a graphical item corresponding to a playing object (in a manner similar to the above mouse-down handling function, including calling itself recursively if the pointer is over a nested sub-display). If such an object is found, and it was not found in the previous call to this function, then a function call is issued to the “handle event” function in the relation-basedcommunications block5760, with the path of the found object and the text string “M-Over” as arguments. If such an object is not found, and it was found in the previous call to this function, then a function call is issued to the “handle event” function with the path of the previously found object and the text string “M-Leave” as arguments.
• The handling function for sequence commands reads one or more “next” relations from the data manager along with the play state of their associated objects, determines which is the earliest object in the sequence that is not playing, and starts that object.
• Two handling functions are provided for keystroke events, one for handling key-down events and one for handling key-up events. Each of these functions receives an ascii key code, and if edit mode is active, calls a corresponding keystroke handling function in theedit manager5640 ofFIG. 56 (passing it the ascii key code as an argument). In addition, in the key-down handling function, if the key is the “escape” key and edit mode is not active and “back navigation” is pending, then the “navigate back” function of thenavigation block5740 ofFIG. 57 is called (note that this key command is redundant with the back navigation command icon, such asicon3850 ofFIG. 38B).
• We now turn to a discussion of thenavigation block5740 ofFIG. 57. This navigation block provides functionality for user navigation as seen in FIGS.38A-B, as well as in other figures where user navigation is shown in conjunction with other features (such as networking in FIGS.39A-B, sub-displays inFIGS. 43 through 45C, etc.). To implement user navigation as seen in these figures, thenavigation block5740 provides two functions, “navigate” and “navigate back.” These two functions are complementary to one another, making use of a “back navigation stack” where objects preempted by navigation are preserved until corresponding back navigation restores them, as follows.
• FIG. 69 shows a flow diagram of the “navigate” function, as implemented within thenavigation block5740 ofFIG. 57. The function begins atstep6900 when it is called either by the container start function in the type-specific functions block5860, or by the mouse-down function in the userinput handling block5780, with anOSDS5910 passed as an argument. Instep6902, the function verifies that the object type in the OSDS from the previous step specifies a container object, and that the “navigable flag” in the setup data stored in the type-specific portion of the OSDS is set to true (the function returns with a failure code if either is not the case). Next, instep6904, a function call is issued to thecontrol display manager5060 to initiate “synchronized exploration” (as seen in FIGS.38A-B), with the object path from the above OSDS passed as an argument.
• Instep6906, the “sub-display flag” in the setup data stored in the type-specific portion of the OSDS fromstep6900 is checked to determine if sub-display functionality is enabled. If the flag is set to false, meaning that sub-display functionality is not enabled, then operation continues atstep6916. Otherwise, a “zoom-in” effect for the sub-display (such as that depicted in FIGS.45A-C) is provided as follows. Two draw lists, referred to as “canvases” in the following discussion, are involved in this zoom effect: an “outer canvas” that corresponds to the overall playback display (specified by the master canvas ID in the presentation data structure5908), and an “inner canvas” that corresponds to the sub-display being zoomed into (specified by the item ID in the type-specific portion of the OSDS from step6900). Instep6908, the current parameter settings for the outer canvas (width, height, zoom, scroll) and inner canvas (its various display settings) are read from the graphics engine and stored. Next, instep6910, the target values for those same parameters are determined based on what they need to be in order for the sub-display to exactly fill the playback display (with the outer canvas still surrounding it as before, but unseen beyond the borders of the playback display).
• Next, instep6912, a “while loop” is performed for a preferred “zoom duration,” with each iteration of the loop performing the following operations. First, the percentage of completion of the zoom is determined based on the start time for the zoom, the current time and the zoom duration. Then, the above canvas parameters for both canvases are adjusted to interpolate between their initial values and their target values based on the percentage of completion of the zoom. Then, various update functions are called as needed to maintain the operation of the system (these are normally called by the system services, but this loop prevents that and must therefore make the update calls). Once the loop instep6912 detects that the zoom duration has been exceeded, then instep6914 the above parameters for both canvases are restored to their initial values from step6908 (this last step is not displayed in the playback display, but is merely “cleanup” to return the canvases to their normal states in preparation for ensuing operations).
• Instep6916, a “back navigation state” (BNS)data structure6936 is allocated, and its variables are initialized as follows: the “master object path” is set to the master object path from thepresentation data structure5908; the “sub-canvas ID” is set to the sub-canvas ID in the type-specific portion of the OSDS from step6900 (it was set by the container start function of the type-specific functions block5860 when the sub-display item was created, or is zero if there is no sub-display); the “background color” is set to the current background color of the playback display; the “navigation time” is set to the current system time.
• Next, instep6918, a loop is performed for eachOSDS5910 in the object list of thepresentation data structure5908, as follows. Instep6920, the object path from the current OSDS is compared with the container path from the OSDS ofstep6900 to see if the current object is contained (either directly or indirectly) within the container object fromstep6900. If it is not contained in that container, then instep6922, any graphical item (or sound item) currently being displayed for the current object is removed by calling the graphics engine (or sound services) and passing it the canvas ID and item ID from the current OSDS (the item ID being stored in the type-specific portion). Then, instep6924, the current OSDS is removed from the object list of thepresentation data structure5908 and is added to the object list of the BNS data structure6936 (maintaining the object's playback state so that when corresponding back navigation occurs the preempted presentation data is restored to its pre-navigation condition). Otherwise, if the current object is contained in the container from step6900 (which by implication means that sub-display functionality is enabled for that container), then instep6926, if the canvas ID in the type-specific portion of the current OSDS is the same as the sub-canvas ID in the type-specific portion of the OSDS from step6900 (meaning that the current object is directly displayed within the sub-display of the container from step6900), then the canvas ID of the current OSDS is set to the master canvas ID from thepresentation data structure5908, and the graphical item specified by the item ID in the type-specific portion of the current OSDS is moved accordingly (by deleting it from the sub-display draw list and adding it to the master draw list).
• Once the loop ofstep6918 is complete, then instep6928 the background color for the draw list specified by master canvas ID in thepresentation data structure5908 is set to the background color specified in the setup data for the container control object directly contained in the container object of the OSDS fromstep6900, and the master object path in thepresentation data structure5908 is set to the path of the container object of the OSDS fromstep6900. Next, instep6930, theBNS data structure6936 fromstep6916 is added to a “back navigation stack,” where it is preserved pending corresponding back navigation (if this is the first such BNS added to the stack, then a “back navigation command icon” such asicon3850 inFIG. 38B is added to the user interface via the system services and associated with the “navigate back” function ofFIG. 70). Next, instep6932, a function call is issued to the “handle event” function in the relation-based communications block5760 ofFIG. 57, specifying the container control object directly contained in the container object of the OSDS fromstep6900 and the event name “Nav-Forward” (this supports the function of FIGS.26A-B “container object A, upon navigation into sub-display, starts contained object B”). When the function call ofstep6932 returns, the present function is done6934.
• FIG. 70 shows a flow diagram of the function “navigate back,” as implemented within thenavigation block5740 ofFIG. 57. The function begins atstep7000 when it is called either by the system services in response to user selection of the “back navigation command icon” mentioned above, by the key-down function in the userinput handling block5780, or by the presentation update function in theupdate function block5840. Instep7002 the function verifies that the back navigation stack (discussed above in connection with the “navigate” function ofFIG. 69) has at least oneBNS data structure6936 on it from a previous call to the “navigate” function (the present function returns with a failure code if this is not the case). Next, instep7004, a function call is issued to the “handle event” function in the relation-basedcommunication block5760 ofFIG. 57, specifying the container control object directly contained by the current master object in thepresentation data structure5908, and the event name “Nav-Back” (this supports the function of FIGS.26C-D “container object A, upon navigation back from sub-display, stops contained object B”).
• Next, instep7006, the sub-canvas ID in thetop BNS6936 on the back navigation stack is checked to determine if sub-display functionality is enabled. If the sub-canvas ID is zero, meaning that sub-display functionality is not enabled, then instep7008 the object list in thepresentation data structure5908 is purged (all OSDS data structures are removed and deallocated, and their graphical items are deleted from their respective draw lists). Otherwise, in step7010 a loop is performed for each OSDS in the object list of thepresentation data structure5908 as follows: if the canvas ID in the type-specific portion of the current OSDS is the same as the master canvas ID in thepresentation data structure5908, then the canvas ID in the current OSDS is set to the sub-canvas ID stored in thetop BNS6936 on the back navigation stack, and the graphical item specified by the item ID in the type-specific portion of the current OSDS is moved accordingly (by deleting it from the master draw list and adding it to the sub-display draw list).
• Next, instep7012, a loop is performed for each OSDS in the object list of thetop BNS6936 on the back navigation stack, as follows. Instep7014, the current OSDS is removed from the object list of the BNS and is added to the object list of thepresentation data structure5908. Next, instep7016, any time variables in the current OSDS (including the type-specific portion) are adjusted to account for the time spent on the back navigation stack (the “navigation time” in the BNS is subtracted from the current system time, and the result is added to the OSDS time variables). Next, instep7018, if the current object is a type that involves a graphical item (or sound item), then the graphics engine (or sound services) is called and the item is created and initialized (by performing operations similar to those in the type-specific start function for objects of that type).
• Once the loop ofstep7012 is complete, then instep7020 the background color for the draw list specified by the master canvas ID in thepresentation data structure5908 is set to the “background color” from thetop BNS6936 on the back navigation stack, and the master object path in thepresentation data structure5908 is set to the master object path from the top BNS. Next, instep7022, a function call is issued to thecontrol display manager5060, with the master object path from the top BNS passed as an argument, to initiate “synchronized exploration” (this time for back navigation).
• Instep7024, the sub-canvas ID in the top BNS is checked to determine if sub-display functionality is enabled. If the sub-canvas ID is zero, meaning that sub-display functionality is not enabled, then operation continues atstep7034. Otherwise, a “zoom-out” effect for the sub-display (similar to that depicted in FIGS.45A-C, except in reverse) is provided as follows. As with the zoom effect in the above “navigate” function, two draw lists, referred to as “canvases,” are involved: an “outer canvas” that corresponds to the overall playback display, and an “inner canvas” that corresponds to the sub-display being zoomed away from. Instep7026, the initial parameter settings for the outer canvas (width, height, zoom, scroll) and inner canvas (its various display settings) are determined such that the inner canvas exactly fills the playback display and the outer canvas surrounds it but is unseen beyond the borders of the playback display (as it was at the end of the zoom in the above “navigate” function). Next, instep7028, the target parameter settings for both canvases, i.e., their normal values independent of any zooming, are stored.
• Next, instep7030, a “while loop” is performed for a pre-determined “zoom duration,” with each iteration of the loop performing the following operations. First, the percentage of completion for the zoom is determined based on the start time for the zoom, the current time and the zoom duration. Then, the above canvas parameters for both canvases are adjusted to interpolate between their starting and target values based on the percentage of completion for the zoom. Then, system update functions are called as needed to maintain the operation of the system (these are normally called by the system services, but this loop prevents that and must therefore make the calls). Once the present loop determines that the zoom duration has been exceeded, then instep7032 the above parameters for both canvases are set to their target values fromstep7028, completing the zoom operation.
• Instep7034, the topBNS data structure6936 is removed from the back navigation stack and deallocated (if this removal leaves the stack empty, then the “back navigation command icon” previously created by the above “navigate” function is removed from the user interface). With that, the function is done7036.
• We now turn to a discussion of theedit manager block5640 ofFIG. 56. As discussed earlier, this block responds touser input5642 by modifying presentation data via edit commands5646 sent to the data manager (5030,5130), and also provides refresh calls5644 to theplayback manager5620 to keep playback processes and playback output up to date as objects are being edited. In addition to handlinguser input5642, theedit manager5640 is called by the system services whenever an edit command icon is selected by the user, and is also called by thecontrol display manager5060 whenever an object icon or display backdrop is selected in a control display by the user.
• Theedit manager5640 includes various functions for providing editing functionality, as follows. First, three functions are provided for handling user input that involves a mouse or other pointing device: “handle edit mouse-down” is called when the user presses the mouse button or pointing device; “handle edit mouse-move” is called when the user moves the mouse or pointing device; and “handle edit mouse-up” is called when the user releases the mouse button or pointing device. Next, two functions are provided for handling user input that involves keys on a keypad: “handle edit key-down” and “handle edit key-up” are called when keys are pressed and released, respectively. Next, an “update edit” function provides periodic time-based processing associated with various editing operations. Finally, three functions are provided for handling user input that involves command icons: “handle edit command” is called when the user selects a command icon for an edit command; “cmd object click” is called when the user selects an object in either the playback display or control display; and “cmd background click” is called when the user selects the background of either the playback display or control display. These last three functions comprise a “state machine” that can handle user commands involving more than one user action; in an alternate implementation, this state machine can be extended by one level to handle the additional state produced by discrete selection of the triggering event and triggered action for certain functions of the sentence paradigm (as exemplified in the functions of FIGS.9C-D and10C-D). Each of these functions of theedit manager5640 is now described.
• FIG. 71 shows a flow diagram of the function “handle edit mouse-down,” as implemented within theedit manager block5640 ofFIG. 56. The function begins atstep7100 when it is called by the “handle mouse-down” function of the userinput handling block5780 ofFIG. 57, with theOSDS5910 of the clicked object and the current mouse position passed as arguments. Instep7102, the function verifies that edit mode is active, and returns with an error if it is not. Next, instep7104, it checks to see if either color dragging or shape/softness dragging (as seen inFIGS. 4C and 6B, respectively) is in process by examining the “drag type” variable in theedit variables7132 shown at the bottom ofFIG. 71. If this “drag type” variable specifies that either color dragging or shape/softness dragging is in process, then instep7106 the “drag type” variable is set to null and the function is done7108. Otherwise, instep7110, the “edit object” variable in theedit variables7132 is set to the OSDS fromstep7100.
• Next, instep7112, it is determined whether or not an edit command is currently in process. This will be the case if an edit command has been initiated by selection of an edit command icon, but a required additional selection has not yet occurred (a full explanation of this edit command functionality is provided below in the discussion ofFIGS. 74 through 77). If an edit command is in process, then instep7114 the object type of the “edit object” in theedit variables7132 is evaluated, and if it is a container control object, then in step7116 a function call is issued to the “cmd background click” function ofFIG. 76 to conclude the edit command (the click position fromstep7100 and the path of the container object that contains the “edit object” are passed as arguments). When the function call ofstep7116 returns, the present function is done7118. Otherwise, if the evaluation ofstep7114 determines that the “edit object” is not a container control object, then in step7120 a function call is issued to the “cmd object click” function ofFIG. 75 to conclude the edit command (the click position fromstep7100 and the path of the “edit object” are passed as arguments). When the function call ofstep7120 returns, the present function is done7122.
• If it is determined instep7112 that an edit command is not in process, then instep7124 the object type of the “edit object” in theedit variables7132 is evaluated, and if it is a container control object (meaning that the user clicked on the playback display background), then the function is done7126. Otherwise, if the “edit object” is not a container control object (meaning that the user clicked on a visual item such as text, picture, video, sub-display, etc.), then in step7128 a select box with side and corner drag handles (as seen in FIGS.5C-D) is created around the clicked upon item, and a drag operation is started by initializing the three drag-related variables in theedit variables7132, as follows. The “drag xPos” and “drag yPos” variables (which maintain the current x and y position of the pointing device) are set to the “xPos” and “yPos” from step7100 (the click location). The “drag type” is set according to where the click is located relative to the graphical boundaries of the item being clicked on. If the click corresponds to one of the four side drag handles (as seen inFIG. 5C), then the “drag type” variable is set to one of four “stretch” drag types depending on which side drag handle was clicked. If the click corresponds to one of the four corner drag handles (as seen inFIG. 5D), then the “drag type” variable is set to one of four “crop” drag types depending on which corner drag handle was clicked. If the click corresponds to neither a side nor corner drag handle, then the “drag type” variable is set to “move” (as seen inFIG. 4A). With that, the function is done7130.
• FIG. 72 shows a flow diagram of the function “handle edit mouse-move,” as implemented within theedit manager block5640 ofFIG. 56. The function begins atstep7200 when it is called by the “handle mouse-move” function of the userinput handling block5780 ofFIG. 57, with the current mouse position passed as an argument. Instep7202, the function verifies that edit mode is active and that the “edit object” in theedit variables7132 ofFIG. 71 is properly set (it returns with an error if either condition is not met). Next, instep7204, the difference between the current mouse position, specified by the “xPos” and “yPos” arguments fromstep7200, and the previous mouse position, specified by the “drag xPos” and “drag yPos” variables in theedit variables7132, is calculated and stored in two local variables, “delta-x” and “delta-y,” representing the change in the x and y coordinates, respectively. Next, instep7206, the “xPos” and “yPos” arguments fromstep7200 are written into the “drag xPos” and “drag yPos” variables in the edit variables7132 (so as to be the “previous” position next time this function is called). In the remainder of the function, the “drag type” variable in theedit variables7132 is evaluated and the appropriate steps are taken depending on what type of drag is in progress, as follows.
• Instep7208, if the “drag type” is set to “move” (as seen inFIG. 4A), then instep7210 the current display settings for the x and y position of the “edit object” are read from the data manager, new settings are calculated based on the “delta-x” and “delta-y” variables fromstep7204, and the new settings are written to the data manager.
• Otherwise, instep7212, if the “drag type” is set to “color drag” (as seen inFIG. 4C), then instep7214 the current display setting for the color of the “edit object” is read from the data manager and a new setting is determined based on the “delta-x” and “delta-y” variables fromstep7204, as follows. The color is stored as RGB values (red, green, blue). Using a standard conversion function, the color is converted to HSL values (hue, saturation, luminosity). The “delta-x” is used to determine a new hue value, with a “wraparound” when the maximum or minimum hue value is exceeded. The “delta-y” is used to determine a new luminosity (brightness) value. Once the new values have been determined, the HSL is converted back to RGB using a standard conversion function, and the new color setting is written to the data manager.
• Otherwise, instep7216, if the “drag type” is set to one of the four “stretch” drag types (as seen inFIG. 5C), then instep7218 the current display settings for the x and y stretch and x and y position of the “edit object” are read from the data manager, and new settings are determined based on the “delta-x” and “delta-y” variables fromstep7204. The determination of the new settings takes into account which side was selected and any resulting interaction between the stretch of the item and the position of the item (for example, when stretching the left side to the left to increase the “x-stretch” of the item, the position of the item must be moved to the left so that the right side doesn't move). Once the new settings have been determined, they are written to the data manager.
• Otherwise, instep7220, if the “drag type” is set to one of the four “crop” drag types (as seen inFIG. 5D), then instep7222 the current display settings for the width, height, x and y scroll and x and y position of the “edit object” are read from the data manager, and new settings are determined based on the “delta-x” and “delta-y” variables fromstep7204. This determination takes into account which corner was selected and any resulting interaction between the various display settings just mentioned (for example, when cropping the upper left corner downward to make the height smaller, the position of the item must be moved downward so that the bottom doesn't move, and the vertical scroll must be adjusted to keep the content from shifting downward). Once the new settings have been determined, they are written to the data manager.
• Otherwise, instep7224, if the “drag type” is set to “shape/softness drag” (as seen inFIG. 6B), then instep7226 the current display settings for the “shape” and “softness” of the “edit object” are read from the data manager and new settings are determined based on the “delta-x” and “delta-y” variables fromstep7204, as follows. The “delta-x” is used to determine a new “shape” value, and the “delta-y” is used to determine a new “softness” value. Once the new settings have been determined, they are written to the data manager.
• If any of the above tests for “drag type” is successful and the relevant display settings are adjusted (in any ofsteps7210,7214,7218,7222,7226), then operation of the function continues atstep7228 in which the type-specific refresh function in the type-specific functions block5860 is called for the “edit object” to update its playback processing and graphical display. When the function call ofstep7228 returns, the present function is done7230. Otherwise, if none of the above tests for “drag type” is successful, then the function is done7232.
• The “handle edit mouse-up” function of theedit manager block5640 is called by the “handle mouse-up” function of the userinput handling block5780 ofFIG. 57 when the user releases the mouse button or pointing device while edit mode is active. In this function, if the “drag type” is currently “move,” “stretch” or “crop,” then the “drag type” is set to null, which causes drag operations of those types to end upon release of the mouse button.
• The “handle edit key-down” and “handle edit key-up” functions of theedit manager block5640 are called by the corresponding key handling functions of the userinput handling block5780 ofFIG. 57 when the user presses or releases a keypad key while edit mode is active. In the present embodiment, four keys are used to control edit operations: the up and down arrow keys, and the left and right arrow keys. The status of these keys is maintained in two variables, “up-down status” and “left-right status,” by the above key handling functions as follows. Each of the above key handling functions receives an ascii key code as an argument. In the “handle edit key-down” function, if the key code specifies “up arrow” then “up-down status” is set to 1, and if the key code specifies “down arrow” then “up-down status” is set to −1; likewise, if the key code specifies “right arrow” then “left-right status” is set to 1, and if the key code specifies “left arrow” then “left-right status” is set to −1. In the “handle edit key-up” function, if the key code specifies “up arrow” or “down arrow” then “up-down status” is set to 0, and if the key code specifies “right arrow” or “left arrow” then “left-right status” is set to 0. As a result of these operations, the “up-down status” and “left-right status” variables reflect the current status of the four arrow keys, expressed as a positive or negative polarity (or zero) for the vertical and horizontal axes, respectively. These variables are used in the “update edit” function as follows.
• FIG. 73 shows a flow diagram of the function “update edit,” as implemented within theedit manager block5640 ofFIG. 56. The function begins atstep7300 when it is called by the “update presentation” function ofFIG. 60. Instep7302, it verifies that edit mode is active and that the “edit object” in theedit variables7132 ofFIG. 71 is properly set (it returns with an error if either condition is not met). Next, instep7304, the current value of the “up-down status” variable discussed above is evaluated, and if it is non-zero, then instep7306 the “drag type” variable in theedit variables7132 is examined to determine if color dragging is in process. If color dragging is not in process, then the pressing of the up or down key represented in the “up-down status” variable causes an adjustment to the size of the “edit object,” as seen inFIG. 4B. To accomplish this, instep7308 the size delta is determined based on the polarity of the “up-down status” variable and the amount of time passed since the last call to the present update function. Next, instep7310, the current display setting for the size of the “edit object” is read from the data manager, and the adjusted size is written back to the data manager. Next, instep7312, the type-specific refresh function in the type-specific functions block5860 is called for the “edit object” to update its playback processing and graphical display, after which operation continues atstep7320.
• Otherwise, if the evaluation ofstep7306 determines that color dragging is in progress, then the pressing of the up or down key represented in the “up-down status” variable causes an adjustment to the color saturation of the “edit object,” as seen inFIG. 4C. To accomplish this, instep7314 the saturation delta is determined based on the polarity of the “up-down status” variable and the amount of time passed since the last call to the present update function. Next, instep7316, the display setting for the color of the “edit object” is read from the data manager, and as in the “handle edit mouse-move” function ofFIG. 72, a standard RGB to HSL conversion is performed to isolate the saturation setting. The saturation is adjusted based on the saturation delta from the previous step, and the color parameters are then converted back to RGB and written back to the data manager. Next, instep7318, the type-specific refresh function in the type-specific functions block5860 is called for the “edit object” to update its playback processing and graphical display, after which operation continues atstep7320.
• Instep7320, the current value of the “left-right status” variable discussed above is evaluated, and if it is non-zero, then instep7322 it is determined whether or not the mouse button is being pressed (to do this, the “drag type” variable in theedit variables7132 is examined, and if the drag type is “move,” “stretch” or “crop,” the mouse button is being pressed). If the mouse button is not being pressed, then the pressing of the left or right key represented in the “left-right status” variable causes an adjustment to the transparency of the “edit object,” as seen inFIG. 5A. To accomplish this, instep7324 the transparency delta is determined based on the polarity of the “left-right status” variable and the amount of time passed since the last call to the present update function. Next, instep7326, the display setting for the transparency of the “edit object” is read from the data manager, and the adjusted transparency is written back to the data manager. Next, instep7328, the type-specific refresh function in the type-specific functions block5860 is called for the “edit object” to update its playback processing and graphical display, after which the function is done7336.
• Otherwise, if the evaluation ofstep7322 determines that the mouse button is being pressed, then the pressing of the left or right key represented in the “left-right status” variable causes an adjustment to the rotation of the “edit object,” as seen inFIG. 5B. To accomplish this, instep7330 the rotation delta is determined based on the polarity of the “left-right status” variable and the amount of time passed since the last call to the present update function. Next, instep7332, the display setting for the rotation of the “edit object” is read from the data manager, and the adjusted rotation is written back to the data manager. Next, instep7334, the type-specific refresh function in the type-specific functions block5860 is called for the “edit object” to update its playback processing and graphical display, after which the function is done7336.
• FIG. 74 shows a flow diagram of the function “handle edit command,” as implemented within theedit manager block5640 ofFIG. 56. The function begins atstep7400 when it is called by the system services in response to user selection of an edit command icon, with a “cmd code” that identifies the selected icon passed as an argument. Instep7402, it verifies that edit mode is active and returns with an error code if it is not. Next, instep7404, the “cmd flag” in the commandstate data structure7428 ofFIG. 74 is evaluated, and if it is set to true, then a previous command is currently in process, and operation continues at step7406 (this case involves multiple commands being combined together, and will be explained presently).
• Otherwise, if the “cmd flag” is false, then there is no previous command in process and the present command is occurring with a “clean slate,” in which case the commandstate data structure7428 is initialized instep7422 as follows. The “cmd flag” is not changed in this step, since it may need to stay false depending on which command is being handled. As for the “selected object,” if the most recently used display window is the playback display, then the “selected object” is set to the “edit object” in theedit variables7132 ofFIG. 71; alternatively, if a control display is the most recently used display, thecontrol display manager5060 is queried for a selected object, and the result of this query is written into the “selected object” variable. As for the rest of the commandstate data structure7428, in all cases but one, “cmd-code-main” is set to the “cmd code” fromstep7400 and “cmd-code-new” and “cmd-code-stop” are set to null. The one exception is when the “cmd code” fromstep7400 signifies the “repeat”icon2416 seen inFIG. 24A; in this case, the three “cmd-code” variables in the commandstate data structure7428 are left unchanged so as to repeat the previous edit command (alternatively or additionally, equivalent functionality may be provided in the “handle edit key-down” function when the user presses the “ctrl key,” in which case that function sets the “selected object” as discussed above and sets the “cmd flag” to true).
• Next, instep7424, one or more operations are performed which depend on the value of the “cmd-code-main” variable in the commandstate data structure7428. These operations are summarized below in thecharts7430,7432 and7434. After performing the operations specified in these charts, the function is done7426.
• Chart7430 indicates the handling when “cmd-code-main” signifies any one of the following: the new text command ofFIG. 2A, the new picture command ofFIG. 2B, the new sub-display command ofFIG. 3C, the drag color command ofFIG. 4C, the drag shape/softness command ofFIG. 6B, the duplicate command ofFIG. 2D, the export command ofFIG. 37A, the make pointer object command ofFIG. 34A, or one of the “sentence paradigm” commands ofFIGS. 9A through 27D. For each of these commands ofchart7430, the “cmd flag” in the commandstate data structure7428 is set to true.
• Chart7432 indicates the handling when “cmd-code-main” signifies any one of the following: the import command ofFIG. 2C, the new web cam picture command ofFIG. 3A, or the new web cam video command ofFIG. 3B. For each of these commands ofchart7432, a dialog box is presented to the user to aquire the necessary data (which is temporarily stored for later use by the “cmd background click” function), and the “cmd flag” in the commandstate data structure7428 is set to true.
• Chart7434 indicates the handling when “cmd-code-main” signifies any one of various commands used to toggle the settings of flags, including: the undulate flag ofFIG. 7A, the bounce flag ofFIG. 7B, the color cycle flag ofFIG. 7C, the entrance flag ofFIG. 7D, the exit flag ofFIG. 7E, the timeout flag ofFIG. 7F, the effect box flag ofFIG. 7G, the video end loop flag ofFIG. 7H, the random start flag ofFIG. 8B, the navigable flag ofFIG. 38A, and the sub-display flag ofFIG. 40. For each of these commands ofchart7434, the current value of the relevant flag for the “selected object” specified in the commandstate data structure7428 is read from the data manager (the flags are part of the object's setup data), the opposite value is written back to the data manager, and the type-specific refresh function for the “selected object” is called to update its playback processing and graphical display. Note that since these commands are fully executed within the present function, the “cmd flag” in the commandstate data structure7428 is not changed and remains false. Also note that in the case of the color cycling flag and the random start flag being changed for a container object, it is actually the container control object for the container in question which stores the flag; it is therefore the setup data of the container control object which is accessed as above.
• Returning now to step7404, it can be understood that in many cases after the present “handle edit command” function is called, an additional user selection (resulting in a call to “cmd object click” or “cmd background click”) is required to complete the command. When this is the case, the pending status of the command is represented by the “cmd flag” in the commandstate data structure7428 being set to true. If this is the condition when the “handle edit command” function is called, as determined instep7404, then the new command does not have a “clean slate” to work from, but must rather be combined with the pending command to form a “compound sentence” as follows.
• Compound sentence programming was discussed in connection with the sentence paradigm ofFIGS. 9A through 27D. Recall from that discussion that the combining of functions can be accomplished using three methods. The first method is to join a “stop action” with a “start action” whereby the “subject of the start action” does double duty as the “object of the stop action.” The second method is to join a “start or associate action” with an “object creation action” whereby the “object of the start or associate action” is created as a result of the sentence programming process. The third method, a blend of the first two, is to join a “stop action,” a “start action” and an “object creation action” whereby the “subject of the start action” does double duty as the “object of the stop action” and the “object of the start action” is created as a result of the sentence programming process. The presently preferred implementation for each of these methods is provided in part in the present function as follows.
• Instep7406, the “cmd code” fromstep7400 and the pending “cmd-code-main” in the command state data structure are evaluated to see if they meet the requirements of the second method cited above: the joining of a “start or associate action” with an “object creation action” (the incoming “cmd code” being the object creation action and the pending “cmd-code-main” being the start or associate action). If the requirements are met, then instep7408, if the object creation action is a new web cam picture or video, a dialog box is presented to the user to aquire the necessary data (which is temporarily stored for later use by the “cmd background click” function). Next, instep7410, the object creation action in the “cmd code” fromstep7400 is written into the “cmd-code-new” variable in the command state data structure7428 (making it part of the pending command). With that, the function is done7412.
• Otherwise, if instep7406 the requirements of the second method cited above are not met, then instep7414 the “cmd code” fromstep7400 and the pending “cmd-code-main” in the command state data structure are evaluated to see if they meet the requirements of the first method cited above: the joining of a “stop action” with a “start action” (the incoming “cmd code” being the start action and the pending “cmd-code-main” being the stop action). If the requirements are not met, then the function returns with anerror code7416. Otherwise, if the requirements are met, then instep7418 the pending stop action in “cmd-code-main” is written into the “cmd-code-stop” variable in the commandstate data structure7428, and the start action in the “cmd code” fromstep7400 is written into the “cmd-code-main” variable (replacing the previous stop action). With that, the function is done7420. Note that this leaves the command state data structure in a condition where a further call to “handle edit command” can be made for an object creation action, resulting in implementation of the third method cited above.
• FIG. 75 shows a flow diagram of the function “cmd object click,” as implemented within theedit manager block5640 ofFIG. 56. The function begins atstep7500 when it is called either by the “handle edit mouse-down” function of theedit manager5640, or by thecontrol display manager5060 when the user clicks on an object icon, with the path of the clicked object and the current mouse position passed as arguments. Instep7502, it verifies that the “cmd flag” in the commandstate data structure7428 ofFIG. 74 is set to true, and returns with an error code if it is not. Next, instep7504, it checks the “cmd-code-stop” variable in the command state data structure to see if that variable is set to valid code. If “cmd-code-stop” is not set to a valid code, the operation of the function continues atstep7508.
• Otherwise, if “cmd-code-stop” is set to a valid code, it signifies that a stop action has been joined with a start action according to one of the compound sentence programming methods discussed above, and instep7506 the data manager is called to create the appropriate low-level relation as follows. If “cmd-code-stop” signifies either the function ofFIG. 11 (“object A, when clicked, stops object B”) or the function ofFIG. 12 (“object A, when clicked, stops itself”), then an event-action relation is created between the “M-Click” event and the “Stop” action of the object specified in the “selected object” variable of the commandstate data structure7428. Otherwise, if “cmd-code-stop” signifies either of the “timer expiration siblings” of the above two functions (“object A, upon timer expiration, stops object B” or “object A, upon timer expiration, stops itself”), then a relation is created between the “Timer” event and the “Stop” action of the object specified in the “selected object” variable of the commandstate data structure7428. In either case, the operation of the function then continues atstep7508.
• Instep7508, the “cmd flag” in the commandstate data structure7428 is set to false, meaning that after the present function returns there will no longer be a command pending. Next, instep7510, one or more operations are performed which depend on the specific command pending in the “cmd-code-main” variable of the commandstate data structure7428. These operations are summarized below incharts7514 and7516. After performing the operations specified in these charts, the function is done7512.
• Chart7514 indicates the handling when “cmd-code-main” is either the drag color command ofFIG. 4C or the drag shape/softness command ofFIG. 6B. For each of these commands, the “cmd object click” function performs the following operations. First, it verifies that the “clicked object” fromstep7500 was clicked in the playback display (color dragging or shape/softness dragging does not apply to object icons clicked in the control display); if this verification fails, the function returns with an error code. Assuming the verification succeeds, then theedit variables7132 ofFIG. 71 are initialized as follows: the “edit object” is set to the “clicked object” fromstep7500, the “drag type” is set to color or shape/softness drag, and the “drag xPos” and “drag yPos” are set to the “xPos” and “yPos” fromstep7500.
• Chart7516 indicates the handling when “cmd-code-main” is one of the “sentence paradigm” commands ofFIGS. 9A through 27D. For each of these commands, the “cmd object click” function calls the data manager to create one or more low-level relations as per the charts shown in FIGS.77A-B. When creating the relations shown in these charts, “object A” is the “selected object” in the commandstate data structure7428, and “object B” is the “clicked object” fromstep7500.
• FIG. 76 shows a flow diagram of the function “cmd background click,” as implemented within theedit manager block5640 ofFIG. 56. The function begins atstep7600 when it is called either by the “handle edit mouse-down” function of theedit manager5640, or by thecontrol display manager5060 when the user clicks on the background of a control display, with the path of a container object and the current mouse position passed as arguments. Instep7602, it verifies that the “cmd flag” in the commandstate data structure7428 ofFIG. 74 is set to true, and returns with an error code if it is not. Next, instep7604, it examines the “cmd-code-new” variable in the commandstate data structure7428 to see if that variable is set to a valid code. If “cmd-code-new” is not set to a valid code, the operation of the function continues atstep7612.
• Otherwise, if “cmd-code-new” is set to a valid code, it signifies that a start or associate action has been joined with an object creation action according to one of the compound sentence programming methods discussed above. If this is the case, then instep7606 the present function creates the new object using operations similar to those described below in reference to chart7618 (which describes the handling when “cmd-code-main” is an object creation action). Next, instep7608, a function call is issued to the “cmd object click” function ofFIG. 75 with the path of the newly created object and the “xPos” and “yPos” fromstep7600 passed as arguments. This call implements the “compound sentence” functionality discussed above, and when it returns, the function is done7610.
• Otherwise, if “cmd-code-new” is not a valid code, then instep7612 the “cmd flag” in the commandstate data structure7428 is set to false, meaning that after the present function returns there will no longer be a command pending. Next, instep7614, one or more operations are performed which depend on the specific command pending in the “cmd-code-main” variable in the commandstate data structure7428. These operations are summarized below in thecharts7618,7620 and7622. After performing the operations specified in these charts, the function is done7616.
• Chart7618 indicates the handling when “cmd-code-main” signifies any of the following: the new text command ofFIG. 2A, the new picture command ofFIG. 2B, the new sub-display command ofFIG. 3C, the new web cam picture command ofFIG. 3A, the new web cam video command ofFIG. 3B, the import command ofFIG. 2C or3D, the export command ofFIG. 37A, the duplicate command ofFIG. 2D, or the make pointer object command ofFIG. 34A. For each of these commands, the “cmd background click” function performs its operations as follows.
• First, the next available object name is determined by appending “−1”, “−2” etc. to a default name so that the name of the new object will not conflict with an existing object. Then, the new object is created in the container fromstep7600 by calling the appropriate data manager function as follows. For the duplicate, export and make pointer object commands, corresponding data manager functions (“duplicate object,” “export object” and “make pointer object,” respectively) are called and are passed as arguments the path of the “selected object” in the commandstate data structure7428 and the intended path for the new object (which is created by appending the new object name to the container path from step7600). For the import command, the “duplicate object” command is called with the same arguments as above. In the case of the other commands, the data manager function “new object” is called and is passed as arguments the type and intended path for the new object; in the case of commands involving a dialog box (new web cam pict, new web cam video and import), the previously stored data from the “handle edit command” dialog box is also passed as an argument. Each of the above data manager functions is detailed later in this specification in the discussion of the data manager (5030,5130).
• Once the new object has been created, then various object parameters are set to initial values; this includes using the “xPos” and “yPos” fromstep7600 for either the display position of the object content (if the click was in the playback display) or for the icon position of the object (if the click was in a control display), and in the case of creating or importing a sub-display (as seen inFIGS. 3C and 3D) setting the sub-display flag for the newly created container object to true. Then, if the click was in the playback display, the newly created object is started so that its content appears in the playback display. Finally, the “edit object” in theedit variables7132 ofFIG. 71 is set to the newly created object, and in the case of the new picture command ofFIG. 2B the drag variables are set to initiate corner dragging as shown in that figure.
• Chart7620 indicates the handling when “cmd-code-main” signifies the drag color command ofFIG. 4C. For this command, the “cmd background click” function performs the following operations. First, it is verified that the user clicked on the background of the playback display (color dragging does not apply to the background of the control display); if this verification fails, the function returns with an error code. Assuming the verification succeeds, then theedit variables7132 ofFIG. 71 are initialized as follows: the “edit object” is set to the CCO contained by the container object fromstep7600; the “drag type” is set to color drag; and the “drag xPos” and “drag yPos” are set to the “xPos” and “yPos” fromstep7600.
• Chart7622 indicates the handling when “cmd-code-main” signifies one of the “sentence paradigm” commands ofFIGS. 9A through 27D. For each of these commands, the “cmd background click” function calls the data manager to create one or more low-level relations as per the charts shown in FIGS.77A-B. When creating the relations shown in these charts, “object A” is the “selected object” in commandstate data structure7428, and “object B” is the CCO contained by the container object fromstep7600.
• FIGS.77A-B show a series of charts that correlate between the high-level functions of the sentence paradigm ofFIGS. 9A through 27D, and the low-level relations created by “cmd object click” and “cmd background click” when the user executes a programming command of the sentence paradigm (as discussed in connection withFIGS. 75 and 76).FIG. 77A shows charts involving “event-action” relations, andFIG. 77B shows charts involving “sink-source” relations. In addition to the handling shown in the charts of FIGS.77A-B, further handling for additional functions is described in the text which follows the discussion of FIGS.77A-B. Moreover, various other programming functions discussed in connection withFIGS. 9A through 27D may be easily derived from the charts of FIGS.77A-B and associated discussion. Each of these charts is now discussed in turn, beginning with the charts ofFIG. 77A.
• Chart7700 shows that when the user selects the function of FIGS.9A-B (“object A, when clicked, starts object B”), an event-action relation is created between the “M-Click” event of object A and the “Start” action of object B.
• Chart7702 shows that when the user selects the function of FIGS.10A-B (“object A, upon timer expiration, starts object B”), an event-action relation is created between the “Timer” event of object A and the “Start” action of object B. Recall that this function of FIGS.10A-B is the “timer expiration sibling” of the function of FIGS.9A-B, and that other functions involving the condition “when clicked” also have “timer expiration siblings.”
• Chart7704 shows that when the user selects the function of FIGS.11A-B (“object A, when clicked, stops object B”) or the function of FIGS.12A-B (“object A, when clicked, stops itself”), an event-action relation is created between the “M-Click” event of object A and the “Stop” action of object B. Note that in the case of the function of FIGS.12A-B, object A and object B are the same object.
• Chart7706 shows that when the user selects the “timer expiration sibling” of the function of FIGS.11A-B (“object A, upon timer expiration, stops object B”) or the “timer expiration sibling” of the function of FIGS.12A-B (“object A, upon timer expiration, stops itself”), an event-action relation is created between the “Timer” event of object A and the “Stop” action of object B. As above, note that in the case of the “timer expiration sibling” for the function of FIGS.12A-B, object A and object B are the same object.
• Chart7708 shows that when the user selects the function of FIGS.14A-B (“object A, when clicked, randomly starts object B”), an event-action relation is created between the “M-Click” event of object A and the “R-Start” action of object B.
• Chart7710 shows that when the user selects the “timer expiration sibling” of the function of FIGS.14A-B (“object A, upon timer expiration, randomly starts object B”), an event-action relation is created between the “Timer” event of object A and the “R-Start” action of object B.
• Chart7712 shows that when the user selects the function of FIGS.13A-B (“object A, upon stopping, starts object B”), an event-action relation is created between the “Stopping” event of object A and the “Start” action of object B.
• Chart7714 shows that when the user selects the function of FIGS.15C-D (“object A, upon starting, stops object B”), an event-action relation is created between the “Starting” event of object A and the “Stop” action of object B.
• Chart7716 shows that when the user selects the function of FIGS.15A-B (“object A, upon starting, starts object B”) or the function of FIGS.19A-B (“container object A, upon starting, starts contained object B”), an event-action relation is created between the “Starting” event of object A and the “Start” action of object B.
• Chart7718 shows that when the user selects the function of FIGS.16A-B (“object A, during mouse-over, makes object B play”), two event-action relations are created: (1) between the “M-Over” event of object A and the “Start” action of object B, and (2) between the “M-Leave” event of object A and the “Stop” action of object B.
• Chart7720 shows that when the user selects the function of FIGS.17A-B (“objects A and B play together”), four event-action relations are created: (1) between the “Starting” event of object A and the “Start” action of object B, (2) between the “Stopping” event of object A and the “Stop” action of object B, (3) between the “Starting” event of object B and the “Start” action of object A, and (4) between the “Stopping” event of object B and the “Stop” action of object A.
• Chart7722 shows that when the user selects the function of FIGS.18A-B (“objects A and B play separately”), four event-action relations are created: (1) between the “Starting” event of object A and the “Stop” action of object B, (2) between the “Stopping” event of object A and the “Stop” action of object B, (3) between the “Starting” event of object B and the “Stop” action of object A, and (4) between the “Stopping” event of object B and the “Stop” action of object A.
• Chart7724 shows that when the user selects the function of FIGS.20A-B (“object A, when clicked, stops itself and starts object B”), two event-action relations are created: (1) between the “M-Click” event of object A and the “Stop” action of object A, and (2) between the “M-Click” event of object A and the “Start” action of object B. Note that the “timer expiration sibling” for this function (not shown) may be provided by substituting the “Timer” event for the “M-Click” event as in the earlier sibling functions.
• Chart7726 shows that when the user selects the function of FIGS.25A-B (“video object A, upon reaching cue point, starts object B”), an event-action relation is created between the “T-msec” event of video object A and the “Start” action of object B. The “T-msec” event for video object A includes the actual cue time, in milliseconds, of the current playback point of the video object when the function is programmed; for example, if video object A is paused at three and a half seconds at the time of the programming, the “T-msec” event for video object A will be “T-3500.” In addition, equivalent functionality for creating similar relations is provided for two additional functions described in connection with FIGS.25A-B: “sound object A, upon reaching cue point, starts object B” and “vector object A, upon reaching cue point, starts object B.” Moreover, similar functionality is provided for three additional functions described in connection with FIGS.25A-B: “video object A, upon reaching cue point, stops object B,” “sound object A, upon reaching cue point, stops object B” and “vector object A, upon reaching cue point, stops object B;” the creation of the event-action relation for each of these three additional functions is the same as that for the corresponding “starts object B” functions, except that the action portion of the relation is the “Stop” action of object B rather than its “Start” action.
• Chart7728 shows that when the user selects the function of FIGS.26A-B (“container object A, upon navigation into sub-display, starts contained object B”), an event-action relation is created between the “Nav-Forward” event of object A and the “Start” action of object B. Note that for this function, object A is a container control object whose containing container has sub-display functionality enabled.
• Chart7730 shows that when the user selects the function of FIGS.26C-D (“container object A, upon navigation back from sub-display, stops contained object B”), an event-action relation is created between the “Nav-Back” event of object A and the “Stop” action of object B. Note that for this function, object A is a container control object whose containing container has sub-display functionality enabled.
• Turning now toFIG. 77B, various charts involving vector objects and the creation of “sink-source” relations are shown. Thecharts7732 and7746 show the handling for two functions which were illustrated in FIGS.27A-B and27C-D, respectively; the other charts inFIG. 77B show the handling for functions which were described in the associated discussion.
• Chart7732 shows that when the user selects the function of FIGS.27A-B (“vector object A controls the position of object B”), two sink-source relations are created: (1) between the source “out1” of vector object A and the sink “x-position” of object B, and (2) between the source “out2” of vector object A and the sink “y-position” of object B.
• Chart7734 shows that when the user selects the function “vector object A controls the size of object B,” a sink-source relation is created between the source “out1” of vector object A and the sink “size” of object B.
• Chart7736 shows that when the user selects the function “vector object A controls the rotation of object B,” a sink-source relation is created between the source “out1” of vector object A and the sink “rotation” of object B.
• Chart7738 shows that when the user selects the function “vector object A controls the color of object B,” three sink-source relations are created: (1) between the source “out1” of vector object A and the sink “hue” of object B, (2) between the source “out2” of vector object A and the sink “brightness” of object B, and (3) between the source “out3” of vector object A and the sink “saturation” of object B.
• Chart7740 shows that when the user selects the function “vector object A controls the x-stretch of object B,” a sink-source relation is created between the source “out1” of vector object A and the sink “x-stretch” of object B.
• Chart7742 shows that when the user selects the function “vector object A controls the top cropping of object B,” a sink-source relation is created between the source “out1” of vector object A and the sink “crop-top” of object B.
• Chart7744 shows that when the user selects the function “vector object A controls the shape and softness of object B,” two sink-source relations are created: (1) between the source “out1” of vector object A and the sink “shape” of object B, and (2) between the source “out2” of vector object A and the sink “softness” of object B.
• Chart7746 shows that when the user selects the function of FIGS.27C-D (“vector object A controls the scale of vector object B”), a sink-source relation is created between the source “out1” of vector object A and the sink “scale” of vector object B.
• Chart7748 shows that when the user selects the function “vector object A controls the speed of vector object B,” a sink-source relation is created between the source “out1” of vector object A and the sink “speed” of vector object B.
• Chart7750 shows that when the user selects the function “vector object A controls the playback position of vector object B,” a sink-source relation is created between the source “out1” of vector object A and the sink “play-position” of vector object B.
• In addition to the function handling discussed above in connection with FIGS.77A-B, additional function handling can be provided as follows:
• When the user selects the function of FIGS.18C-D (“objects A and B, upon collision, start object C”), two event-action relations are created: (1) between the “Collision” event of object A and the “Collision” action of object B, and (2) between the “Collision” event of object A and the “Start” action of object C. These two relations do not produce event-action processing; rather they are evaluated as part of the update function for each object (seeFIG. 62, step6227), wherein detection of a graphical collision between an object and its “collision” partner causes a third object to be started. Note that an alternate version of the function may be provided by substituting a “Stop” action for the “Start” action in the second relation above.
• When the user selects the function of FIGS.19C-D (“object A, upon sequence command, starts object B”), an event-action relation is created between the “Next” event of object A and the “Next” action of object B. This relation does not produce event-action processing; rather, when a sequence command is received in the userinput handling block5780 inFIG. 57, one or more of these “next” relations is evaluated (along with the play state of their associated objects) to determine which object in the sequence should play next, and that object is started.
• When the user selects the function of FIGS.19E-F (“object A tweens to object B”), three event-action relations are created: (1) between the “Timer” event of object A and the “Stop” action of object A, (2) between the “Timer” event of object A and the “Start” action of object B, and (3) between the “Tween” event of object A and the “Tween” action of object B. This last relation does not produce event-action processing; rather, the type-specific start and stop functions evaluate these “tween” relations when objects are starting and stopping (seeFIG. 61,steps6112 and6128) to determine if tweening should be provided. Note that a “mouse click sibling” for this function may be provided by substituting the “M-Click” event for the “Timer” event in the first two relations above (the inverse of the earlier sibling functions).
• When the user selects the function of FIGS.26E-F (“object A, when clicked, initiates container transition”), one of four event-action relations is created depending upon of the type of container transition being programmed: between the “M-Click” event of object A and the “Next” action of object B; between the “M-Click” event of object A and the “Previous” action of object B; between the “M-Click” event of object A and the “Navigate” action of object B; between the “M-Click” event of object A and the “Back” action of object B. Each of these relations produces event-action processing that is handled in the communication response function for container objects (seeFIG. 66, step6623). Note that the “timer expiration sibling” for this function may be provided by substituting the “Timer” event for the “M-Click” event as in the earlier sibling functions.
• When the user selects the function of FIGS.26G-H (“object A, when clicked, changes attribute of object B”), an event-action relation is created between the “M-Click” event of object A and the “Attribute” action of object B. The “Attribute” action of this relation is handled in the type-specific communication response functions inFIG. 66 (seesteps6607 and6623). The “Attribute” action additionally specifies which attribute is being changed, and whether the attribute is being enabled, disabled or set (and in the latter case what the new setting is). Note that the “timer expiration sibling” for this function may be provided by substituting the “Timer” event for the “M-Click” event as in the earlier sibling functions.
• We now turn to a discussion of thegraphics engine component5660 ofFIG. 56. The graphics engine is a system component that manages one or more “draw lists.” In the preferred system, a draw list is a data structure that includes a list of zero or more graphical items (such as text items, picture items, sub-display items, etc.) and their associated display settings, as well as various global settings for the draw list as a whole (such as background color, zoom and scroll settings, etc.). Each draw list is identified by a unique “canvas ID” which is assigned to the draw list when it is created. The graphics engine provides various functions for managing draw lists, such as functions for creating new draw lists, adding items to draw lists, adjusting display settings for items in draw lists, adjusting global settings for draw lists, performing draw list utility functions, etc. In the preferred system, these functions are called by theplayback manager5620 during its playback processing operations (as discussed earlier), as shown by the graphics calls5628 ofFIG. 56. In addition, the graphics engine provides a function for rendering a specified draw list into a provided bitmap; this rendering function is called every frame by theplayback display manager5050 when it needs a new bitmap to present in a playback display, as shown by theplayback output5662 ofFIG. 56. Each of the above functions of thegraphics engine5660 is now described in turn.
• Thegraphics engine5660 provides functions for creating and removing draw lists. As stated above, a draw list is a data structure in the graphics engine that includes a unique canvas ID, a list of graphical items and their display settings, and various global settings that affect the way the draw list is rendered. The function for creating a new draw list allocates and initializes a new draw list data structure, assigns a unique canvas ID to it, and returns the canvas ID to the caller of the function so that it can later be passed to other graphics engine functions to identify the draw list.
• Thegraphics engine5660 provides functions for adding and removing graphical items to and from draw lists. The function for adding an item to a draw list receives as arguments the graphical data for the item to be added and the canvas ID of the draw list it should be added to, and it returns an “item ID” for the newly added item so that the item may be referenced in subsequent calls to graphics engine functions. In the preferred system, the supported graphical items include text items, picture items that are bitmaps, picture items that are vector graphics (providing various geometric shapes), and sub-display items. Each of these supported item types is common in the field except for sub-display items. Regarding sub-display items, a sub-display item defines a visual field in the playback output of the draw list of which is is part, and associates this visual field with a separate, nested draw list whose items are rendered within the nested visual field by the rendering function; this sub-display functionality is illustrated inFIGS. 40 through 45C, and is discussed at length below. In addition, it should be noted that in the case of adding a picture item which is a bitmap, the bitmap data is provided as a pointer to a bitmap buffer, which allows video playback to be implemented as a picture item whose bitmap buffer is continually being overwritten by a new bitmap corresponding to the current “frame” of video playback.
• Thegraphics engine5660 provides functions for reading and writing display settings for items on draw lists. In the preferred system, the supported display settings include: x-position, y-position, size, color, transparency, rotation, x-stretch, y-stretch, width, height, x-scroll, y-scroll, shape and softness. The visual effects of these display settings can be seen inFIGS. 4A through 6B (the “cropping” effect shown inFIG. 5D is achieved using a combination of width, height, x-position, y-position, x-scroll and y-scroll, as discussed in connection with the “handle edit mouse move” function ofFIG. 72). Moreover, the functions for reading and writing display settings also support reading and writing of parameters associated with “effect boxes” (such as that shown inFIG. 7G); these parameters, which include the box size and position and the effect type for each active effect box, are treated as display settings within the graphics engine. Each item on a draw list has its own set of display settings, which are used by the rendering function to determine how that item should look when it is rendered. Note that any of the above display settings may be applied to any of the item types supported by the graphics engine.
• Thegraphics engine5660 provides functions for reading and writing global settings for draw lists. In the preferred system, the supported global settings include: background color, zoom, x-scroll and y-scroll. The zoom setting determines the overall scale when the rendering function renders a draw list into a bitmap. The scroll settings determine the overall placement of draw list items within the bitmap. The background color is a “fill color” used by the rendering function to fill the bitmap before rendering individual draw list items. In addition, in the preferred implementation of the graphics engine, whenever the background color of a draw list is changed, the old color is placed on a “color queue,” and thereafter during rendering, the new color appears to “emanate” from the center of the background and progress outward to fill the background; when this capability is used with frequent color updates (such as those that occur when background color cycling is enabled), it results in a visual effect consisting of multiple bands of color emanating from the center of the background.
• Thegraphics engine5660 provides utility functions for converting graphics coordinates and for performing “hit detection.” The first of these utiltiy functions takes a canvas ID and a set of x and y coordinates that use a coordinate system in which the zoom and scroll of the specified draw list are not taken into account (such as the pixel location of the mouse cursor over a sub-display), and adjusts for the zoom and scroll settings to produce “local” coordinates that are logically meaningful within the context of the draw list. The second of these utility functions takes a canvas ID and a pair of local x and y coordinates as arguments, and returns the item ID of the top item at the specified coordinates (or returns zero if no item is at those coordinates).
• Before describing the rendering function of thegraphics engine5660, a more detailed discussion of sub-display items is now provided. As stated above, a sub-display item can be added to a draw list just like any other type of item (such as text or pictures); however unlike those other items, which have their own visual data, a sub-display item instead defines a visual field in the rendered output of the draw list of which is is part, and associates this visual field with a separate, nested draw list. This nested draw list, whose canvas ID is specfied as an argument when the new sub-display item is created, is subordinate to the sub-display item such that the items in the nested draw list are rendered within the visual field defined by the sub-display item. Moreover, sub-display items may be added to a nested draw list, producing nested bitmaps within nested bitmaps, etc. In addition, any of the display settings that can be applied to picture and text items can also be applied to sub-display items, producing a variety of possibilities for altering the appearance of sub-display visual fields.
• FIG. 78 illustrates the nesting of draw lists within draw lists using sub-display items, and the resulting visual output consisting of bitmaps nested within bitmaps, according to embodiments of the present invention. The upper portion of the figure shows exemplary draw lists1 through6 (7800,7802,7804,7806,7808,7810). Each draw list includes various text, picture and sub-display items, such astext item7812,picture item7814 andsub-display item7816. As seen in “drawlist1”7800, thesub-display item7816 references “drawlist2”7802, and thesub-display item7818 references “drawlist3”7804, indicating that the contents of “draw list2” and “drawlist3” are each subordinate items within “drawlist1.” In a similar fashion, as seen in “drawlist2,” thesub-display item7820 references “drawlist4”7806, and thesub-display item7822 references “drawlist5”7808, indicating that the contents of “draw list4” and “drawlist5” are each subordinate items within “drawlist2.” By contrast, “drawlist6”7810, like “drawlist1,” is an independent draw list that is not subordinate to another draw list.
• In the lower portion ofFIG. 78 it can be seen how the nested draw lists shown in the upper portion of the figure are rendered as bitmaps nested within bitmaps. The lower portion of the figure showsexemplary bitmaps1 through6 (7830,7832,7834,7836,7838,7840) which represent the rendered output, respectively, of draw lists1 through6 discussed above. In the current example, “drawlist1,” which is an independent draw list, is rendered as “bitmap1”7830, an independent bitmap. “Drawlist2” and “drawlist3,” which are subordinate draw lists of “draw list1,” and are rendered (respectively) as “bitmap2”7832 and “bitmap3”7834, which appear as nested bitmaps within “bitmap1.” Similarly, “drawlist4” and “drawlist5,” which are subordinate draw lists of “draw list2,” are rendered (respectively) as “bitmap4”7836 and “bitmap5”7838, which appear as nested bitmaps within “bitmap2.” By contrast, “drawlist6,” an independent draw list, is rendered as “bitmap6”7840, an independent bitmap.
• Finally, the graphics engine provides a rendering function for rendering the items of a specified draw list into a bitmap according to the display settings for each item and the global settings for the draw list overall.FIG. 79 shows a flow diagram of this graphics engine rendering function, as implemented within thegraphics engine5660 ofFIG. 56. The function begins atstep7900 when it is called either by the playback display update function ofFIG. 53, or by itself recursively, with a canvas ID, a bitmap buffer and a bitmap size passed as arguments (the bitmap size is specified as a width and height in pixels).
• Instep7902, the bitmap buffer from the previous step is filled with the background color specified for the draw list identified by the canvas ID from the previous step. Moreover, as discussed above, when the background color of a draw list is changed, the old color is placed on a color queue. As part ofstep7902, if there are any old background colors currently included in the color queue for the present draw list, then they are added to the bitmap as follows. Colors in the color queue are processed from youngest to oldest, and for each such color, the bitmap is filled with that color, but with a soft-edged “hole” in the center of the bitmap which is not filled; the size of this hole is proportional to the amount of time since that color was put on the color queue. When the hole for a given color covers the entire bitmap area (meaning that it is no longer seen in the bitmap), then that color is removed from the color queue. As a result of this functionality, when the background color of a draw list is changed, the new color appears to “emanate” from the center of the background and progress outward to fill the background; with frequent color changes, multiple bands of color emanating from the center of the background are produced.
• Instep7904, a transformation matrix is built. When items are to be rendered, this transformation matrix is used to transform from local draw list coordinates to bitmap coordinates. This technique of using transformation matrices to convert between coordinate systems is a standard practice in 2-D and 3-D graphics programming, covered in detail by almost all graphics programming textbooks; Shaum's Outlines Graphics Programming describes the type of matrices used by the graphics engine of the preferred system. Next, instep7906, the first graphical item in the present draw list is identified as the “current item.” In the preferred system, the draw list is stored in sorted order, back to front, so the render loop can employ the standard painter's algorithm (rendering items from back to front like someone painting the background of a picture before adding foreground elements). The remainder of the function is dedicated to a loop which is performed for each item in the draw list as follows.
• Instep7908, the coordinates of the current item are transformed using the transformation matrix fromstep7904. Next, instep7910, the item type of the current item is evaluated, and if it is not a sub-display item, then operation continues atstep7918. Otherwise, if the current item is a sub-display item, then instep7912 the recursion depth variable7926 shown at the bottom ofFIG. 79 is examined. This recursion depth variable starts out at zero when the present function is called from the playback display update function ofFIG. 53, and is incremented each time the present function calls itself recursively (as described below). Instep7912, if incrementing this recursion depth would exceed a maximum depth (such as five or six levels deep, beyond which nested bitmaps are typically too small to be useful), then the current sub-display item is not rendered and operation of the function continues atstep7920. Otherwise, instep7914, a temporary bitmap buffer is allocated which is the size of the visual field specified by the present sub-display item. Next, instep7916, the present function calls itself recursively (after first incrementing the recursion depth variable7926), with the canvas ID of the nested draw list of the present sub-display item (the “sub-canvas ID”) and the address and size of the temporary bitmap buffer from the previous step passed as arguments. In this recursive function call to the present function, the nested draw list of the present sub-display item is rendered into the bitmap from the previous step, and when the function returns, the recursion depth variable is decremented and operation continues atstep7918.
• Instep7918, the graphical data for the current item will be either text data or image data specified by the item, or in the case of a sub-display item, the bitmap buffer fromstep7914 containing the rendered output of the nested draw list of the sub-display item. In either case, the low-level graphics library is called to render the graphical data for the current item into the bitmap fromstep7900 according to the current display settings and effect box parameters for that item (for the display settings, the graphics library employs standard graphics programming techniques well known in the field; for the effect box parameters, the graphics library applies various algorithms for processing graphical data which are also well known, but with time-based modifications to provide a changing appearance over time). Next, instep7920, the current item is evaluated to see if it is the last item in the present draw list. If not, then instep7922 the next item on the list becomes the current item and another iteration of the loop begins atstep7908. Otherwise, if the current item is the last on the list, the function is done7924.
• We now turn to a discussion of the data manager component (5030,5130) of the systems ofFIGS. 50 and 51. The data manager enables other system components to read and write presentation data, and provides various functions for managing and manipulating presentation data. In the preferred embodiment of the system, the data manager function interface includes: a query function to get the listing of objects contained in a specified container; a query function to get the properties data for a specified object; functions for making new objects; functions for deleting and renaming objects; functions for reading and writing setup or content data for a specified object; functions for reading and writing low-level relations and associated information.
• In addition to the above function interface, which provides an abstraction layer through which other system components access presentation data, the preferred embodiment of the data manager includes two advantageous features for providing the required functionality in an optimal manner. First, due to the practical importance of managing data efficiently, especially over a network, the data manager includes a specialized data caching mechanism that works in conjunction with a custom database file format to optimize low level data access operations. Second, in system configurations which include pointer objects, the data manager provides “path resolution” functionality to resolve pointer object indirection and access the appropriate data; this path resolution functionality provides a clean and efficient solution for enabling the kinds of “virtual hierarchies” shown inFIGS. 46 and 47.
• The following discussion of the data manager system component begins with a general explanation of the data manager and its role within the preferred system (including a discussion of some concepts presented earlier in connection withFIG. 50). Next the internal structure of the data manager is discussed, followed by an explanation of the structure and format of presentation data in the preferred system. Next, the function interface of the data manager is described, followed by descriptions of various internal data manager functions which provide caching and path resolution functionality. Finally, the discussion concludes with a description of the object model for the preferred system.
• The main role of the data manager is to make presentation data available to other system components for reading and writing. As discussed throughout this specification, presentation data is multimedia content that can be authored and played by users of the system. Depending on system configuration, the presence or absence of certain system features can affect the nature of this presentation data, and by extension, whether or not certain associated capabilities of the data manager are required. In particular, the container nesting functionality of FIGS.32A-B and the pointer object functionality ofFIGS. 34A through 37C are examples of features which are specifically supported by aspects of data manager functionality described in the following discussion (container listing and path resolution, respectively). In addition, the data manager functions associated with low-level relations are provided to support relation-based communications (as described in the discussions of the presentation engine and control display manager). Beyond these capabilities associated with particular features of the system, the basic functionality of the data manager, which is to allow other system components to access, manage and edit objects and their associated data, may be implemented in a relatively straightforward manner as might be typical in any system involving objects and object data.
• For the purposes of the present discussion, the preferred implementation of the data manager, which supports all of the above features, is described. The preferred data manager makes presentation data accessible to other system components in the form of a hierarchical data tree of one or more levels. This data tree is comprised of data objects, with each object containing three forks of data: properties data, setup data and content data (as detailed below in connection withFIG. 85). Briefly, the properties data for each object consists of variables and flags that specify general object characteristics, such as object type and icon position. The setup data for each object consists of variables and flags that specify certain type-specific object characteristics, such as display settings for visual objects. The content data for each object, in the case of media objects, consists of media data such as text data, image data, video data, sound data, etc., and in the case of vector objects and script objects, consists of data that defines the object's playback activity. In the case of container objects, the content data is the set of low-level relations contained in that container object, which are accessed via a set of relation-oriented functions provided in the data manager function interface.
• The entry point into this hierarchical data tree provided by the data manager is a “root database,” which is specified to the data manager at initialization time. An appropriate format for databases is detailed later in this discussion, but in brief, the currently preferred format involves a hierarchically structured database with one container object at its top internal level that either directly or through container nesting contains the rest of the objects in the database. In the case of the root database, this top level container object acts as the “root object” for the system, providing an entry point through which the hierarchical data tree can be accessed. Other system components access this data tree by requesting object listings for container objects, starting with the root object and going down the branches of the tree as needed.
• Throughout the system (except for the internal operation of the data manager), objects are identified using path strings in the form of a “root path,” in which the first entry in the path string is the root object, the last entry in the path string identifies the object in question, and the intervening entries identify any intervening container objects. These root paths in the preferred system are equivalent to the root paths discussed earlier in the Example Scenarios section in connection withFIGS. 46 and 47, except that in the preferred system it is assumed that the database for a root path is the root database specified at initialization time, and therefore the database is not specified explicitly as part of each individual root path (and of course the path strings use object names rather than diagram reference numbers to identify objects). Upon receiving a request or command with one of these root paths, the data manager performs path resolution on the root path to convert it into a “physical path,” in which the database (which may or may not be the root database) is specified explicitly; it is this physical path which is used by the data manager in its internal operations.
• In the presently preferred embodiment of the system, there is just one root object at a time, i.e., only one entry point into the presentation data. To understand the role of this root object, and how its role may vary in different system configurations, it is important to understand that the system can also be implemented with multiple root objects instead of just one; for example, multiple root objects might each represent a different “presentation” that the user is playing. In the preferred system, in which there is just one root object at a time, the need to support a variety of user scenarios may be satisfied by adapting the way in which the root object is managed. Some examples were provided earlier in connection withFIG. 50 describing how this might be done for a variety of user scenarios. These scenarios cover cases such as the user being interested in only one presentation at a time, or being interested in maintaining a “home” data file where multiple presentations can be managed and arranged, or being interested in managing multiple presentations stored as individual database files on the host computer, etc. In each case, as discussed in connection withFIG. 50, the approach of having just one root object can be successfully adapted to handle the situation.
• Turning now to a discussion of the internal structure of the preferred data manager,FIG. 80 shows a block diagram of the data manager component (5030,5130) of the systems ofFIGS. 50 and 51. Thedata manager representation8000 ofFIG. 80 includes thedata manager block8020 and someexemplary presentation data8010, which is accessible to the data manager via the file and network services of the system. In the embodiment ofFIG. 80, thedata manager8020 makes presentation data available to other system components by responding to data requests, as shown bydata output8002. Additionally, in embodiments involving editing of presentation data, the data manager can receive editcommands8004 that result in the addition, removal or modification of presentation data.
• The diagram ofFIG. 80 showsdata output8002 and editcommands8004 being handled by a data operations block8030, which handles data requests and edit commands by reading and writing8034 presentation data via thecache manager8040. The cache manager, in turn, is shown accessing presentation data either by reading and writing8044 directly to the file access module8060 (which it does in the case of HFS objects), or by reading and writing8042 presentation data via the database manager8050 (which it does in the case of database objects). In the latter case, thedatabase manager8050 accesses the data by reading and writing8052 to thefile access module8060. In either case, thefile access module8060 performs the requested read or write operation using the file or network services of the system. In addition, in embodiments that support pointer objects, the data operations block8030 issues functioncalls8032 to thepath resolution block8070 to establish the physical location of the relevant data before performing the requested operations. Thispath resolution block8070 may in turn issue function calls8072 to thecache manager block8040 to acquire additional information needed during the path resolution process.
• Turning now toFIG. 81, we see some exemplary data structures which are used by the sub-blocks of the data manager as follows. First, recall from the discussion above that at initialization time a root database is specified to the data manager. The location of this root database is specified in the form of a Universal Resource Locator (URL), such as a file path or network address. At initialization time, the URL for the root database is stored in adata manager variable8100, “root database URL.” Thereafter, when the data operations block8030 ofFIG. 80 handles data requests and edit commands from other system components, it first “resolves” any root paths by calling the “resolve database path” function of thepath resolution block8070, passing as an argument this “root database URL” from the variable8100 (as well as the root path being resolved and several flags explained later in the discussion).
• FIG. 81 also shows two cache lists that are maintained inside thecache manager8040 ofFIG. 80, adatabase cache8102 and anHFS cache8106. Only one instance of each data structure is shown, but in the cache manager there are typically multiple instances maintained on lists. Eachdatabase cache8102 represents a database file which has recently been accessed, and includes the database URL, the expiration time at which the cached data needs to be re-verified, and various chunks of data corresponding to the database file format (explained below). EachHFS cache8106 represents an HFS folder or file which has recently been accessed, and includes the URL of the folder or file, the expiration time at which the cached data needs to be re-verified, and either file data or a listing of the contents of the folder (as well as a flag to distinguish between the two). Additionally, for eachdatabase cache8102, a set of objectcache data structures8104 for that database is maintained (again, only one instance of the object cache structure is shown, but multiple objects at a time are typically cached for each database). Eachobject cache8104 includes an object ID and various chunks of data corresponding to the database file format (explained below).
• Using thesecache data structures8102,8104 and8106, thecache manager8040 provides prediction and update functionality as follows. For prediction, the cache manager pre-loads database data and HFS data into its cache data structures according to a predictive method to provide more immediate access to data when it is first requested. The cache manager's predictive method uses the hierarchical structure of the presentation data to determine which data to load next; in the preferred embodiment this involves loading data for objects in the same container as and nested below any recently requested objects. For update functionality, the cache manager detects when previously loaded data has been changed and is no longer valid. The exact mechanism is detailed in connection withFIG. 82, but briefly, it involves using “change counts” maintained in the database file format (discussed below) which list the number of times each piece of data in the database has been modified. By polling the appropriate change counts in a database file and comparing them with the cached versions, the cache manager is able to determine when data previously loaded into the memory cache has been changed and needs to be reloaded (such as during collaborative editing as seen inFIG. 31B).
• The lower portion ofFIG. 81 shows adatabase file format8108 which supports the preferred functionality of the data manager ofFIG. 80. Within this data manager ofFIG. 80, thedatabase manager sub-block8050 is responsible for determining the location of requested data within database files, which is accomplished according to thedatabase file format8108 ofFIG. 81. As shown inFIG. 81, the preferred database file format consists of various “chunks” of data, which is a common approach for organizing data files.
• The left side of thedatabase file format8108 shows information relating to the entire database file; this information consists of three data chunks: a header chunk, directory chunk and changes chunk. The header chunk provides information enabling the data manager to access the directory and changes chunks (including change counts for each of those chunks). The directory chunk is a listing of all the objects in the database, with each entry including an object name, the object ID number (which is non-zero and unique for each object in a database), the object ID of the parent container (which is zero for the top object in the database internal hierarchy), and the file offset of the object's info chunk. The changes chunk is also a listing of all the objects in the database, with each entry including the object ID and the change counts for the object's info chunk, setup chunk and content chunk. By using a consolidated block of change counts for all the objects in a database file, there is no need to perform a separate polling operation for each object individually, which saves substantial time when operating over a network.
• The right side of thedatabase file format8108 shows information relating to individual objects; this information consists of three chunks per object: an info chunk, setup chunk and content chunk. These three chunks correspond to the object's properties data, setup data and content data, respectively (with the info chunk additionally including information that provides access to the setup chunk and content chunk independently from one another).
• We now provide a description of the data manager function interface, as implemented within the data operations block8030 ofFIG. 80. Each of the functions of the data manager function interface, before handling the request or command, converts any root paths specified by the caller into physical paths via the “resolve database path” function of thepath resolution block8070. The returned physical path includes a URL and an object ID, the latter of which will be either non-null (in the case of a database object) or null (in the case of an HFS object). Also, “resolve database path” accepts some arguments which select among certain options involved in the path resolution process. Specifically, these options involve whether or not to resolve the last element of the path (called a “leaf”) if it can be resolved. There are three cases where this may happen: (1) the leaf is a pointer object or container pointer object; (2) the leaf is a folder pointer object; and (3) the leaf is a database file within an HFS folder. Three flag arguments are provided to the “resolve database path” function (“resPtrLeaf,” “resFdrLeaf” and “resDbLeaf,” respectively) to specify whether or not the final resolution should take place in each of these three cases. Unless otherwise noted, all three of these flags are set to true when “resolve database path” is called by the functions of the data manager function interface, which are described as follows.
• The “get container listing” function of the data manager function interface returns the listing of objects directly contained within a specified container (which may be a container object, a container pointer object, a folder pointer object, or an HFS folder). The root path of the specified container is passed as an argument, and after the path is resolved, the listing of objects contained in that container is aquired from thecache manager8040 using the physical path. Depending on whether the physical path identifies a container object in a database or identifies a folder in an HFS (as per the object ID being non-null or null, respectively), the cache manager either derives a container listing from the (possibly cached) directory chunk read from thedatabase manager8050, or aquires and returns a file listing from thefile access block8060. In the former case, the directory chunk shown indatabase file format8108 is searched for objects whose “parent ID” is the same as the object ID of the specified container object, and the listing of those objects is returned.
• The “get object properties” function of the data manager function interface returns the properties data for a specified object. The root path of the specified object is passed as an argument, and the root path is resolved twice, once with all the flags mentioned above (“resPtrLeaf,” “resFdrLeaf,” “resDbLeaf”) set to false, and another time with all of them set to true. The physical path returned when the flags were false is used to aquire all of the properties data except for the “content change count,” which is aquired using the physical path returned when the flags were set to true (in the case of pointer objects, content data is “owned” by the base object and therefore full resolution is appropriate). After the path is resolved and the cache manager has been called for the properties data, the cache manager either returns the properties data from the object's (possibly cached) info chunk read from thedatabase manager8050, or in the case of an HFS object, returns null. In addition, the data manager function interface provides a function for changing the icon position of an object (the one object property which may be changed from outside the data manager). The specific data comprising object properties in the present embodiment of the system is shown inFIG. 85.
• The data manager function interface includes several functions for making new objects. These functions, which are called by the “cmd background click” function ofFIG. 76, include “new object,” “duplicate object,” “make pointer object” and “export object.” Each of these is now discussed in turn.
• The “new object” function of the data manager function interface is used to create new objects. The object type and root path for the new object are passed as arguments, as well as, optionally, data with which to initialize the new object (such as media data in the case of a new media object, or a database in the case of a new container object). First, the “new object” function determines the physical path of the container in which the new object is going to be located (the “destination container”), which it does by removing the new object name from the new object path and resolving the truncated path with all flags set to true. Next, the new object is created by calling thecache manager8040 with the type and name for the new object and the physical path of the destination container. The cache manager creates the new object by calling thedatabase manager8050 if the destination container is a container object, or by calling thefile access block8060 if the destination container is a an HFS folder. If the newly created object is a container object in a database file, a new container control object is also created at the same time inside the newly created container object. Once the new object has been created, the properties data of the new object is initialized and any additional initialization data that was passed as an argument is written into the content data for the new object (or in the case of a newly created container object, additional initialization data becomes the initial hierarchical object tree contained by the container object).
• The “duplicate object” function of the data manager function interface creates a new object by copying a “source object.” The root path of the source object and the root path for the new object are passed as arguments. First, the “duplicate object” function determines the physical path of the container in which the new object is going to be located (the “destination container”), which it does by removing the new object name from the new object path and resolving the truncated path with all flags set to true. Next, it determines the physical path of the source object by taking the source object root path which was passed as an argument and resolving it with just the “resDbLeaf” flag set to true (the setting of this flag supports the import function ofFIG. 3D). Next, the new object is created by calling thecache manager8040 with the type and name for the new object (the former of which is the same as the source object) and the physical path of the destination container. The cache manager creates the new object by calling thedatabase manager8050 if the destination container is a container object, or by calling thefile access block8060 if the destination container is a an HFS folder. Once the new object has been created, the properties data, setup data and content data for the new object are copied from the respective data forks of the source object. In the case of a new container object, the hierarchical object tree contained by the source container object is copied to become the initial object tree contained by the newly created container object.
• The “make pointer object” function of the data manager function interface creates a new pointer object that references an existing object as its “base object.” The root path of the base object and the root path for the new pointer object are passed as arguments. First, the “make pointer object” function determines the physical path of the container in which the new pointer object is going to be located (the “destination container”), which it does by removing the new object name from the new object path and resolving the truncated path with all flags set to true. Next, it determines the physical path of the base object by taking the base object root path which was passed as an argument and resolving it with all flags set to true. Next, the new object is created by calling thecache manager8040 with the type and name for the new object (the former of which is the same as the base object) and the physical path of the destination container. The cache manager creates the new object by calling thedatabase manager8050 if the destination container is a container object, or by calling thefile access block8060 if the destination container is a an HFS folder. Once the new object has been created, the properties data and setup data for the new object are copied from the respective data forks of the base object, and the content data of the new object is set to the physical path of the base object.
• The “export object” function of the data manager function interface creates a new database file in an HFS folder, and copies the hierarchical tree of objects contained in a “source container object” into the newly created database. The root path of the source container object and the root path for the new database file are passed as arguments. First, the “export object” function determines the physical path of the HFS folder in which the new database file is going to be located (the “destination folder”), which it does by removing the new database file name from the new database path and resolving the truncated path with all flags set to true. Next, it determines the physical path of the source container object by taking the source container object root path which was passed as an argument and resolving it with all flags set to true. Next, a new database file is created by calling thecache manager8040 with the name for the new database file and the physical path of the destination folder. The cache manager creates the new database file by calling thefile access block8060. Once the new database file has been created, the source container object and its contained hierarchical object tree are copied into the newly created database file.
• The “delete object” function of the data manager function interface deletes a specified object. The root path of the object to be deleted is passed as an argument. First, the “delete object” function determines the physical path of the object to be deleted, which it does by taking the root path which was passed as an argument and resolving it with all flags set to false. Next, the object is deleted by calling thecache manager8040 with the physical path of the object to be deleted. When deleting the object, the cache manager also purges any existing caches associated with the object.
• The “rename object” function of the data manager function interface renames a specified object. The root path of the object to be renamed and its new name are passed as arguments. First, the “rename object” function determines the physical path of the object to be renamed, which it does by taking the root path which was passed as an argument and resolving it with all flags set to false. Next, the object is renamed by calling thecache manager8040 with the physical path of the object to be renamed and its new name. When renaming the object, the cache manager also updates any existing caches associated with the object, and updates any low-level relations which reference the object.
• The “setup read” and “setup write” functions of the data manager function interface are used for reading and writing setup data, respectively. For both functions, the root path of an object and a buffer for providing or receiving the setup data are passed as arguments. Both functions first determine the physical path of the object whose setup data is being accessed, which is done by taking the root path which was passed as an argument and resolving it with only the “resolveDbLeaf” flag set to true. Next, the setup data for the object is read or written by calling the respective cache manager function with the physical path of the object and the above buffer passed as arguments. In the case of the cache manager function for reading setup data, certain cache management procedures are involved which are detailed below in connection withFIG. 82.
• The “content read” and “content write” functions of the data manager function interface are used for reading and writing content data, respectively. For both functions, the root path of an object and a buffer for providing or receiving the content data are passed as arguments. Both functions first determine the physical path of the object whose content data is being accessed, which is done by taking the root path which was passed as an argument and resolving it with all flags set to true. Next, the content data for the object is read or written by calling the respective cache manager function with the physical path of the object and the above buffer passed as arguments. In the case of the cache manager function for reading content data, certain cache management procedures are involved which are similar to those detailed below in connection withFIG. 82.
• The “create relation” and “delete relation” functions of the data manager function interface are used for adding and removing low-level relations, respectively. For both functions, the root path of a container object and a description of a relation (the latter comprising two object names, two capability names and two capability types) are passed as arguments. Both functions first determine the physical path of the container in which the relation is being added or removed, which is done by taking the container object root path which was passed as an argument and resolving it with all flags set to true. Next, the described low-level relation is added to or removed from the content data of the above container object; the content data is read, modified and written back by calling the respective cache manager functions with the physical path of the container object and a data buffer as arguments.
• The “read relations” function of the data manager function interface returns a listing of all the low-level relations directly container within a specified container object. The root path of a container object is passed as an argument. First, the “read relations” function determines the physical path of the container containing the relations, which it does by taking the container object root path which was passed as an argument and resolving it with all flags set to true. Next, the content data for the above container object is read by calling thecache manager8040 with the physical path of the container object and a data buffer passed as arguments. The returned content data includes a listing of the relations contained by the specified container, and this listing is returned to the caller of the function.
• The “get partner objects” function of the data manager function interface returns a listing of all the objects which are connected via low-level relations to a specified relational capability on a specified object. The root path of the specified object and the name and type of a relational capability are passed as arguments. First, the “get partner objects” function determines the physical path of the container containing the specified object, which it does by removing the object name from the object path and resolving the truncated path with all flags set to true. Next, the content data for the above container object is read by calling thecache manager8040 with the physical path of the container object and a data buffer passed as arguments. The returned content data includes a listing of the relations contained by that container, and this listing is searched for any relations where one “side” of the relation matches the specified object and relational capability. For any such relations it finds, it adds the object specified on the other side of the relation to a list of partner objects. When it is done searching, it returns the list of partner objects.
• Turning now toFIG. 82, the figure shows a flow diagram of the cache manager function for reading the setup data of a database object, as implemented within thecache manager block8040 ofFIG. 80. This function illustrates the way in which the cache manager, by using thedatabase caches8102 andobject caches8104 ofFIG. 81, in conjunction with thedatabase file format8108, is able to minimize the amount of data access and thereby improve system performance (note that the steps involving database access may be implemented within the database manager8050). The function begins atstep8200, when it is called by the above “setup read” function of the data manager function interface with a database URL and an object ID passed as arguments. Next, instep8202, the database URL from the previous step is compared with the URL of each item in the list of cacheddatabases8102 until a match is found, or until the list is traversed without a match. If there wasn't a match, then instep8204 the database file specified by the database URL is opened and acorresponding database cache8102 is allocated and added to the cache list. Next, insteps8206 and8208, the newly addeddatabase cache8102 is initialized: the header chunk, directory chunk and changes chunk are read from the database file and written into the cache; the URL is set to the database URL fromstep8200; and the expiration time is set to the present system time plus a preferred duration (typically under a minute). After initializing the new database cache, operation of the function continues atstep8226.
• Otherwise, if there was a match instep8202, then instep8210 the expiration time in the database cache fromstep8202 is compared against the system clock. If the expiration time has not been exceeded, then execution of the function continues atstep8226. Otherwise, instep8212, the header chunk currently in the database cache is temporarily archived, and a fresh copy of the header chunk is read from the database file and written into the cache. Next, instep8214, the change count for the directory chunk (part of the newly read header chunk) is compared against the archived version. If there is a discrepancy, then instep8216 the directory chunk is reloaded from the database file. Next, instep8218, the change count for the changes chunk (part of the newly read header chunk) is compared against the archived version. If there is no discrepancy, then operation continues atstep8226. Otherwise, instep8220, the changes chunk currently in the database cache is temporarily archived, and a fresh copy of the changes chunk is read from the database file. Next, instep8222, the change counts for the various data forks of each object (as per the newly read changes chunk) are compared against the archived values, and instep8224, the cached data for any chunks which have changed is deleted.
• Next, instep8226, the list ofobject caches8104 attached to thedatabase cache8102 is searched, and if an object cache is found which matches the object ID fromstep8200, then instep8234 the cached setup chunk within theobject cache8104 is checked, and if it is present, then instep8240 the address of the cached setup chunk is returned to the caller and the function is done. Otherwise, if instep8234 the cached setup chunk is not present, operation continues atstep8236. Returning to step8226, if noobject cache8104 matching the object ID fromstep8200 is found, then in step8228 a new object cache entry is created and added to the list of cached objects, and its object ID is set to the object ID fromstep8200. Next, instep8230, the directory chunk in thedatabase cache8102 is searched for the data offset of the info chunk corresponding to the object ID fromstep8200. Next, instep8232, the info chunk for the specified object is read from the database file and written into the newly created object cache. Next, instep8236, the file offset for the setup chunk is read from the info chunk (which may need to be loaded as above if the function arrived at this step fromstep8234 and the info chunk is not already present in the object cache). Next, instep8238, using the file offset from the previous step, the setup chunk is loaded from the database file and written into the newly created object cache. Next, instep8240, the address of the cached setup chunk is returned to the caller and the function is done.
• FIGS. 83 and 84 illustrate two functions of thepath resolution block8070 ofFIG. 80: “resolve database path” and “resolve HFS path.” Some examples of path resolution were provided earlier in reference to the “virtual hierarchies” ofFIGS. 46 and 47. In the preferred implementation provided by the above two functions, the path resolution process begins with a function call to “resolve database path.” This “resolve database path” function concludes in one of three ways: (1) by calling itself recursively and returning the results; (2) by calling the “resolve HFS path” function and returning the results; or (3) by returning a database URL and non-zero object ID. The “resolve HFS path” function concludes in one of two ways: (1) by calling the “resolve database path” function and returning the results; or (2) by returning the URL of an HFS object and a null object ID. Together, these two path resolution functions support the path resolution requirements of the preferred system.
• FIG. 83 shows a flow diagram of the function “resolve database path,” as implemented within thepath resolution block8070 ofFIG. 80. The function begins atstep8300, when it is called either from the data operations block8030 ofFIG. 80, from the “resolve HFS path” function as discussed above, or from itself recursively, with a “database URL,” a “database path,” and three flags, “resPtrLeaf,” “resFdrLeaf” and “resDbLeaf” (which were discussed earlier) passed as arguments. The “database path” argument is similar to a root path in that the first entry in the path specifies the top object in a database; however unlike a root path, the database for the “database path” argument is specified explicitly by the “database URL” argument, and may be a database other than the root database.
• Instep8302, a string variable “partial path” is initialized to be empty. Next, a loop is performed in which each segment of the “database path” fromstep8300, starting at the beginning and working toward the end, is successively appended to the “partial path” and evaluated, as follows. Instep8304, the next segment of the “database path” is appended to the “partial path.” Next, instep8306, thecache manager8040 is queried for the “object ID,” “pointer flag” and “folder pointer flag” (the latter two being part of the properties data) for the object specified by the “database URL” fromstep8300 and the current “partial path.” Next, instep8308, a local boolean variable “leaf flag” is set to indicate if the segment appended instep8304 is the final segment (the “leaf”) of the “database path” from step8300 (which is the case when the “partial path” equals the “database path”).
• Next, instep8310, if the “pointer flag” fromstep8306 is equal to true, then instep8312 the “leaf flag” fromstep8308 is checked, and if that flag is not true, then operation continues atstep8326. Otherwise, if the “leaf flag” instep8312 is true, then instep8314 the “resPtrLeaf” flag fromstep8300 is checked (to determine if pointer objects which are the last element of a path should be resolved), and if that flag is true, then operation continues atstep8326. Otherwise, if the “resPtrLeaf” flag is false, or if the “pointer flag” checked instep8310 is false, then operation of the function continues atstep8316.
• Instep8316, if the “folder pointer flag” fromstep8306 is equal to true, then instep8318 the “leaf flag” fromstep8308 is checked, and if that flag is not true, then operation continues atstep8326. Otherwise, if the “leaf flag” instep8318 is true, then instep8320 the “resFdrLeaf” flag fromstep8300 is checked (to determine if folder pointer objects which are the last element of a path should be resolved), and if that flag is true, then operation continues atstep8326. Otherwise, if the “resFdrLeaf” flag is false, or if the “folder pointer flag” checked instep8316 is false, then operation of the function continues atstep8322.
• Instep8322, the “leaf flag” fromstep8308 is checked, and if it is equal to true, meaning that the entire database path fromstep8300 has been evaluated, then path resolution is complete and instep8324 the function returns the “database URL” fromstep8300 and the “object ID” fromstep8306. Otherwise, operation continues atstep8304 where another iteration of the loop begins.
• If the function reachesstep8326, then together the “database URL” and “partial path” specify an object which needs to be dereferenced (either a pointer object, which includes container pointer objects, or a folder pointer object). Instep8326, the content data of this object is read from thecache manager8040. The returned content data contains a URL and object ID which specify the base object for the above object, and these are written into two variables, “new URL” and “new ID,” respectively. Next, instep8328, the “new ID” is examined, and if it is equal to zero, meaning that the base object is an HFS object, then instep8330 the remaining portion of the “database path” from step8300 (the last part of the path that has not yet been appended to “partial path”) is appended to the end of “new URL.” Next, instep8332, the “resolve HFS path” function ofFIG. 84 is called with the “new URL” and the three flags fromstep8300 passed as arguments.
• Otherwise, if the “new ID” examined instep8328 is non-zero, meaning that the base object is a database object, then in step8334 a cache manager function is called with the “new URL” and “new ID” passed as arguments to aquire the database path for this base object. This cache manager function constructs the database path (which becomes the “new database path”) by starting with the name of the object specified by the object ID, and successively adding container object names to the beginning of the path as per the parent ID for each successive object, until the name of the top container object in the database is added. Next, instep8336, the remaining portion of the “database path” from step8300 (the last part of the path that has not yet been appended to “partial path”) is appended to the end of this “new database path” from the previous step. Next, instep8338, the present function calls itself recursively with the “new URL,” the “new database path” and the three flags fromstep8300 passed as arguments.
• FIG. 84 shows a flow diagram of the function “resolve HFS path,” as implemented within thepath resolution block8070 ofFIG. 80. The function begins atstep8400, when it is called from the “resolve database path” function ofFIG. 83 with the URL of an HFS object and three flags, “resPtrLeaf,” “resFdrLeaf” and “resDbLeaf” (which were discussed earlier) passed as arguments. Instep8402, a string variable “partial path” is initialized to be empty. Next, a loop is performed in which each segment of the URL fromstep8400, starting at the beginning and working toward the end, is successively appended to the “partial path” and evaluated, as follows. Instep8404, the next segment of the URL is appended to the “partial path.” Next, instep8406, a local boolean variable “db flag” is set to indicate if the object currently specified by the “partial path” is a database file (which is determined by calling the cache manager8040). Next, instep8408, a local boolean variable “leaf flag” is set to indicate if the segment appended instep8404 is the final segment (the “leaf”) of the URL from step8400 (which is the case when the “partial path” equals the URL).
• Next, instep8410, if the “db flag” fromstep8406 is equal to true, then instep8412 the “leaf flag” fromstep8408 is checked, and if that flag is not true, then operation continues atstep8420. Otherwise, if the “leaf flag” instep8412 is true, then instep8414 the “resDbLeaf” flag fromstep8400 is checked (to determine if database files which are the last element of a path should be resolved), and if that flag is true, then operation continues atstep8420. Otherwise, if the “resDbLeaf” flag is false, or if the “db flag” checked instep8410 is false, then operation continues atstep8416. Instep8416, the “leaf flag” fromstep8408 is checked, and if it is true, meaning that the entire URL fromstep8400 has been evaluated, then path resolution is complete and instep8418 the function returns the URL fromstep8400 and a null object ID. Otherwise, operation continues atstep8404 where another iteration of the loop begins.
• If the function reachesstep8420, then the “partial path” variable specifies a database file which needs to be converted into a database path for the top container object in that database file. Instep8420, a “new database path” variable is set to the name of the top object in the database (which is aquired by calling the cache manager8040). Next, instep8422, the remaining portion of the URL from step8400 (the last part that has not yet been appended to “partial path”) is appended to the end of the “new database path.” Next, instep8424, the “resolve database path” function ofFIG. 83 is called with the “partial path” (which is a database URL as per step8406), the “new database path” and the three flags fromstep8400 passed as arguments.
• Turning now toFIG. 85, we see the object model for the presently preferred implementation of the system. This object model shows how the various elements of the presentation data discussed throughout this specification may be organized to fit the preferreddatabase file format8108 ofFIG. 81. As can be seen in theobject model8500, all of the object types share the same set of properties data, which includes object type, icon position (for map view in the control display), pointer flag, folder pointer flag, setup change count and content change count. Also, as can be seen in theobject model8500, the setup data and content data for each of the object types contain different sets of data as appropriate for each type. The setup data for many of the object types includes display settings and playback params, and the specific variables included in each of these are listed in the bottom section of the object model.
• Several additional aspects of theobject model8500 should be noted. First, the content data for container objects is the set of low-level relations existing among the objects directly contained in that container; the data format for these low-level relations is shown at the bottom of the object model. Second, the display settings and playback params in the setup data for a container object apply only to its sub-display, and are used only if the sub-display flag is set to true. Third, not all of the playback params listed at the bottom of the object model are necessarily used by every object type with playback params in its setup data, since certain playback params are not applicable to certain object types. Finally, pointer objects (which includes container pointer objects) and folder pointer objects are identified by the corresponding flags in the properties data, and as stated earlier, the content data for such objects contains the physical path of the base object.
• Although the present invention has been shown and described with respect to preferred embodiments, various changes and modifications are deemed to lie within the spirit and scope of the invention as claimed. The corresponding structures, materials, acts, and equivalents of all means or step plus function elements in the claims which follow are intended to include any structure, material, or acts for performing the functions in combination with other claimed elements as specifically claimed.

Claims (5)

1. An authoring method comprising the steps of:

storing presentation data including at least one container object containing at least two media objects containing media data, the media data including picture data;

playing back the presentation data by presenting the media data in a playback display, wherein the display position of the media data in the playback display can be specified by a user of the system; and

adding a new picture from a connected camera to the presentation data being displayed in the playback display by performing actions that include initiating a picture capture process for the connected camera and concluding the picture capture process to accept the picture, followed by further action comprising adding the accepted picture to the presentation data by specifying its display position in the playback display.

2. An authoring method comprising the steps of:

storing presentation data including at least one container object containing at least two media objects containing media data, the media data including video data;

playing back the presentation data by presenting the media data in a playback display, wherein the display position of the media data in the playback display can be specified by a user of the system; and

adding a new video recording from a connected camera to the presentation data being displayed in the playback display by performing actions that include activating a video capture window for the connected camera, initiating a video capture process in the video capture window and concluding the video capture process to accept the video recording, followed by further action comprising adding the accepted video recording to the presentation data by specifying its display position in the playback display.

3. An authoring method comprising the steps of:

storing presentation data including at least one container object containing at least two media objects containing media data, the media data including at least one of text data, picture data and video data;

playing back the presentation data by presenting the media data in a playback display, wherein the display color of the media data can be specified by a user of the system; and

adjusting the display color of media data being displayed in the playback display by performing four actions consisting of (1) selecting via a graphical user interface (GUI) a command for adjusting color, (2) selecting a piece of media data displayed in the playback display, (3) moving a pointing device in a two dimensional plane wherein the color hue is mapped to one axis of the plane and the color brightness is mapped to another axis of the plane and the color of the displayed media data changes in real time in response to the movement of the pointing device, and (4) accepting the new display color of the media data.

4. An authoring method as recited inclaim 3, wherein the selection of the command via the GUI is performed by selecting a command icon in the GUI.

5. An authoring method as recited inclaim 3, wherein the two dimensional plane has a hue axis which wraps around in a continuous fashion, whereby movement in the plane along the hue axis beyond the position corresponding to red yields a color of violet, and movement in the plane along the hue axis beyond the position corresponding to violet yields a color of red.

Images